WebFOCUS Home
  Contact Us!
  Contact Us!
Release 7.7.05
  7.7.05 New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      Active Technologies Enhancements
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Setting the ALPHA Background Color of an Active Technologies Report
        Displaying the Heading in a Rollup Table
        Controlling the Externalization of JavaScript Files
        Setting the Default Filter Value for a Column on an Active Technologies Dashboard
        Hiding a Report Object on an Active Technologies Dashboard
        Creating a Heading Area With Controls Using the Dashboard Bar
        Defining Custom Styles for an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
        Using an Active Technologies Form Control to Show or Hide Columns in a Report or Chart
      ReportCaster Enhancements
        Group Administration in ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Scheduling Enhancements
        ReportCaster Library Enhancements
        New Formats Available in ReportCaster
        Additional Functionality in the ReportCaster API
      Reporting Language Enhancements
        Accordion By Row Support for Multi-verb Requests
        Support for Column Totals in Accordion by Row Reports
        Compound Layout Header Supports AS Name Syntax
        Table of Contents for Coordinated Compound and Burst Reports
        Expanded Browser and Device Support for Images in HTML Documents
        Enhancement to HFREEZE Browser Support
        HFREEZE With Blank Column Titles
        Support for Images Stored in BLOB Fields in HTML and DHTML Reports
        Displaying Superscripts On Data, Heading, and Footing Lines
        Enhancement for Embedding TrueType Fonts Into WebFOCUS PDF Reports Generated in Windows
        Support for Hyperlinks in Text Markups in PDF Report Output
        Support for Vertical Alignment of Text Markup in PDF Report Output
        Support for FORMAT XLSX Burst Option on the MAC
        Inserting Images Into EXL07 Workbook Headers and Footers
        EXL07 Template Enhancements
        ROWOVERFLOW Enhancements for EXL07 and EXL2K
        Using EXL2K Formula With Prefix Operators
        Styling Tags for SUBTOTAL and GRANDTOTAL Lines
        Conditional Styling Based on ACROSS Values
        SET ACROSSTITLE=SIDE Enhancements
        Controlling Display of an ACROSS Title for a Single Field
        Selecting and Assigning Column Titles to ACROSS Values
        Applying Summary Commands to Selected Fields in ACROSS Groups
        DENSE and SPARSE Ranking of Sort Field Values
        SQL.Function Syntax for Direct DBMS Function Calls
        Enhancements to SET DROPBLNKLINE
        Reading Selection Values From a File Using WHERE
        Reformatting Sort Fields
        DB_EXPR Function: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
        Creating a Subquery or Sequential File With HOLD FORMAT SQL_SCRIPT
        DB_INFILE Function: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
        TSTOPACK Function: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
        Defining a Holiday File
        Including Sort Objects in the Master File
        Creating and Using a Master File Profile
        Using Global Amper Variables to Create Dynamic DBA Rules
        Preserving Blank Space in Delimited Sequential Files
        Zero Removal in Date-Time Formats
        512-Character Field Names
      Server Enhancements
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        SQL Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
        Social Media Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Data Management Console Ribbon
        Improved Diagnostic Messages on Server Connection
        Restore Defaults Capability Added to DataMigrator Screens
        New File Option for Supported File Types
        Editing CSV or DAT File Types
        New Core Engine Setting
        Using SCD Load Type in a Direct Load Flow
        Scheduling a Non-Writable Procedure
        Files Types in Email Attachments
        Enabling and Viewing Client Site Traces
        Allowing User Entered Tags
        Run a Stress Test for a Procedure
        Extended Bulk Load Support in Sybase ASE
        Exporting Flow Report Output to an XML File
        Allowing TRUNCATE on DB2 Tables
        Customizing E-mail Subject
        Validation for Specific SCD Fields
        Column Name Display for Alias in the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Enhancements
        Using Arrow Keys in Flow Editors and Synonym Editor Modeling View
        New Slowly Changing Dimensions Type Value
        New Index Column Option
        Default DBMS Error Limit Setting for New Flows
        Automatically Add Join Conditions Using Foreign Keys
        Business View Enhancements
        Setting Records as Inactive in a Flow With IUD/SCD Load
        Multiple Full Outer Joins in a Data Flow
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        Collecting DEFINE Fields in Resource Analyzer
        Field Size Changed for Governing Field Names
        Monitor Settings Page in Configuration Process
        SMUSERID Size Increased to 128 Characters
        Support for 512 Character Column Name
        Reports Show DBMS Time
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
      Active Technologies
      ReportCaster
      Reporting Language
      Server Enhancements
      Adapter Enhancements
      DataMigrator Enhancements
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
      WebFOCUS Release Notes Version 7 Release 7.05
        WebFOCUS
        Managed Reporting
        InfoAssist
        Power Painter
        Report Assistant
        Graphs
        OLAP
        Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Open Portal Services
        Developer Studio
        Active Technologies
        ReportCaster
        Two-Way Email
        Magnify
        Web and Application Servers
        National Language Support (NLS)
        Maintain
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
      WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations Version 7 Release 7.05
        WebFOCUS Installation and Configuration
        WebFOCUS Reporting
        Managed Reporting
        Power Painter
        Advanced Graph Assist
        Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Active Technologies
        Developer Studio
        InfoAssist
        Report Painter
        Maintain
        ReportCaster
        Graph Support
        Magnify
        WebFOCUS API
      Launch PDF
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Reformatting Sort Fields
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Passing Function Calls Directly to a Relational Engine
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating a Subquery or Sequential File With HOLD FORMAT SQL_SCRIPT
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: EXL07, EXL2K, EXL97, EXCEL
        Using PowerPoint Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding the HTML Table of Contents Tree Control to Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Tags for SUBTOTAL and GRANDTOTAL Lines
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Removing Blank Lines From a Report
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Support for Repeated Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, EXL07, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Background Color in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Long and Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        Identifying a Data Source Overview
        Specifying a Data Source Name: FILENAME
        Identifying a Data Source Type: SUFFIX
        Specifying Byte Order
        Providing Descriptive Information for a Data Source: REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
        Creating and Using a Master File Profile
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        The Field Name: FIELDNAME
        The Field Synonym: ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        Defining a Dimension: WITHIN
        Validating Data: ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        Alternative Report Column Titles: TITLE
        Documenting the Field: DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        Describing a Virtual Field: DEFINE
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        Describing a Sort Object: SORTOBJ
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX Attribute
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        Specifying an Access Type: The ACCESS Attribute
        Limiting Data Source Access: The RESTRICT Attribute
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Placing Security Information in a Central Master File
        Summary of Security Attributes
        Hiding Restriction Rules: The ENCRYPT Command
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        Creating a New Data Source: The CREATE Command
        Rebuilding a Data Source: The REBUILD Command
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        Changing Data Source Structure: The REORG Subcommand
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned Project
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Usage and Location
        Temporary Disk Space Usage for Non-PDS Deployment
        Application Tools
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using ISAPI
        Using CGI
        Using a Dynamic Multi-Select Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
        Amper Auto-Prompting
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Web Page With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameter Values Categorized by Functional Area
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_EXPR: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
        DB_INFILE: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS or TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        TSTOPACK: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between a Blank and a Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        PUTCOOKI: Submitting a Value to a Browser Cookie
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster Administration
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Processing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Features
      Enabling User Capabilities
        Accessing the ReportCaster User Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      ReportCaster Security
        ReportCaster Credentials
        ReportCaster Security Settings
        Additional User IDs for Use With ReportCaster
        Configuring ReportCaster With External Authentication
        ReportCaster Remote Authentication
        Include Windows Domain Name With User ID for IWA
        File System Permissions
        Optional Encryption Providers for ReportCaster
      Configuring ReportCaster
        About Configuring ReportCaster
        Distribution Servers Settings
        Repository Settings
        Security Settings
        General Preferences Settings
        Email Settings
        FTP/SFTP Settings
        Zip Settings
        Other Schedule Defaults
        Log Settings
        Traces Settings
        Code Page Settings
        LDAP Settings
        Data Servers Settings
        Two-Way Email Settings
        Report Library Settings
        Managed Reporting Settings
        Library Search Settings
        Customizing ReportCaster Plug-ins
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling ReportCaster Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        ReportCaster Repository Creation Tracing
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Tracing for ReportCaster
        Using the Java Console
      ReportCaster Administrative Tasks
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Globally Updating Repository Field Values
        ReportCaster Library Report Purge Utility
      ReportCaster Repository Tables and Reports
        About Repository Reports
        ReportCaster Repository Tables
      Loading User IDs Into the ReportCaster Repository
        Using the Synchronize External Users Utility
        Using SQL Statements to Load ReportCaster User IDs and Groups
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Launch PDF
    ReportCaster Development and Library Content
      Introducing ReportCaster
        Overview of ReportCaster
        The ReportCaster Development Interface
        ReportCaster Library Content
        Considerations When Using ReportCaster
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        APDF
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL07 TEMPLATE
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        FLEX
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    ReportCaster API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
      ReportCaster API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Troubleshooting API Samples
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        User Samples
        Credential Authentication
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Tables Accessed by the Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        ReportCaster Repository Tables Accessed by the Servlets
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Installation and Configuration
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
    Developer Studio Installation and Configuration
  Technical Memos
    Technical Memo 4734: Using Plug-ins for ReportCaster
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
        Using PMF Content on your Mobile Device
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing the Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Adding and Editing Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Designing Dimension Loads
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Designing a Simple Measure Load
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Scheduling Measure Loads
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Creating Measures With the New Measure Wizard
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Combining Security Modes
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  7.7.05 New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      Active Technologies Enhancements
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Setting the ALPHA Background Color of an Active Technologies Report
        Displaying the Heading in a Rollup Table
        Controlling the Externalization of JavaScript Files
        Setting the Default Filter Value for a Column on an Active Technologies Dashboard
        Hiding a Report Object on an Active Technologies Dashboard
        Creating a Heading Area With Controls Using the Dashboard Bar
        Defining Custom Styles for an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
        Using an Active Technologies Form Control to Show or Hide Columns in a Report or Chart
      ReportCaster Enhancements
        Group Administration in ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Scheduling Enhancements
        ReportCaster Library Enhancements
        New Formats Available in ReportCaster
        Additional Functionality in the ReportCaster API
      Reporting Language Enhancements
        Accordion By Row Support for Multi-verb Requests
        Support for Column Totals in Accordion by Row Reports
        Compound Layout Header Supports AS Name Syntax
        Table of Contents for Coordinated Compound and Burst Reports
        Expanded Browser and Device Support for Images in HTML Documents
        Enhancement to HFREEZE Browser Support
        HFREEZE With Blank Column Titles
        Support for Images Stored in BLOB Fields in HTML and DHTML Reports
        Displaying Superscripts On Data, Heading, and Footing Lines
        Enhancement for Embedding TrueType Fonts Into WebFOCUS PDF Reports Generated in Windows
        Support for Hyperlinks in Text Markups in PDF Report Output
        Support for Vertical Alignment of Text Markup in PDF Report Output
        Support for FORMAT XLSX Burst Option on the MAC
        Inserting Images Into EXL07 Workbook Headers and Footers
        EXL07 Template Enhancements
        ROWOVERFLOW Enhancements for EXL07 and EXL2K
        Using EXL2K Formula With Prefix Operators
        Styling Tags for SUBTOTAL and GRANDTOTAL Lines
        Conditional Styling Based on ACROSS Values
        SET ACROSSTITLE=SIDE Enhancements
        Controlling Display of an ACROSS Title for a Single Field
        Selecting and Assigning Column Titles to ACROSS Values
        Applying Summary Commands to Selected Fields in ACROSS Groups
        DENSE and SPARSE Ranking of Sort Field Values
        SQL.Function Syntax for Direct DBMS Function Calls
        Enhancements to SET DROPBLNKLINE
        Reading Selection Values From a File Using WHERE
        Reformatting Sort Fields
        DB_EXPR Function: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
        Creating a Subquery or Sequential File With HOLD FORMAT SQL_SCRIPT
        DB_INFILE Function: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
        TSTOPACK Function: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
        Defining a Holiday File
        Including Sort Objects in the Master File
        Creating and Using a Master File Profile
        Using Global Amper Variables to Create Dynamic DBA Rules
        Preserving Blank Space in Delimited Sequential Files
        Zero Removal in Date-Time Formats
        512-Character Field Names
      Server Enhancements
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        SQL Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
        Social Media Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Data Management Console Ribbon
        Improved Diagnostic Messages on Server Connection
        Restore Defaults Capability Added to DataMigrator Screens
        New File Option for Supported File Types
        Editing CSV or DAT File Types
        New Core Engine Setting
        Using SCD Load Type in a Direct Load Flow
        Scheduling a Non-Writable Procedure
        Files Types in Email Attachments
        Enabling and Viewing Client Site Traces
        Allowing User Entered Tags
        Run a Stress Test for a Procedure
        Extended Bulk Load Support in Sybase ASE
        Exporting Flow Report Output to an XML File
        Allowing TRUNCATE on DB2 Tables
        Customizing E-mail Subject
        Validation for Specific SCD Fields
        Column Name Display for Alias in the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Enhancements
        Using Arrow Keys in Flow Editors and Synonym Editor Modeling View
        New Slowly Changing Dimensions Type Value
        New Index Column Option
        Default DBMS Error Limit Setting for New Flows
        Automatically Add Join Conditions Using Foreign Keys
        Business View Enhancements
        Setting Records as Inactive in a Flow With IUD/SCD Load
        Multiple Full Outer Joins in a Data Flow
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        Collecting DEFINE Fields in Resource Analyzer
        Field Size Changed for Governing Field Names
        Monitor Settings Page in Configuration Process
        SMUSERID Size Increased to 128 Characters
        Support for 512 Character Column Name
        Reports Show DBMS Time
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
      Active Technologies
      ReportCaster
      Reporting Language
      Server Enhancements
      Adapter Enhancements
      DataMigrator Enhancements
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
      WebFOCUS Release Notes Version 7 Release 7.05
        WebFOCUS
        Managed Reporting
        InfoAssist
        Power Painter
        Report Assistant
        Graphs
        OLAP
        Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Open Portal Services
        Developer Studio
        Active Technologies
        ReportCaster
        Two-Way Email
        Magnify
        Web and Application Servers
        National Language Support (NLS)
        Maintain
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
      WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations Version 7 Release 7.05
        WebFOCUS Installation and Configuration
        WebFOCUS Reporting
        Managed Reporting
        Power Painter
        Advanced Graph Assist
        Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Active Technologies
        Developer Studio
        InfoAssist
        Report Painter
        Maintain
        ReportCaster
        Graph Support
        Magnify
        WebFOCUS API
      Launch PDF
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Reformatting Sort Fields
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Passing Function Calls Directly to a Relational Engine
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating a Subquery or Sequential File With HOLD FORMAT SQL_SCRIPT
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: EXL07, EXL2K, EXL97, EXCEL
        Using PowerPoint Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding the HTML Table of Contents Tree Control to Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Tags for SUBTOTAL and GRANDTOTAL Lines
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Removing Blank Lines From a Report
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Support for Repeated Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, EXL07, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Background Color in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Long and Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        Identifying a Data Source Overview
        Specifying a Data Source Name: FILENAME
        Identifying a Data Source Type: SUFFIX
        Specifying Byte Order
        Providing Descriptive Information for a Data Source: REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
        Creating and Using a Master File Profile
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        The Field Name: FIELDNAME
        The Field Synonym: ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        Defining a Dimension: WITHIN
        Validating Data: ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        Alternative Report Column Titles: TITLE
        Documenting the Field: DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        Describing a Virtual Field: DEFINE
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        Describing a Sort Object: SORTOBJ
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX Attribute
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        Specifying an Access Type: The ACCESS Attribute
        Limiting Data Source Access: The RESTRICT Attribute
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Placing Security Information in a Central Master File
        Summary of Security Attributes
        Hiding Restriction Rules: The ENCRYPT Command
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        Creating a New Data Source: The CREATE Command
        Rebuilding a Data Source: The REBUILD Command
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        Changing Data Source Structure: The REORG Subcommand
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned Project
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Usage and Location
        Temporary Disk Space Usage for Non-PDS Deployment
        Application Tools
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using ISAPI
        Using CGI
        Using a Dynamic Multi-Select Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
        Amper Auto-Prompting
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Web Page With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameter Values Categorized by Functional Area
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_EXPR: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
        DB_INFILE: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS or TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        TSTOPACK: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between a Blank and a Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        PUTCOOKI: Submitting a Value to a Browser Cookie
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster Administration
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Processing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Features
      Enabling User Capabilities
        Accessing the ReportCaster User Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      ReportCaster Security
        ReportCaster Credentials
        ReportCaster Security Settings
        Additional User IDs for Use With ReportCaster
        Configuring ReportCaster With External Authentication
        ReportCaster Remote Authentication
        Include Windows Domain Name With User ID for IWA
        File System Permissions
        Optional Encryption Providers for ReportCaster
      Configuring ReportCaster
        About Configuring ReportCaster
        Distribution Servers Settings
        Repository Settings
        Security Settings
        General Preferences Settings
        Email Settings
        FTP/SFTP Settings
        Zip Settings
        Other Schedule Defaults
        Log Settings
        Traces Settings
        Code Page Settings
        LDAP Settings
        Data Servers Settings
        Two-Way Email Settings
        Report Library Settings
        Managed Reporting Settings
        Library Search Settings
        Customizing ReportCaster Plug-ins
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling ReportCaster Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        ReportCaster Repository Creation Tracing
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Tracing for ReportCaster
        Using the Java Console
      ReportCaster Administrative Tasks
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Globally Updating Repository Field Values
        ReportCaster Library Report Purge Utility
      ReportCaster Repository Tables and Reports
        About Repository Reports
        ReportCaster Repository Tables
      Loading User IDs Into the ReportCaster Repository
        Using the Synchronize External Users Utility
        Using SQL Statements to Load ReportCaster User IDs and Groups
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Launch PDF
    ReportCaster Development and Library Content
      Introducing ReportCaster
        Overview of ReportCaster
        The ReportCaster Development Interface
        ReportCaster Library Content
        Considerations When Using ReportCaster
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        APDF
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL07 TEMPLATE
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        FLEX
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    ReportCaster API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
      ReportCaster API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Troubleshooting API Samples
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        User Samples
        Credential Authentication
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Tables Accessed by the Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        ReportCaster Repository Tables Accessed by the Servlets
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Installation and Configuration
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
    Developer Studio Installation and Configuration
  Technical Memos
    Technical Memo 4734: Using Plug-ins for ReportCaster
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
        Using PMF Content on your Mobile Device
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing the Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Adding and Editing Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Designing Dimension Loads
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Designing a Simple Measure Load
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Scheduling Measure Loads
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Creating Measures With the New Measure Wizard
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Combining Security Modes
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
Release 7.7.03
  Technical Memos
    Technical Memo 4505: WebFOCUS HTML Report Accessibility Support
    Technical Memo 4647: Configuring Single Sign-on to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Using Kerberos
    Technical Memo 4690: Saving Report Output in Excel 2007/2010 Format
    Technical Memo 4693: Using the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In
    Technical Memo 4694: WebFOCUS Row-Level and Column-Level Security
    Technical Memo 4695: Using the Magnify Prototype Wizard
    Technical Memo 4697: Nested Applications
    Technical Memo 4699: Using Magnify With The Google Search Engine
    Technical Memo 4700: Accessing an HTML Composer Application on the iPad
    Technical Memo 4701: Multi-Drill on Text Selection
    Technical Memo 4704: WebFOCUS PDF Report Accessibility Support
    Technical Memo 4705: WebFOCUS to Go: Setting Up the Mobile Faves App
    Technical Memo 4707: Accessing an HTML Composer Application on a Mobile Device
    Technical Memo 4709: WebFOCUS Unicode Support
    Technical Memo 4711: PDF Remediation
    Technical Memo 4713: Opening WebFOCUS Generated Presentations in PowerPoint 2010
    Technical Memo 4714: WebFOCUS Mobile: Subscribing to WebFOCUS Reports Using the Mobile Faves App Watch Feature
    Technical Memo 4719: Hiding Report Options (Buttons) in the Managed Reporting Deferred Status Interface
    Technical Memo 4723: Styling an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
    Technical Memo 4727: Customizing Icons for Active Technologies Reports and Dashboards
    Technical Memo 4731: ReportCaster Failover
    Technical Memo 4733: Configuring ReportCaster Group Administration Functions
    Technical Memo 4734: Using Plug-ins for ReportCaster
  Best Practices
    Considerations When Using ReportCaster
    WebFOCUS Security Methodology and Best Practices
  Security and Administration
    WebFOCUS Security and Administration
      WebFOCUS Components and Deployment Options
        WebFOCUS Components
        WebFOCUS Deployment Options
      WebFOCUS Processing Concepts
        Security Planning
        WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script and Configuration Files
        WebFOCUS Profiles
        Java Application Server Files
        Customizing WebFOCUS Request Processing
        WebFOCUS Encryption Techniques
        WebFOCUS User Authentication Options
      WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Accessing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        WebFOCUS Administration Console Functionality
        Securing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        ReportCaster Settings
        Magnify Settings
        WebFOCUS Utilities
        Quick Links
        WebFOCUS Client Upgrade Configuration
      WebFOCUS Client Core Processing Details
        Core Processing of WebFOCUS Requests
        WebFOCUS Client Security
        WebFOCUS Client Administration
        Setting Authentication Credentials
      WebFOCUS Reporting Server Core Processing Details
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings
      Managed Reporting Processing Details
        Managed Reporting Architecture
        Managed Reporting Sign-on Processing
        Dashboard Sign-On Processing
        Managed Reporting Configuration Files
        Managed Reporting Internal Variables
        Managed Reporting Settings in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Deferred Receipt Processing
        Accessing Reports From Outside Managed Reporting
      Configuring Managed Reporting for Trusted or External Authentication
        Benefits of Trusted and External Authentication
        Preparing for Trusted or External Authentication
        Configuring Trusted Authentication
        Configuring External Authentication
        Propagating the Managed Reporting ID to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Configuring Managed Reporting for External Authorization
        Benefits of External Authorization
        Preparing for External Authorization
        Configuring Managed Reporting Administered RDBMS Authorization
        Configuring Externally Administered Authorization
        Advanced Topics
      WebFOCUS Encryption Features
        Configuring WebFOCUS in an SSL Environment
        WebFOCUS Encryption
        Encryption Using the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Encrypting WFS Files Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Encrypting WebFOCUS Data, Procedures, and Data Restriction Rules
      Manipulating WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script Commands
        Copying WebFOCUS Variables Using the WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in
        HTTP Header Variables Available for Script Processing
      WebFOCUS Diagnostics
        Using Diagnostic Tools in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        HTTP Request Headers and JVM Property Information
        Monitoring WebFOCUS Sessions
        Stopping a WebFOCUS Request
        Using WebFOCUS Verification Tools
        Tracing WebFOCUS Processing
        Viewing Security and Header Variables in Use
      Filtering Data
        WebFOCUS Data Security
        WebFOCUS Data Filters
        Filtering Metadata in the WebFOCUS Development Tools
      Localizing WebFOCUS
        Configuring National Language Support
        Customizing the Dynamic Language Switch
        Manually Customizing WebFOCUS Client Messages
      Protecting Your WebFOCUS Installation
        File System Permissions for Windows and UNIX
        Protecting WebFOCUS Variables
        Protecting the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Protecting Managed Reporting Applications
        Protecting WebFOCUS Reporting Server Data Sources
        Disabling Operating System Commands
      Developing Your Own WebFOCUS Plug-in
        Overview of Plug-in Processing
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFEXT Setting
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFTRANSINOUT Setting
      Developing a Managed Reporting Realm Driver Extension
        Introduction
        Where to Go for Information
      Developing a Reporting Server Authentication Exit
        Pre-Verify User ID Exit
      Developing a Dynamic DBA Rule
        WebFOCUS DBA Exit
      Developer Studio Custom Logon Templates
        How Logon Templates Work
        Creating a Template File
      Launch PDF
  7.7.03 New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      Active Technologies Enhancements
        Active Technologies Roadmap
        WebFOCUS Mobile Business Intelligence
        Switching the Chart Engine
      Upload Data Utility Enhancements
        Upload Data Utility Roadmap
        Using Uploaded Data Files in Joins
        New Alpha Variable (AnV) Data Type Supported by Upload Data File Utility
      WebFOCUS InfoAssist Enhancements
        WebFOCUS InfoAssist Roadmap
        Using a Reference Line Dynamically
      Developer Studio Enhancements
        Developer Studio Roadmap
        Controlling Section 508 Support for PDF Output
        Controlling Section 508 Support for HTML Output
        Controlling the Display of Report Output
        Controlling Fields Included in a HOLD or PCHOLD File
        Controlling Output When a TABLE Request Retrieves Zero Records
        Controlling the Behavior of Requests That Use PRINT With Multiple DST Operators
      HTML Composer Enhancements
        HTML Composer Roadmap
        Styling Options for a Tab Control
        Chain Separator and Line Separator
      Report Painter Enhancements
        Report Painter Roadmap
        Report Options Enhancements for PDF
        Align Column Titles (Section 508) Option
        Application Container and Compound Report Size Options
        Automatic Expansion of Sort Levels
      Managed Reporting Enhancements
        Managed Reporting Roadmap
        Using InfoAssist and Power Painter with Reporting Objects in Restricted Domains
        Enabling the Display of the Properties Details Option
        New Alternate Managed Reporting Change Management Extract Utility
      WebFOCUS Client Enhancements
        WebFOCUS Client Roadmap
        Managed Reporting Support for Common Access Card (CAC) Trusted Logon
        Support for AES Encryption
      Reporting Language Enhancements
        Reporting Language Roadmap
        New Accessibility Parameters for HTML and PDF Report Output
        Restricting Access to Values Using WHERE Criteria
        LCWORD3: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        Retrieving the Current Date or Date-Time Value in Any Valid Format
      ReportCaster Enhancements
        ReportCaster Roadmap
        Documentation Enhancements
        Storing FTP Credentials
        Default Check Box for Zip Settings
        Storing the FTP Server Name
        Default FTP/SFTP Location Field in the FTP/SFTP Settings
        Viewing ReportCaster Job Status
      National Language Support Enhancements
        National Language Support Roadmap
        Courier New Unicode Font in Windows
      Server Enhancements
        Server Administration Roadmap
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        Adapter Administration Roadmap
        SQL Adapters
        XML-Based Adapters
        ERP Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Data Migrator Roadmap
        Creating a Quick ETL Copy
        Supporting TEXT (TX) Columns
        Clearing User Preferences
        Sending a Target File to an FTP Server
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Roadmap
        Event Routing
        Collecting Data in the Resource Management Repository
        Non-Archived Log Files
        Data Manipulation Language Monitoring
        Create Repository DDL Only Option
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
      WebFOCUS Release Notes Version 7 Release 7.03
        WebFOCUS
        Managed Reporting
        InfoAssist
        Power Painter
        Report Assistant
        Graphs
        OLAP
        Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Open Portal Services
        Developer Studio
        Active Technologies
        ReportCaster
        Two-Way Email
        Magnify
        Web and Application Servers
        National Language Support (NLS)
        Maintain
        Visual Discovery
      Launch PDF
    Server Release Notes
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: EXL07, EXL2K, EXL97, EXCEL
        Using PowerPoint Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding an HTML TOC to a Report
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Support for Repeated Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, EXL07, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Background Color in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Long and Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        Identifying a Data Source Overview
        Specifying a Data Source Name: FILENAME
        Identifying a Data Source Type: SUFFIX
        Specifying Byte Order
        Providing Descriptive Information for a Data Source: REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        The Field Name: FIELDNAME
        The Field Synonym: ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        Defining a Dimension: WITHIN
        Validating Data: ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        Alternative Report Column Titles: TITLE
        Documenting the Field: DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        Describing a Virtual Field: DEFINE
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX Attribute
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        Specifying an Access Type: The ACCESS Attribute
        Limiting Data Source Access: The RESTRICT Attribute
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Placing Security Information in a Central Master File
        Summary of Security Attributes
        Hiding Restriction Rules: The ENCRYPT Command
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        Creating a New Data Source: The CREATE Command
        Rebuilding a Data Source: The REBUILD Command
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        Changing Data Source Structure: The REORG Subcommand
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned Project
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Allocation for UNIX and z/OS UNIX System Services
        Temporary File Directory Structure for Non-PDS Deployment
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using ISAPI
        Using CGI
        Using a Dynamic Multi-Select Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
        Amper Auto-Prompting
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Web Page With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameter Values Categorized by Functional Area
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS or TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between a Blank and a Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        PUTCOOKI: Submitting a Value to a Browser Cookie
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Reporting Tools
    Creating Reports With Report Assistant
      Introducing Report Assistant
        About Report Assistant
        Accessing Report Assistant
        Layout of Report Assistant
      Designing a Report
        Building Your Report With Report Assistant
        Selecting Report Fields
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Defining Field Characteristics
        Applying Predefined and Cascading StyleSheets
        Customizing Headings and Footings
      Working With Data and Data Sources
        Selecting Records for a Report
        Limiting Data With Filters
        Working With Joins
      Controlling Report Output
        Applying Report Output Options
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running a Report
        Saving a Report
        Editing a Report
      Report Assistant Field Reference
        Report Assistant Field References
        Field Selection Tab
        Report Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab
        Join Options Tab
        Report Options Tab
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reports With Report Painter
      Report Painter Basics
        Report Painter Layout and Toolbars
        Using the Object Inspector
        Viewing Options
        Business Intelligence Features
        Report Painter Limitations
        Field Properties and Report Options Dialog Boxes
      Creating Reports With Report Painter
        Adding a Field as a Report Column
        Displaying Data
        Sorting Data
        Selecting Data
        Universal Concatenation in Report Painter
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Including a Total or Subtotal
        Adding a Page Heading or Footing
        Formatting a Column
        Choosing an Output Format
        Creating a Drill Down Procedure
        Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running and Saving a Report
        Creating Precision Reports
        Using User Defined Functions
      Creating Guided Reports
        Creating a Guided Report
      Styling Reports With Report Painter
        Styling With Fonts, Colors, and Grids
        Styling or Aligning an Individual Item in a Text String
        Aligning Fields and Text in Headings and Footings
        Defining a Conditional Report Style
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Adding an Image
        Using the StyleSheet File Selector
        Generating Format-Specific Style Blocks
        Using Excel Templates
        Using Excel Named Ranges in WebFOCUS Applications
        Generating Overflow Sheets for an Excel 2000 Report
        Using PowerPoint Output Format and PowerPoint Templates
        Setting Up the Report Page
        Creating Mailing Labels
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Temporary Fields With Report Painter
        Creating a Calculated Value With Report Painter
        Creating Expressions for Temporary Fields
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Charts With Graph Tools
      Introduction to Creating Charts
        Graph Overview
        Determining Graphing Objectives
        Creating Custom Graph Templates
        Accessing the Graph Tools from WebFOCUS Environments
      Creating Graphs With Graph Assistant
        Accessing the Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Graph Type and Style
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Working With Joins in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing Your Graph
        Graph Types Tab
        Field Selection Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Field Selection Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Selection Criteria Tab in Graph Assistant of the Managed Reporting Environment
        Join Options Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Properties Tab
      Creating Graphs With Advanced Graph Assistant
        Accessing Advanced Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Selecting Data for a Graph
        Data Display Options
        Filtering Data for a Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs With Advanced Merge
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Working With Joins
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding and Editing Labels in a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing a Graph
        Modifying Graph Properties With Chart Editing Forms
      Customizing Graphs With the Graph Editor
        Choosing a Graph Type
        Applying Color and Line Options in Graphs
        Applying Font Options in Graphs
        Adding Chart Titles
        Creating and Loading GIF Files
        Applying Gradient Fill (All Graph Types)
        Applying Texture Fill (All Graph Types)
        Zooming and Panning in Bar Graphs
        3D Chart Options
        3D Custom Viewing Options
        3D Preset Viewing Options
        Bar, Line, and Area Charts
        Dual Y Options
        Group Axis Options
        Pie Chart Options
        Stock Chart Options
        X1 Axis Options
        Y1 Axis Options
        Y2 Axis Options
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Composer
      Using the HTML Composer
        Uses for the HTML Composer
        Getting Started With the HTML Composer
        Creating a Report Page Layout
      Creating and Using Parameters in the HTML Composer
        Creating Parameter Values
        Using Form Controls to Supply Incoming Parameter Values
        Using Input Controls to Supply Parameter Values
        Supplying Parameter Values to External Reports
        Styling Your Layout
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Laying Out Objects With the HTML Composer
        Controlling the HTML Composer Environment
        Adding ReportCaster Schedule Capability to the HTML Composer
        Running a Managed Reporting Report Deferred From the HTML Composer
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Composer Pages
        Specifying an HTML File as a Load Screen
      Using Templates in the HTML Composer
        Understanding and Using Templates
        Manipulating the Objects of Templates
      Creating Guided Report Forms
        Getting Started With Guided Reports
      Chaining Controls for Dependencies in the HTML Composer
        Automatically Chaining Parameters From the New Parameters Dialog Box
        Chaining Controls on the Parameters Tab
        Applying Conditions to a Chain
        Populating Controls One at a Time
        Using the Chain Separator and Line Separator
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Report Library Integration in the HTML Composer
        Integrating the Report Library
      Creating a Rich Internet Application (RIA) With the HTML Composer
        RIA Overview
        Creating a RIA With the HTML Composer
        Usage Notes and RIA Example
      Using Google Maps in the HTML Composer
        Configuring WebFOCUS for Google Maps
        Creating WebFOCUS Procedures for Google Maps
        Adding a Google Map
        Customizing the Google Map Properties
        Integrating WebFOCUS With Google Maps
        Using the Google Maps Functionality
        JavaScript Functions
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Active Technologies User's Guide
      Active Technologies
        Active Technologies Report Overview
        Available Output Formats for Using Active Technologies
        Product Requirements for Using Active Technologies
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Painter
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Assistant
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
      Using an Active Technologies Report
        Navigating Between Pages
        Filtering and Highlighting Data
        Calculating Data
        Sorting Data
        Using Tab Window Navigation
        Controlling Report Display
        Using Data Visualization
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Using the Grid Tool
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool
        Using the Pivot Tool
        Saving, Exporting, and E-mailing Active Technologies Reports
      Active Technologies for Mobile Web Apps
        Requirements for Mobile Web Apps
        Mobile Web Apps Features
        Standard Gesture Support
        Running an Active Technologies Report on a Mobile Device
        Running an Active Dashboard on a Mobile Device
      Working With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Active Technologies Report Integration With Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Pivot Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Formatting Legend Options for an Active Technologies Chart for Adobe Flash Player
        Customizing Containers and the Dashboard Bar for Active Technologies Reports and Dashboards
        Using Active Technologies for PDF
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Active Technologies Dashboard Overview
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Using Advanced Design Features for Active Technologies Dashboards
        Overview
        Changing the Color of the Border of Charts
        Changing the Background Color of an Individual Tab
        Controlling Active Technologies With Custom JavaScript Code
        Working With the Global Filter Feature
        Managing Active Technologies Form Controls
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Creating Active Technologies Components With WebFOCUS Syntax
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Chart Type Syntax
        Chart Type Syntax Introduction
        FLEX Default Flash Chart Type
        AHTML Default JavaScript Chart Type and FLEX and APDF Flash Chart for Disconnected Mode
        FLEX Flash Chart Type and AHTML JavaScript Chart Type
        Chart Types Mapped to Default Chart Types
        Additional Active Technologies Chart Types Available With CHART-TYPE Syntax
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Document Composer
      Document Composer Overview
        Uses for the Document Composer
        Getting Started With the Document Composer
      Creating Compound Reports
        Creating a Compound Layout Report
        Output Formats for Compound Reports
        Adding a Reporting Object to a Compound Report
      Viewing Pages in the Document Composer
        On Demand Viewing in the Document Composer
        Viewing Simulated or Live Data in the Document Composer
        Moving Pages With the Thumbnails Tab
        Positioning Objects and Keyboard Shortcuts
      Using Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Creating, Saving, and Editing Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Using an Existing Page Master in Another Document
      Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects
        Setting Overflow Options in the Document Composer
        Using Fixed Overflow in the Document Composer
        Using Flowing Overflow in the Document Composer
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in the Document Composer
        Adding Different Headers and Footers on an Overflow Page
      Applying a Table of Contents and Bookmarks
        Adding a Table of Contents Page
        Using Bookmarks in the Document Composer
      Using Drill Through in the Document Composer
        Using Drill Through
      Using Page Layouts in the Document Composer
        Using Page Layouts
      Formatting Text in the Document Composer
        Formatting Text Elements
      Adding Page Numbers to Your Document With the Document Composer
        Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Using Active Technologies Reports to Create Active Dashboards
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Power Painter
      Introducing Power Painter
        About Power Painter
        Configuring the Power Painter License Code
        Accessing Power Painter
        Introducing Power Painter Options and Palettes
        Selecting and Adding a Data Source
        Customizing the Power Painter Environment
      Working With Power Painter Objects
        About Power Painter Objects
        Inserting a Report Object
        Inserting a Graph Object
        Inserting an Image Object
        Inserting a Text Object
        Inserting a Line Object
        Displaying Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
      Using Standard Reporting Functions
        Incorporating Standard Reporting Functions Into a Report
        Importing Values From External Files for WHERE Statements
        Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility
      Controlling Report Overflow and Position of Objects
        About Report Overflow and Object Positioning
        Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter
        Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter
        Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Two-Way Email
      Using Two-Way Email
        Two-Way Email User Steps
        Subscribing for the First Time
        Replying to the Confirmation Message
        Receiving Your Templates for the First Time
        Requesting a Report
        Updating Your Subscription Information
        Responding to an Alert
      Two-Way Email Administration
        Accessing the Administrator Console
        Adding or Deleting a Subscriber
        Maintaining an E-mail Address
        Refreshing User Templates
        Using the Job Log
        Using the Event Log
        Checking the Status of a Job or Canceling a Job
      Developing a Two-Way Email Template
        How Two-Way Email Works
        Creating a Template
        Maintaining a Template
        Sending a Template to Users
        Attaching a Two-Way Email Template to an Alert
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  InfoAssist
    WebFOCUS InfoAssist User's Manual
      Introducing and Launching InfoAssist
        Introducing InfoAssist
        Introducing Personal InfoAssist
        Accessing InfoAssist
        Launching InfoAssist
      Setting InfoAssist User Preferences
        Changing User Preferences
      Using the InfoAssist Application Window
        Components of the InfoAssist Application Window
        Selecting From the Application Main Menu
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Accessing Properties Using the Control Panel
        Understanding the Resources Panel
        Understanding the Results Panel
        Using the Navigation Taskbar
        Using the Status Bar
      Building InfoMini Applications
        Understanding InfoMini Applications
        Creating an InfoMini Application
      Using Slicers
        Creating Slicers
        Filtering With Slicers
      Customizing and Styling Reports
        Excel Output for Reports
        Styling Reports
        Using Custom Reporting Features
        Creating Customized Report Outputs
      Hierarchical Reporting in InfoAssist
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
      Creating and Customizing Charts
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Using Custom Chart Features
        Adding a Page Heading and Page Footing to a Chart
        Designing a Chart in Active Preview
      Using Document View and Building Compound Documents
        Accessing Document View
        Building a Compound Document
        Adding Active Technologies Form Controls to a Compound Document
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    InfoAssist Videos
      Getting Started
      Creating Reports
      Creating Charts
      Using the Home Tab
      Using the Insert Tab
      Using the Format Tab
      Using the Data Tab
      Using the Slicers Tab
      Using the Layout Tab
      Using the View Tab
      Using the Field Tab
      Using the Series Tab
  Managed Reporting
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Deployment Process
        Using Managed Reporting
        Accessing Dashboard
        Customizing Dashboard
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Creating Domains, Groups, Roles, and Users
        Using the Managed Reporting Administration Interface
        Creating Domains
        Creating Groups
        Creating Users
        Creating Roles
        Customizing the Interface
      User Management
        User Management Tree Object
        Managing User Reports
        Promoting a Custom Report to a Standard Report
        Considerations When Copying and Moving Reports
        Managing Standard Report References
        Managing Reporting Object References
      Managing Dashboard
        Managing Public Views
        Managing Group Views
        Managing Library Only Views
        Managing Private Views
        Logging On to Dashboard and View Inheritance
        Managing Users
        Controlling the Idle Limit for Authenticated and Public Users
        Handling Messages
        Hiding Report Types in the Domain Tree
        Hiding the Share Report Option for Finished My Reports
        Displaying Optional Properties in Dashboard
        Creating Standard Reports, Reporting Objects, and Other File in Dashboard
      Creating Public and Group Views
        What Is a Public View?
        What Is a Group View?
        What Is a Library Only Group View?
        Adding a Group or Public View
        Directing Users to a Group View Upon Login
        Adding a Library Only View
        Removing a Public or Group View
        Editing a Public or Group View
        Customizing Dashboard Pages for a Public or Group View
        Copying a Public or Group View
        Refreshing the Views List
        Exiting the Public Views or Group Views Window
      Customizing Dashboard
        Before You Begin Customizing Dashboard
        Opening the View Builder
        Selecting a Template
        Selecting Custom Colors
        Positioning the Domain Tree, Role Tree, and Banner
        Inserting a Logo
        Customizing the Banner
        Creating a Custom Toolbar
        Adding a Message of the Day
        Customizing the Logoff Window
        Changing the ReportCaster Scheduling Tool
        Changing the ReportCaster Interface
        Resetting the View Builder
        Globally Enabling Reporting Tools in Dashboard
        Saving Selections and Exiting a Customization
        Exiting the View Builder
      Creating a Role Tree
        What Is a Role Tree?
        Adding a Role Tree
        Editing a Role Tree
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Creating Filters For Standard Reports
        Executing a Domain Profile in Dashboard
        Selecting Content Layout
      Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Running the Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility Output Files
        Master Files and Sample Procedure
        Reporting From Extract Files
        Property Flags
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Change Management Load Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      Additional Administration Topics
        Selecting the Tool Type for ReportCaster
        Debugging
        Setting Up Traces for Managed Reporting User Requests
        Repository File Name Processing
        Obtaining a List of Available Master Files
      Application Integration Topics
        Invoking the Deferred Report Status Interface Directly
        Managed Reporting Browser Window Feature
        Using Launch Pages Outside the Default Repository
      Managing Deferred Tickets
        Managing Deferred Workload
        Managing the Deferred Ticket Cleanup Utility
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Developer for Windows
        Using Managed Reporting
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Working With Domains
        Using Domains in Managed Reporting
        Guidelines for Copy or Cut and Paste in Domains
        Setting Domain Properties
        Customizing Managed Reporting
      Working With Standard Reports
        Working With Standard Reports
        Creating and Editing Standard Reports
        Applying Predefined Style Sheets to a Report
        Adding a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
        Importing Procedures and Other Files Into Managed Reporting
        Ignoring Code in a Procedure (FOCEXEC)
        Coding Considerations for Saved Parameter Reports
        Execution of a Managed Reporting Procedure Using –INCLUDE or EX
        Execution of a Server Procedure
        Drilling Down From a MR Procedure to a Procedure on the Server
        Incorporating Images Into Managed Reporting Requests
        Launching a Self-Service Application of Report Assistant
      Creating Reporting Objects
        Reporting Objects
        Running a Reporting Object From Domain Builder
        Components of a Reporting Object
        Other Component
        Creating and Customizing a Join in Developer Studio
        Creating and Customizing a Join in the Browser
        Virtual Fields (DEFINE Statements)
        Filters
        Selection Criteria (WHERE Statements)
        Creating an Application Object
        Report Component
        Graph Component
      Creating Launch Pages and Publishing Reports
        Working With Launch Pages
        Creating Launch Pages With the Publish Utility
        Working With Amper Auto-Prompting
        Working With the HTML Composer
      Data Servers Feature
        Working With Data Servers
        Working With Server Applications
        Working With Application Files
        Create Synonym Behavior
        Searching Domains for Master Files and Fields With the Impact Analysis Tool
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      ReportCaster Alerts
        Alert Reporting Overview
        Components of an Alert
        Creating an Alert
        Creating Joins and Defines With the Text Editor
        Checking Alerts
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Features
        Managed Reporting Interface
      Using Dashboard
        Opening Dashboard
        Required Browser Settings
        Recommended Browser Settings
        Personalizing Your Dashboard
        Dashboard Layout
        Selecting a Domain
        Using Domain Tree Items
        Creating Reports in Dashboard
        Stopping Requests in Dashboard
        PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard
        Running Deferred Reports
        Using Role Trees
        Viewing Content Blocks
        Using Banner Hyperlinks
        Searching Domains
        Creating a Favorites List
        Mobile Favorites
        Viewing Reports in the Report Library
        Viewing Recently Run Reports
        Setting User Options
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Selecting Content Layout
      Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Deferred Report Status Interface Features
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Using the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Using the Viewer Control Panel
        Creating On-Demand Paging Reports
      Using Java Applet Managed Reporting
        Accessing Managed Reporting
        Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting
        Running a Report
        Sharing a Report
        Creating a Report or Graph
        Creating Procedures With the Text Editor
        Editing a My Report
        Editing a Custom Report and its Properties
        Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE
        Filtering Data
        Searching a Domain
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Administration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Component Pack and Third-Party Applications
        Benefits of Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
      Using WebFOCUS Portal Components
        WebFOCUS Components Overview
        JVM Support Information
        Optional Portal Parameters
        Disabling WebFOCUS Tools
        WebFOCUS Component URLs
        Portlet Parameters
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Report Components
      Configuring JSR 168 Portal Environments
        Understanding the JSR 168 Portlet Specification
        Installing and Deploying WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Gateway
        Configuring JSR 168 Portlet Parameters
        Using the Output Portlet
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Vignette Application Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Sun ONE Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the JBoss Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA AquaLogic Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Apache Jetspeed Portal
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2007
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2010
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the IBM WebSphere Portal Server Version 6.1
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Oracle Portal Server (Oracle 10g)
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Defining a WebFOCUS Application Under the Oracle Application Server
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Registering the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Testing the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Computer Associates CleverPath Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA WebLogic Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing WebFOCUS Portlets
        Adding WebFOCUS Portlets to the BEA WebLogic Portal
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Pagelets for the PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Adding the URLContentRetriever.jar File to PeopleSoft
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Pagelets
        Using WebFOCUS Pagelets
      Installing Certified NetWeaver iViews for the SAP Enterprise Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing the WebFOCUS Open Portal Gateway on the SAP Application Server
        Configuring User Mapping
        Importing .PAR Files
        Configuring WebFOCUS iViews
        Importing the WEBFOCUSOPS.EPA File
        Removing Applications Using the Archive Remover
        Using the Output Portlet
        Using WebFOCUS iViews
      Installing WebFOCUS Categories for the TIBCO PortalBuilder
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Categories
        Configuring the Report Category
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Developer Studio
    Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        Additional WebFOCUS Products
        WebFOCUS Architecture
        Developer Studio Architecture
        Developer Studio Directory Structure
        Developer Studio Explorer Layout
        Project-Based and Remote Development Environments
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Logging Off Areas in WebFOCUS Environments
        Developer Studio Data Access and Descriptions
      Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Development Environment
        Development Tools
      Setting Preferences
        General Tab
        Reporting Tab
        Explorer Tab
        Source Control Tab
        External Tools Tab
        Title Format Tab
      Tutorial: Creating an OLAP-enabled Report in Developer Studio
        OLAP Tutorial Overview
        Before You Begin
        Creating the OLAP Project
        Creating the OLAP Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With a Procedural Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With the CENTORD Data Source
        Manipulating Report Output
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reporting Applications With Developer Studio
      Creating a Reporting Application
        What Is a Reporting Application?
        Project-based and Remote Development Environments
        Creating a Project
        Organizing a Project
        Using Workspace Files
        Adding a Master File to a Project
        Uploading Data Files
        Using Uploaded Data Files in Joins
        Viewing and Modifying Project Properties
        Managing a Project With Source Control
        Securing a Project
        Removing a Project
      Partitioning and Deploying Project Files
        Deployment Basics
        Summary of Steps
        Step 1: Identify the Target Servers
        Step 2: Create a Deployment Scenario
        Step 3: Partition the Project Files
        Step 4: Deploy the Project Files
        Configuring the Target Servers (Optional)
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
      Joining and Merging Data Sources
        What Is a Join?
        Types of Joins
        Joining Different Kinds of Data Sources
        Creating a Join With Graphical Tools
        Creating Multi-Field Joins
        Using Conditional Joins
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Customizing a Join
        Working With Joins
        Reporting With a Join
        Saving a Join
        Merging Data Sources Using the Match Wizard
      Hierarchical Reporting
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Manipulating Aggregated Data in an Essbase or SAP BW Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
        Showing Hierarchies in the HTML Composer
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
      Creating a Reporting Procedure
        Selecting a Creation Tool
        Incorporating a Procedure Into an Application
        Copying a Procedure
        Creating a Procedure Component
        Working With a Component
        Using the SQL Report Wizard
        Assigning a Logical Name With the Allocation Wizard
        Calling a Procedure From the Current One
        Using the Engine Tool
        Managing Flow of Control
        Working With a Full Procedure
        Running a Procedure
        Canceling a Running Procedure
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs
        Viewing Reports in Your Browser
        Drilling Down for Details
        Navigating Through Multi-Page Web Reports
        Controlling Viewer Display Options
        Using the Clipboard
        Printing Report and Graph Output
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
        Troubleshooting OLAP Reports
      Saving and Reusing Report Output
        Types of Output Files
        Creating Output Files
        Output File Formats
        Save Report Output as a Native Temporary Table In Report Painter
        Saving Reports as HTML Output
        Saving Reports as Print Display Output: PDF, PS
        Saving Reports Using Excel Formats
      Creating an Update Application With Update Assist
        Update Assist (Step 1 of 6): Selecting Segments to Update
        Update Assist (Step 2 of 6): Selecting Fields to Update
        Update Assist (Step 3 of 6): Selecting Navigation Options
        Update Assist (Step 4 of 6): Selecting a Color Scheme
        Update Assist (Step 5 of 6): Selecting Output File Options
        Update Assist (Step 6 of 6): Confirming Selections
        About Your Update Assist Application
        Editing Your Update Assist Application
        Calling an Update Assist Procedure From a WebFOCUS Report
        Usage Notes
      Editing Application Components as Text in Developer Studio
        Text Editor
        The Other Component
        The Comment Component
        Creating a Text File or a Procedure Component as Text
        Opening Application Components as Text
        Finding and Replacing Text
        Changing Text Color and Case Size
        Adding Headings and Footings
        Using Bookmarks to Move Within a File
        Running a Procedure From the Editor
        Opening a Graphical Tool From the Text Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With Graphical Tools
      Describing and Accessing Data Overview
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        How Applications Interpret Data
        Obtaining a Synonym
        What You Can Do With a Synonym
        Ways to Enhance a Synonym
        How an Application Uses a Synonym
        Alternative Tools on the Reporting Server Console
      Accessing Data and Creating Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters and Remote Servers in Developer Studio
        Creating Synonyms in Developer Studio
        Defining a Remote Server in the WebFOCUS Client Communication File
      Using the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Setting Up Multilingual Titles and Descriptions
        Enhancing Synonyms Using the Modeling View
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Defining Dimensions for OLAP Analysis
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
        Creating Business Views
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Creating Filters in a Synonym
        Adding Computed Fields (COMPUTE) in a Synonym
        Storing the Number of Repetitions of a Repeating Field in a Virtual Field
        Defining Attributes and Creating Expressions for Custom Fields
        Adding Group Fields in a Synonym
        Applying Database Administrator Security
      Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Analyzing Procedures With the Impact Analysis Tool
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Adding Data and Rebuilding FOCUS Data Sources
        Creating a FOCUS Data Source
        Rebuilding a Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Financial Reports
      Financial Reporting and Analysis for the Enterprise
        WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Benefits
        Enterprise Financial Reporting: A Critical Cornerstone of Business
        Financial Reporting Within and Beyond an Organization
        Financial Reporting and Government Regulations
        The WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Platform
        WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
        Learning More About the WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
      Creating Reports With Financial Report Painter
        Financial Report Painter Overview
        Starting a Financial Report
        Designing Your Financial Report
        Running a Financial Report
        Retrieving FOR Field Values From a Data Source
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Supplying Data Directly
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Text
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Formatting Financial Reports
        Adding, Inserting, and Deleting Rows
        Editing Row Types and Properties
        Adding and Deleting Columns
      Creating a Financial Report Using the Financial Report Painter
        Create a Project
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Tutorial: Creating an Income Statement Using Unconsolidated Data
        Tutorial Overview
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Join the Data Sources
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Describing Data for an FML Hierarchy
        Data Requirements for FML Hierarchies
        Coding an FML Hierarchy in a Text Editor
        Defining an FML Hierarchy in the Synonym Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Magnify
    Magnify End User Manual
      Introducing Magnify
        About Magnify
        Accessing Magnify
      Conducting a Search With Magnify
        Searching With Magnify
        Navigating Magnify Search Results
        Viewing Content Through Additional Links
        Accessing Magnify on Mobile Devices
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Developer's Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Overview of Implementing Magnify
        Planning for Enterprise Search
        About Configuring Magnify
        Magnify Search Configuration Example
      Configuring an iWay Channel
        Configuring An iWay Channel
        Configure a Listener
        Create an Inlet
        Create the Emitter
        Create an Outlet
        Create a Channel
        Deploy a Channel
        Verifying the Emitter Destination Directory
      Creating the Indexing Process Flow
        About the Transaction Indexing Process Flow
        Storing Metadata Values
        Creating the HTML Document
        Feed HTML Document to the Search Engine
        Completing the Process Flow
        Validating and Testing the Process Flow
        Publishing the Process Flow
        Process Flow Considerations
      Reconfiguring and Deploying the iWay Channel
        About Reconfiguring the iWay Channel
        Creating the New Route
        Modifying the Original Channel
        Building and Deploying the Modified Channel
        Backing Up and Importing iWay Workflows
      Customizing the Magnify User Interface
        Customization Overview
        Adding Date Information to Magnify Search Results
      Indexing Using FORMAT MAGNIFY Command
        FORMAT MAGNIFY
      Magnify Protocols
        Magnify Protocols for Indexing Documents
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Security and Administration
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Configuring the Search Engine
        Configuring the Search Engine
      Configuring Magnify Collections
        Defining Collections
      Using the Security Features
        About Magnify Security
        Enabling Security in Magnify With Lucene
        Enabling Collection-Level Security
      Magnify Diagnostics
        Magnify Diagnostics Pages
        Indexing Large Files
        Magnify Request Parameters
        Verifying Documents in the Lucene Index
        Retrieving Index Library Properties
        Retrieving Field Values From the Lucene Index
        Online Lucene Resources
      Magnify Demo Search Application
        Century Electronics Sample Search Application
        Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Installation
        Configuring a Port Number
        Feeding Content to Magnify
        Additional Features
        Collection Security
        Multiple Categorizations
        Process Flow
        Deleting Extraneous Files
        Previous Versions
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Maintain
    Maintain Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS Maintain
        Road Map: Where Should You Go?
        What Is WebFOCUS Maintain?
        Overview of Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      WebFOCUS Maintain Basic Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating a Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Explorer
        Adding a Data Source to Your Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Project Explorer
        Designing a Form
        Saving Your Work
        Selecting a Starting Object
        Running Your Project Locally
        Using Radio Buttons
        Giving Your Form a New Title
        Writing Data to the Data Source
        Adding a Form to Display Data From a Data Source
        Using the HTML Overflow Property
        Adding Form Navigation Buttons
        Deploying Your Project to a Different WebFOCUS Server
        Adding Images to Your Project
        What's Next?
      WebFOCUS Maintain Advanced Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating an Update Form
        Updating a Record in a Data Source
        Using Scripts for User Feedback
        Updating a Data Source Using a Read/Write Grid
        Creating a Welcome Screen Using the Menu Control
        Adding a WebFOCUS Report to Your Application
        Using a JavaScript Function to Define an E-mail Link
        Adding a Pop-up Calendar
        Getting Help in the Maintain Development Environment
      WebFOCUS Maintain Concepts
        Set-based Processing
        Controlling a Procedure's Flow
        Executing Other Maintain Procedures
        Forms and Event-driven Processing
        Reading From a Data Source
        Writing to a Data Source
        Transaction Processing
        Classes and Objects
      WebFOCUS Maintain Sample Data Sources
        Fannames Data Source
        Users Data Source
        Contact Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project
        Opening WebFOCUS Maintain
        Applications and Projects
        What Are the Building Blocks of a WebFOCUS Maintain Project?
        Editing Projects in the Maintain Development Environment
        Viewing System Messages in the Output Window
        Searching for Text in Your Project
        Editing Project Components as Text
        Incorporating Data Sources Into Your Project
        Using the Resource Wizard
        Team Development
      Developing Procedures
        Overview
        Specifying Data Sources for Your Procedure
        Using Functions in Procedures
        Using Variables in Procedures
        Using Data Source Stacks in Procedures
        Using the Type Wizard
        Using Import Modules
        Testing Procedures With the Run Procedure Option
      Using the Form Editor
        Form Editor Overview
        Layout of the Form Editor
        Using the Controls Palette
        Using the Property Sheet
        Using Drawing Aids
        Selecting Multiple Controls
        Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Duplicating Controls
        Resizing Controls
        Aligning Controls
        Spacing Controls
        Grouping Controls
        Changing the Order of Controls
        Undoing and Redoing Actions
        Layering Controls
      Developing and Using Forms
        Before You Begin Designing Forms
        Creating and Managing Forms
        Copying a Form Within a Procedure
        Changing Form Properties
        Using Cascading Style Sheets
        Dynamically Manipulating Forms at Run Time
        How WebFOCUS Maintain Saves Your Forms
        Using a Driver Procedure
      Defining Events and Event Handlers
        Using the Event Handler Editor
        Events
        Using a Maintain Function as an Event Handler
        Using Script Functions as Event Handlers
        Using Web Links as Event Handlers
      Developing and Using Controls
        Which Control Should You Use?
        Using Buttons
        Using Check Boxes
        Using Combo Boxes and List Boxes
        Using Edit Boxes and Multi-Edit Boxes
        Using Frames
        Using Grids and HTML Tables
        Using Group Boxes
        Using HTML Objects
        Using Images
        Using Java Applets
        Using Lines
        Using Menus
        Using Radio Buttons
        Using Text
        Using ActiveX Controls
        Dynamically Manipulating Controls at Run Time
        Defining Colors for Your Form and Controls
        Assigning Help to Your Forms and Controls
        Assigning Tab Order to Controls
      Form and Control Properties Reference
        (GroupCode) Property
        (Name) Property
        Alignment Property
        Alt Property
        AlternateRowColor Property
        BackColor Property
        BackColorOver Property
        BackgroundImage Property
        Border Property
        BorderColor Property
        BorderText Property
        BorderWidth Property
        Bottom Property
        Calendar Property
        CaseStyle Property
        Checked Property
        Columns Property
        Content Property
        CSSName Property
        CursorPointer Property
        DefaultButton Property
        Enabled Property
        FixedColumns Property
        Font Property
        ForeColor Property
        ForeColorOver Property
        GridLines Property
        HeaderBackColor Property
        HeaderFont Property
        HeaderForeColor Property
        Headers Property
        Height Property
        Help Property
        Hyperlink Property
        IBIValidation Property
        Image Property
        ImageDown Property
        ImageOver Property
        ItemBorder Property
        Layer Property
        Left Property
        ListItems Property
        Map Property
        MaximizeBox and MinimizeBox Properties
        MultiSelection Property
        OnLoad Property
        Orientation Property
        Overflow Property
        Password Property
        PenWidth Property
        ReadOnly Property
        Right Property
        Rows Property
        ScrollBars Property
        ScrollHeight and ScrollWidth Properties
        Scrolling Property
        SelectedItem/SelectedItems Property
        Sizeable Property
        Source Property
        Stretched Property
        Tabstop Property
        Text Property
        TextOnLeft Property
        Title Property
        ToolTipText Property
        Top Property
        Visible Property
        Width Property
        ZIndex Property
      Executing Other Procedures
        The Advantages of Modularizing Source Code
        Using the CALL and EXEC Commands
        Executing a Procedure on Another Server: AT Server
        Keeping or Terminating the Server Session: KEEP/DROP
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain Procedures: FROM...INTO
        Passing Parameters Between a Maintain Procedure and a WebFOCUS Procedure: FROM ... INTO
        Optimizing Performance: Data Continuity and Memory Management
      Using WebFOCUS Procedures in Your Application
        What Can WebFOCUS Procedures Do?
        Incorporating WebFOCUS Procedures Into Your Project
        Executing WebFOCUS Procedures From Maintain Procedures
        Using WebFOCUS Report Output in Maintain
        Executing Maintain Procedures From WebFOCUS Report Procedures
        Using Variable Binding From WebFOCUS Reports
      Developing Classes and Objects
        What Are Classes and Objects?
        Defining Classes
        Reusing Classes: Class Libraries
        Declaring Objects
      Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Compiling WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures
        Executing WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures From Outside the Maintain Development Environment
        Security and Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Customizing Key Functions and JavaScript for WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Closing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Developing an Application for a Shared Application Server
      Designing Applications for Scalability and Performance
        Application Partitioning
        Presentation Logic
        Database Logic
        Miscellaneous Business Logic
        EXEC Command, CALL Command, and System Resources
        Use When Appropriate
        Using the Best Parts
        Persistence Management
        Development Standards
        Tips for Designing Applications
      Ensuring Transaction Integrity
        Transaction Integrity Overview
        Why Is Transaction Integrity Important?
        Defining a Transaction
        Evaluating Whether a Transaction Was Successful
        Concurrent Transaction Processing
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for DB2 Data Sources
      Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        WebFOCUS Maintain Application Debugger
        Type on EDAPRINT
        Maintain Statement Trace
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        Additional Trace Settings
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Deploying Legacy Applications to the Web
        What Are the Differences Between Windows-Deployed and Web-Deployed Applications?
        Legacy Form Properties and Behavior
        Upgrading Legacy Windows Applications
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Maintain Language Reference
      Language Rules Reference
        Case Sensitivity
        Specifying Names
        Reserved Words
        What Can You Include in a Procedure?
        Multi-line Commands
        Terminating a Command's Syntax
        Adding Comments
      Expressions Reference
        Types of Expressions You Can Write
        Writing Numeric Expressions
        Writing Date Expressions
        Writing Date-Time Expressions
        Writing Character Expressions
        Writing Logical Expressions
        Writing Conditional Expressions
        Handling Null Values in Expressions
      Command Reference
        Language Summary
        BEGIN
        CALL
        CASE
        COMMIT
        COMPUTE
        COPY
        DECLARE
        DECRYPT
        DELETE
        DESCRIBE
        ENCRYPT / DECRYPT
        END
        EXEC
        FocCount
        FocCurrent
        FocError
        FocErrorRow
        FocFetch
        FocIndex
        FocMsg
        GOTO
        IF
        INCLUDE
        INFER
        MAINTAIN
        MATCH
        MNTCON CDN_FEXINPUT
        MNTCON COMPILE
        MNTCON EX
        MNTCON EXIT_WARNING
        MNTCON LOADIMAGE
        MNTCON MATCH_CASE
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        MNTCON RADIO_BUTTON_EMIT_TEXT
        MNTCON REMOTESTYLE
        MNTCON RUN
        MNTCON RUNIMAGE
        MODULE
        NEXT
        ON MATCH
        ON NEXT
        ON NOMATCH
        ON NONEXT
        PERFORM
        REPEAT
        REPOSITION
        REVISE
        ROLLBACK
        SAY
        SET
        STACK CLEAR
        STACK SORT
        SYS_MGR
        SYS_MGR.DBMS_ERRORCODE
        SYS_MGR.ENGINE
        SYS_MGR.FOCSET
        SYS_MGR.GET_INPUTPARAMS_COUNT
        SYS_MGR.GET_NAMEPARM
        SYS_MGR.GET_POSITIONPARM
        SYS_MGR.PRE_MATCH
        TYPE
        UPDATE
        Winform
      WebFOCUS Maintain Error Messages
        Error Message Listings
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster Administration
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Processing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Features
      Enabling User Capabilities
        Accessing the ReportCaster User Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      ReportCaster Security
        ReportCaster Credentials
        ReportCaster Security Settings
        Additional User IDs for Use With ReportCaster
        Configuring ReportCaster With External Authentication
        ReportCaster Remote Authentication
        Include Windows Domain Name With User ID for IWA
        File System Permissions
        Optional Encryption Providers for ReportCaster
      Configuring ReportCaster
        About Configuring ReportCaster
        Distribution Servers Settings
        Repository Settings
        Security Settings
        General Preferences Settings
        Email Settings
        FTP/SFTP Settings
        Zip Settings
        Other Schedule Defaults
        Log Settings
        Traces Settings
        Code Page Settings
        LDAP Settings
        Data Servers Settings
        Two-Way Email Settings
        Report Library Settings
        Managed Reporting Settings
        Library Search Settings
        Customizing ReportCaster Plug-ins
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling ReportCaster Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        ReportCaster Repository Creation Tracing
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Tracing for ReportCaster
        Using the Java Console
      ReportCaster Administrative Tasks
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Globally Updating Repository Field Values
      ReportCaster Repository Tables and Reports
        About Repository Reports
        ReportCaster Repository Tables
      Loading User IDs Into the ReportCaster Repository
        Using the Synchronize External Users Utility
        Using SQL Statements to Load ReportCaster User IDs and Groups
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Development and Library Content
      Introducing ReportCaster
        Overview of ReportCaster
        The ReportCaster Development Interface
        ReportCaster Library Content
        Considerations When Using ReportCaster
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Administration Applet Version
      Accessing ReportCaster and Enabling User Capabilities in the Applet
        Security Warning
        Accessing the ReportCaster Applet
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      Creating a Schedule Using the ReportCaster Applet
        Overview
        Schedule Tab
        Creating a Task
        Specifying Distribution Options
        Specifying Optional and Notification Settings
      Maintaining Schedules in the ReportCaster Applet Interface
        Maintaining a Schedule
        Schedule Blackout Dates
      Tracking a Schedule in the Applet Interface
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Troubleshooting ReportCaster Log Reports
      Working With Distribution Lists in the ReportCaster Applet
        Distribution List Overview
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      Using the ReportCaster Console
        Accessing the ReportCaster Console
        ReportCaster Console Options
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        Viewing, Running, and Deleting a Scheduled Job
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Using the Log Option to View Information About a Distributed Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
        Globally Replacing Field Values in the ReportCaster Repository
        Logging Off the ReportCaster Console
        Accessing the Online Help File
      Using the Report Library From the Applet
        Using the Report Library
        Managing Users and Groups Using the Library Access List Interface
        Accessing Library Content
        Viewing Library Reports
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill-Through Support
        Library Management
      Using Change Management
        About ReportCaster Change Management
      Configuring ReportCaster Using the Applet Tool
        About the ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool
        General Configuration Settings in the Applet
        LDAP Settings
        Data Server Settings in the Applet
        Two-Way Email Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Settings in the Applet
        Managed Reporting Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Integration With the Google Search Engine
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster HTML User Interface Manual
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Using the Scheduling Wizard
        Overview
        Schedule Options
        Report Information
        Report Parameters
        Distribution Options in the Scheduling Wizard
        Priority, Notification, and Zip File Options
        Running a Schedule Without Saving It
      Working With Distribution Lists in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Distribution or Address Book List Interface
        Creating a Distribution or Address Book List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      Maintaining a Schedule Using the HTML User Interface
        About the Schedules Interface
        Editing a Schedule in the HTML User Interface
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Schedule Blackout Dates
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Using the Report Library from the HTML Interface
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Report Library
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill Through Support
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
      ReportCaster API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Troubleshooting API Samples
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        User Samples
        Credential Authentication
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Tables Accessed by the Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        ReportCaster Repository Tables Accessed by the Servlets
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Enable
    WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex 4.x User's Guide
      Introduction
        RIA Technologies
        About WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex
      Prerequisites and Download Instructions
        Software Prerequisites
        Downloading WebFOCUS Enable From Information Builders
        Compatibility Features
        IBI NameSpace: Prefix for WebFOCUS Enable Components
      Custom Components and Properties
        About Components and Properties
        Component/Property Tables
        Customizing Component Properties
      Developing a WebFOCUS Enable Application
        Sample Application
        Application Basics
        Creating a Flex Project
        Creating an Input File in WebFOCUS Developer Studio
        Creating an Application Canvas
        Creating a Title for the Dashboard
        Adding Custom Animation
        Logically Organizing Content With the TabNavigator
        Binding a Procedure to the ibiDataGrid Using Custom Components
        Creating an Aggregated Grid Using Existing ibiDataGrid Data
        Creating a Filter
        Using the ibiDataGrid to Filter Other Components
        Creating a Pie Chart and Column Chart
        Adding a Tree Control, Combo Box, and Slider
        Compiling SWF Files
        Turning Off the Show Message Window Context Menu
      Creating Other Charts
        Preparing the Layout and Adding the Charts
        Understanding Additional Chart Types
      Deploying an Application
        Deploying an Application in Managed Reporting Business Intelligence Dashboard
      Customizing WebFOCUS Enable Applications
        ibiDataGrid Customization Options
        Using Filters
        Customizing IBI Chart Components
        Using IBI Custom Event Listeners and Functions
      Using the WebFOCUS Enable API
        Initializing an Application
        Creating an Aggregated DataGrid
        Saggregate
        Filtering Details of the DataGrid From the List Box
        Filtering an Aggregated DataGrid From the List Box
        Creating a Pie Chart
      IBI Component for Google Maps API for Flash
        ibiMap001 Features
      Building a Basic Dashboard
        Building the Dashboard
      Adding Styles to a Dashboard
        Creating Flex Style Codes
        Applying Styles to the ibiDataGrid
        Applying Styles to ibiColumnChart and ibiPieChart
        Creating Flex Functions
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex Release Notes
      WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex Release Notes
        Release Notes Version 2.0.1
        Release Notes Version 2.0.0
        Launch PDF
  Visual Discovery
    Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components With Developer Studio
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Key Features
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server (Thin Client)
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Developing an Analytic Dashboard
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Distributing a Visual Discovery File With ReportCaster
        Working With Visual Discovery Components on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
      Tutorial: Building a Visual Discovery Analytic Dashboard
        Before You Begin
        Building an Analytic Dashboard With Visual Discovery Components
      Deploying Visual Discovery Applications
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for Server (Thin Client)
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Visualization Components: Descriptions and Usage
        What Is a Glyph?
        Bar Charts
        Line Charts
        Pie Charts
        Histograms
        Counts
        Data Constellations
        Data Constellation Maps
        Data Sheets
        Multiscapes
        Paraboxes
        Scatter Plots
        Summary Sheets
        Time Tables
        Perspectives
      Inserting Chart Controls Into a Visual Discovery Dashboard
        Building an Application With Advanced Chart Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Graphics
    WebFOCUS Graphics
      Graphing Basics
        What Is Scalable Vector Graphics?
        Viewing Scalable Vector Graphics
        Portable Network Graphics
        Virtual Coordinate System
        Implementing API Calls
      Using WebFOCUS Graphics
        How Properties and Methods Work
        The GraphType Property
        How Graphs Are Imaged
        Chart Layout Manager
        Graph-Wide Parameters
        Graph Frame Attributes
        Axis Attributes
        Grid Lines
        Curve Fit Lines
        Java 2D Line Objects
        Risers and Markers
        Legends
        Labels and Titles
        Data Text
        Customizing Data Text
        Formatting Numbers
        Formatting Text Objects
        Java 2D Text Objects
        Autofitting
        Graph-Specific Properties and Methods
        Colors and Shading
        Textures and Gradients
        Panning, Rotating, and Scaling
        Graph Editing Characteristics
        Annotations
        Drill-Down and URLs
        Multiple Drill-Down From Graph
        Alternate Formatting
        Beveled Borders
        Reference Lines
      Using Data in a Graph
        Graph Titles and Labels
        Data Scrolling and Zooming
        How Missing Data Is Handled
        Data Requirements for Different Graph Types
      Properties
        Properties for Graphs
        AdjustAutoScaleForRefLines
        AlignMultiYBars
        AltFmtFrameSeparator
        AltFmtFrameNumColors
        Autoshading
        AutoshadingWalls
        AxisTextAutofitMax
        AxisTextAutofitMin
        AxisTextAutofitMode
        AxisTextAutofitPercent
        BiDirectional
        BoxPlotType
        Cascade
        ColorMode
        ConnectLineMarkers
        ConnectParetoBars
        ConnectScatterMarkers
        CubeFocusFactor
        CubeIsometricProjection
        CubeLightSourceX
        CubeLightSourceY
        CubeLightSourceZ
        CubePanX
        CubePanY
        CubeProportional
        CubeRiserInterpolation
        CubeSizeX
        CubeSizeY
        CubeSizeZ
        CubeSquareRisers
        CubeTranslationX
        CubeTranslationY
        CubeTranslationZ
        CubeViewerX
        CubeViewerY
        CubeViewerZ
        CubeWallThickX
        CubeWallThickY
        CubeWallThickZ
        CubeZoomFactor
        CurveFitEquationDisplay
        CurveFitHighOrderFirst
        CurveFitNumSegments
        DataItemsAlongSeries
        DataLineThickness
        DataScrollerPresenceGroups
        DataScrollerPresenceSeries
        DataSortType
        DataTextAngleDefault
        DataTextDisplay
        DataTextFormat
        DataTextFormatPattern
        DataTextPosition
        DataTextRadiusDefault
        DataTextStackedTotalOnTop()
        DataTextTemplateBubble
        DataTextTemplateHiLo
        DataTextTemplateScatter
        DepthAngle
        DepthRadius
        Display3DFloor
        Display3DLeftWall
        Display3DRightWall
        DisplayBarAsPictograph
        DisplayFunnelGroup
        DisplayParetoSeries
        DocumentHeightInTwips
        DocumentWidthInTwips
        DrawAreaMarkers
        DrawCompleteAreaRiser
        DualAxisLineDisplay
        DualAxisSplitPosition
        ExactColorByHeight
        ExtendToFrameEdge
        FillMissingData
        FootnoteAutofit
        FootnoteDisplay
        FootnoteString
        ForceSeriesAbsolute
        FrameAutoShade
        FrameDisplay
        FunnelLabelValueLocation
        GaugeBackgroundStyle
        GaugeColorCenterByQuality
        GaugeDescending
        GaugeIgnoreBackgroundStyle
        GaugeMajorAutoStep
        GaugeMajorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeMinorAutoStep
        GaugeMinorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeNeedleStyle
        GaugeRelativeInnerRadius
        GaugeRelativeThickness
        GaugeSizeMode
        GaugeStartAngle
        GaugeStopAngle
        GraphType
        Grid3DFloorDisplayX
        Grid3DFloorDisplayZ
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayY
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayZ
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayX
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayX
        Grid3DRiserDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayZ
        HiliteBarResize
        IgnoreGridSkip
        IgnoreTickSkip
        InterpretAsHLOC
        LegendAutomatic
        LegendDisplay
        LegendMarkerPosition
        LegendMarkersPerRow
        LegendOrient
        LegendReverse
        LegendScroll
        LegendSeriesCount
        LegendSeriesStart
        LegendTextAutofit
        MajorGridDrawEveryCount
        MajorGridTickInterval
        MinorGridTickInterval
        MarkerDisplay
        MarkerSizeDefault
        MoveAxisTitles
        NestedLabels
        NullLegendMarkerShapesAsSquares
        NumMissingDataSegments
        NumPieArcSegmentsPerPixel
        OtherPercentage
        OtherSeries
        OutputSVG
        OverDrawSkip
        O1AxisLineDisplay
        O1AxisSide
        O1ExcludeMaxLabel
        O1ExcludeMinLabel
        O1LabelAutoAngle
        O1LabelAutofit
        O1LabelAutoSkip
        O1LabelDisplay
        O1LabelMargin
        O1LabelRotate
        O1LabelSkipBegin
        O1LabelSkipCount
        O1LabelStagger
        O1LabelWrap
        O1MajorGridDisplay
        O1MajorGridStyle
        O1MajorTickDisplay
        O1MajorTickStyle
        O1MinorGridCount
        O1MinorGridDisplay
        O1MinorGridStyle
        O1MinorTickCount
        O1MinorTickDisplay
        O1MinorTickStyle
        O1TitleAutofit
        O1TitleDisplay
        O1TitleString
        O2ExcludeMaxLabel
        O2ExcludeMinLabel
        O2LabelAutofit
        O2LabelAutoSkip
        O2LabelDisplay
        O2LabelRotate
        O2LabelSkipBegin
        O2LabelSkipCount
        O2LabelWrap
        O2TitleAutofit
        O2TitleDisplay
        O2TitleString
        ParetoDisplayThreshold
        ParetoY2MajorGridStep
        ParetoY2MajorTickStep
        PieBarLabelDisplay
        PieBarLabelString
        PieBarSeries
        PieDepth
        PieFeelerTextDisplay
        PieFeelerTextFormat
        PieFeelerTextFormatPattern
        PieLabelDisplay
        PieRingSize
        PieRingTotalDisplay
        PieRingTotalFormat
        PieRingTotalFormatPattern
        PieRotate
        PieSorting
        PiesPerRow
        PieTilt
        Place
        PrimitiveAntialiasing
        QuadrantLineCountX
        QuadrantLineCountY
        ReferencePercentageMode
        ReferenceTextPosition
        RemoveDuplicateDataText
        RepositionDataTextCollision
        RepositionStackedDataTextCollision
        ReshapeEnable
        ResizeBarMode
        ReverseGroups
        ReverseSeries
        Riser3DThicknessY
        RiserBarGroupSpacing
        RiserBorderMode
        RiserWidth
        ScaleFromZero
        ScrollOffsetGroup
        ScrollOffsetSeries
        SelectionEnable
        SelectionEnableMove
        SeriesAreRows
        SeriesDefaultBorderColor
        SeriesDefaultTransparentBorderColor
        SeriesLineWidthDefault
        SeriesLooping
        ShadowXOffsetDefault
        ShadowYOffsetDefault
        SizeToContainer
        SmoothLines
        SquareMarkers
        StackedDataValueSum
        Stock52WeekHighDisplay
        Stock52WeekHighValue
        Stock52WeekLowDisplay
        Stock52WeekLowValue
        StockCandleForVolumeColor
        StockCloseSplitDisplay
        StockCloseTicksDisplay
        StockMovingAverageDisplay
        StockOpenTicksDisplay
        StockTickLength
        SubtitleAutofit
        SubtitleDisplay
        SubtitleString
        TextAntialiasing
        TextAutofitMax
        TextAutofitMin
        TitleAutofit
        TitleDisplay
        TitleString
        ToolTipDelay
        ToolTipDisplay
        ToolTipMode
        ToolTipTimeoutEnabled
        TransparentMarkers
        TransparentMarkerSize
        UseDefaultBubbleMarker
        UseOffScreen
        UseSeriesBorderDefaults
        UseSeriesShapes
        UseTimeScaleAxis
        ValidGroupsMin
        ValidSeriesMin
        ViewableGroups
        ViewableGroupsStock
        ViewableSeries
        ViewableSeriesStock
        Viewing3DAnglePreset
        WaterfallLastGroupTotal
        WaterfallStackColorMode
        X1AxisDescending
        X1AxisLineDisplay
        X1AxisSide
        X1ExcludeMaxLabel
        X1ExcludeMinLabel
        X1LabelAutofit
        X1LabelDisplay
        X1LabelFormat
        X1LabelFormatPattern
        X1LabelRotate
        X1LabelStagger
        X1LogScale
        X1MajorGridDisplay
        X1MajorGridStep
        X1MajorGridStepAuto
        X1MajorGridStyle
        X1MajorTickDisplay
        X1MajorTickStyle
        X1MinorGridDisplay
        X1MinorGridStep
        X1MinorGridStepAuto
        X1MinorGridStyle
        X1MinorTickDisplay
        X1MinorTickStyle
        X1MustIncludeZero
        X1OffScaleDisplay
        X1ScaleMax
        X1ScaleMaxAuto
        X1ScaleMin
        X1ScaleMinAuto
        X1TitleAutofit
        X1TitleDisplay
        X1TitleString
        X1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y1AxisDescending
        Y1AxisLineDisplay
        Y1AxisSide
        Y1ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y1ExcludeMinLabel
        Y1LabelAutofit
        Y1LabelDisplay
        Y1LabelFormat
        Y1LabelFormatPattern
        Y1LabelRotate
        Y1LabelStagger
        Y1LogScale
        Y1MajorGridDisplay
        Y1MajorGridStep
        Y1MajorGridStepAuto
        Y1MajorGridStyle
        Y1MajorTickDisplay
        Y1MajorTickStyle
        Y1MinorGridDisplay
        Y1MinorGridStepAuto
        Y1MinorGridStyle
        Y1MinorTickDisplay
        Y1MinorTickStepAuto
        Y1MinorTickStyle
        Y1MustIncludeZero
        Y1OffScaleDisplay
        Y1ScaleMax
        Y1ScaleMaxAuto
        Y1ScaleMin
        Y1ScaleMinAuto
        Y1TitleAutofit
        Y1TitleDisplay
        Y1TitleString
        Y1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y2AxisDescending
        Y2AxisLineDisplay
        Y2AxisSide
        Y2ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y2ExcludeMinLabel
        Y2LabelAutofit
        Y2LabelDisplay
        Y2LabelFormat
        Y2LabelFormatPattern
        Y2LabelRotate
        Y2LabelStagger
        Y2LogScale
        Y2MajorGridDisplay
        Y2MajorGridStep
        Y2MajorGridStepAuto
        Y2MajorGridStyle
        Y2MinorGridDisplay
        Y2MinorGridStep
        Y2MinorGridStepAuto
        Y2MinorGridStyle
        Y2MustIncludeZero
        Y2OffScaleDisplay
        Y2ScaleMax
        Y2ScaleMaxAuto
        Y2ScaleMin
        Y2ScaleMinAuto
        Y2TitleAutofit
        Y2TitleDisplay
        Y2TitleString
        Y2ZeroLineDisplay
        Y3AxisDescending
        Y3LogScale
        Y3ZeroLineDisplay
        Y4AxisDescending
        Y4LogScale
        Y4ZeroLineDisplay
        Y5AxisDescending
        Y5LogScale
        Y5ZeroLineDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextStackedTotalOnTopDisplay
        ZoomDirection
        ZoomPercentage
      Methods
        get Methods
        restore Methods
        save()
        send Methods
        set Methods
      Methods That Return an Object ID
        Object ID Methods
        getAllSeries()
        getAnnotation()
        getAnnotationBox()
        getAnnotationLabel()
        getAnnotationLine()
        getAreaRiser()
        getAreaRiserBottom()
        getAreaRiserTop()
        getBarRiser()
        getBarRiserBottom()
        getBarRiserSide()
        getChartBackground()
        getColorByHeight()
        getCubeFloor()
        getCubeFloorGridX()
        getCubeFloorGridZ()
        getCubeLeftWall()
        getCubeLeftWallGridY()
        getCubeLeftWallGridZ()
        getCubeRightWall()
        getCubeRightWallGridX()
        getCubeRightWallGridZ()
        getCubeRiserFace()
        getCubeRiserGridX()
        getCubeRiserGridY()
        getCubeRiserGridZ()
        getCurveFitCorrelationText()
        getCurveFitCorrelationTextbox()
        getCurveFitEquationText()
        getCurveFitEquationTextbox()
        getCurveFitLineRiser()
        getDataText()
        getExceptionalRiser()
        getFootnote()
        getFootnoteBox()
        getFrame()
        getFrameBottom()
        getFrameSeparator()
        getFrameSide()
        getFunnelCrust()
        getFunnelFeeler()
        getFunnelLabel()
        getFunnelValueLabel()
        getGaugeArea()
        getGaugeBackground()
        getGaugeBand1...5()
        getGaugeBand1...5Label()
        getGaugeLabel()
        getGaugeMajorTick()
        getGaugeMinorTick()
        getGaugeNeedle()
        getGaugeScaleArea()
        getGaugeTitle()
        getGlobal()
        getGroup()
        getGroupScroller()
        getGroupScrollerEditBox()
        getGroupScrollerEditLeft()
        getGroupScrollerEditRight()
        getGroupScrollerEditThumb()
        getGroupScrollerThumb()
        getHistogramRiser()
        getLegendArea()
        getLegendMarker()
        getLegendScroller()
        getLegendScrollerThumb()
        getLegendText()
        getLegendTextBox()
        getLineMarker()
        getLineRiser()
        getLineRiserSide()
        getLineRiserTop()
        getNestedO1Label0...8()
        getNestedO1Label0...8Box()
        getNestedO1LabelLine()
        getNonZeroBaseLineZeroLine()
        getO1Axis()
        getO1AxisLine()
        getO1Label()
        getO1MajorGrid()
        getO1MajorTick()
        getO1MinorGrid()
        getO1MinorTick()
        getO1Title()
        getO1TitleBox()
        getO2Axis()
        getO2Label()
        getO2MajorGrid()
        getO2MinorGrid()
        getO2Title()
        getO2TitleBox()
        getParetoLineMarker()
        getParetoLineRiser()
        getParetoLineRiserSide()
        getParetoLineRiserSide1()
        getParetoLineRiserSide2()
        getParetoLineRiserTop()
        getParetoLineRiserTop1()
        getParetoLineRiserTop2()
        getPieBarConnectLineBottom()
        getPieBarConnectLines()
        getPieBarLabel()
        getPieBarRiserTop()
        getPieBarSlice()
        getPieBarSliceCrust()
        getPieFeelerLine()
        getPieFrame()
        getPieLabel()
        getPieRingLabel()
        getPieSliceFeelerPercent()
        getPieSliceFeelerValue()
        getPieSliceLabel()
        getPlaceHorzO1LabelsTitle()
        getPlaceVertO1LabelsTitle()
        getQuadrantLine()
        getReferenceLine()
        getReferenceLineLegendText()
        getReferenceLineO1()
        getReferenceLineO2()
        getReferenceLineX1()
        getReferenceLineY1()
        getReferenceLineY2()
        getReferenceLineTextO1()
        getReferenceLineTextO2()
        getReferenceLineTextX1()
        getReferenceLineTextY1()
        getReferenceLineTextY2()
        getScatterQuadrantLine()
        getSeries()
        getSeriesGroup()
        getSeriesScroller()
        getSeriesScrollerEditBox()
        getSeriesScrollerEditLeft()
        getSeriesScrollerEditRight()
        getSeriesScrollerEditThumb()
        getSeriesScrollerThumb()
        getSlice()
        getSliceCrust()
        getSliceRing()
        getSpectralLegendMarker()
        getSpectralMarker()
        getStackConnectLine()
        getStock52WeekHighLine()
        getStock52WeekLowLine()
        getStockCloseTick()
        getStockFallingRiser()
        getStockHighLine()
        getStockLowerRiser()
        getStockLowLine()
        getStockMALine()
        getStockOpenTick()
        getStockRiser()
        getStockRisingRiser()
        getStockVolumeRiser()
        getSubTitle()
        getSubTitleBox()
        getThermGaugeArea()
        getThermGaugeBackground()
        getThermGaugeNeedle()
        getTimeScaleLevel()
        getTitle()
        getTitleBox()
        getWaterFallLine()
        getX1Axis()
        getX1AxisLine()
        getX1Label()
        getX1MajorGrid()
        getX1MajorTick()
        getX1MinorGrid()
        getX1MinorTick()
        getX1Title()
        getX1TitleBox()
        getX1ZeroLine()
        getY1Axis()
        getY1AxisLine()
        getY1FrontZeroLine()
        getY1Label()
        getY1MajorGrid()
        getY1MajorTick()
        getY1MinorGrid()
        getY1MinorTick()
        getY1Title()
        getY1TitleBox()
        getY1ZeroLine()
        getY2Axis()
        getY2AxisLine()
        getY2FrontZeroLine()
        getY2Label()
        getY2MajorGrid()
        getY2MajorTick()
        getY2MinorGrid()
        getY2MinorTick()
        getY2Title()
        getY2TitleBox()
        getY2ZeroLine()
        getY3Axis()
        getY3AxisLine()
        getY3FrontZeroLine()
        getY3Label()
        getY3MajorGrid()
        getY3MajorTick()
        getY3MinorGrid()
        getY3MinorTick()
        getY3Title()
        getY3TitleBox()
        getY3ZeroLine()
        getY4Axis()
        getY4AxisLine()
        getY4Label()
        getY4MajorGrid()
        getY4MajorTick()
        getY4MinorGrid()
        getY4MinorTick()
        getY4Title()
        getY4TitleBox()
        getY4ZeroLine()
        getY5Axis()
        getY5AxisLine()
        getY5Label()
        getY5MajorGrid()
        getY5MajorTick()
        getY5MinorGrid()
        getY5MinorTick()
        getY5Title()
        getY5TitleBox()
        getY5ZeroLine()
      Graph Types and 3D Preset Viewing Angles
        Graph Types
        3D Preset Viewing Angles
      Graph Properties Index
        Current Graph Properties
        Graph Properties Reserved For Future Use
        Graph Properties Reserved for Internal Use
      Graph Methods Index
        Current Graph Methods
        Reserved for Future Use
        Reserved for Internal Use
      IdentObj Methods Index
        Current IndentObj Methods
        IndentObj Methods Reserved for Future Use
      Static Variables
        Current Static Variables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems: ESRI ArcGIS Server and ArcGIS Flex API
      Introducing Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Geographic Information Systems
        Defining the Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
        GBIS Components
        New Features
      WebFOCUS GIS Adapter Architecture
        XML-based Configuration Blocks
        Orientation Modes
      Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        Creating a Map Service
      Using the WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer Components
        WebFOCUS Map Component
        WebFOCUS Report Component
        Synthetic Layer Component
        WebFOCUS Data View Component
        JavaScript Functions Available From Flexmapviewer.jsp
      Creating WebFOCUS GIS Procedures
        Incorporating the GIS Filter
        Creating a Report Procedure
        Creating an Identify Procedure
        Creating a Map Procedure
      Useful Techniques and Examples
        Creating Drill-Downs From a Report to a Map
        Drawing Multiple Map Layers
        Transitioning Between Map Images
        Including Custom Libraries
        Embedding Custom JavaScript Functions in the ESRIINFO.XML File
        Directing Alternate Report Output to Different Windows
        Specifying Custom Colors in Your FOCEXEC
        Automatically Zooming On Selected Portions of the Map
        Automatically Zooming On Features of the Map That Were Drawn
        Controlling the Visible Map Viewing Area
        Controlling Layers That Are Visible
        Increasing the Maximum Number of Selectable Map Features
        Improving Map and Report Response Time
        Specifying Default Drawing Methods for Additional Features on the Map
        Describing and Working With a Synthetic Layer
        Defining a Tiled Map Service
        Loading the Flex Map Viewer
        Using Symbols Defined in Your Configuration File
        Controlling Layers That are Visible
        Enabling a Buffer Using Selected Features From the Layer
      Glossary of Related Terms
        A-E
        F-H
        I-L
        M-Q
        R-T
        U-X
      XML Schema Reference
        Root Element <mapfexs>
        Class Definitions
        Constants
      Symbol Class Settings and Parameters
        SimpleLineSymbol
        SimplePolygonSymbol
        SimpleMarkerSymbol
        RasterMarkerSymbol
        TrueTypeMarkerSymbol
        CallOutMarkerSymbol
        TextMarkerSymbol
      HTML Color Values
        Color Value Table
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems API Reference
      Introducing the WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems Architecture
        WebFOCUS for GIS Architecture
      Adapter for GIS Functions
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Load a Map Viewer
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Execute Report Viewer
        Post EsriInfo to the Adapter for GIS
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Execute Report Viewer
        Load an XML File Into the Adapter for GIS
        Load an XML File Into the Adapter for GIS Cache and Return a Unique Dom Key
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Load a Template File for the Map Viewer
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Load a Widget Configuration File for Individual Widgets From the WebFOCUS Menu
        Post to the Adapter for GIS to Register a Selection Geometry Shape Needed to Run a Report
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Execute a Report
        Post to the Adapter for GIS to Execute a Map Fex
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Web Services
    WebFOCUS Web Services
      WebFOCUS Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using WebFOCUS Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
        WebFOCUS Web Services Architecture
      Using the WebFOCUS WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating WSDL Files With the WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating a Generic WSDL File for an Application
        Creating a WebFOCUS Report as a Web Service Function
        Creating a Managed Reporting Report as a Web Service Function
        Choosing Functions for a WSDL File
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service With Apache Axis
      WebFOCUS Web Service Structures
        Structures
      WebFOCUS Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Managed Reporting Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
        Debugging WebFOCUS Web Services Adapter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Web Services
      ReportCaster Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using ReportCaster Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
      Using the ReportCaster WSDL Creation Utility
        WSDL Creation Utility Overview
        Creating a WSDL File for a ReportCaster Web Service
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service in Java
      ReportCaster Web Service Structures
        Structures
      ReportCaster Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Address Book Service Functions
        Logon Function
        Library Access Service Functions
        Library Content Service Functions
        Console Service Functions
        Log Service Functions
        User Service Functions
        Schedule Service Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting ReportCaster Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  WebFOCUS API
    WebFOCUS API Developer's Reference
      Introduction to WebFOCUS API
        Introducing WebFOCUS API
        Installation Requirements for the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API at a Glance
        Components of the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API Packages and Classes
        WebFOCUS Request Processing
      WebFOCUS API Functionality
        Managed Reporting Authentication
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Authentication
        Running a WebFOCUS Server Procedure
        Running a Managed Reporting Standard Report
        Running a Managed Reporting My Report
        Getting a List of Domains
        Getting a List of Domains for a Particular User
        Getting a List of Users
        User Flags
      WebFOCUS API Samples
        Elements of the WebFOCUS API Sample Application
        WebFOCUS API Sample Web Application Structure
        Sample Java Files
      Troubleshooting
        Debugging a WebFOCUS API Application
        WebFOCUS Error Codes
        Managed Reporting Error Codes
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Installation and Configuration
    Server Installation WebFOCUS Reporting Server DataMigrator Server
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for IBM i
    Developer Studio Installation and Configuration
  Reporting Server Administration
    Server Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, IBM i, and z/OS
      Server Introduction
        Using the Web Console
        My Console Options
        Configuration Overview
        Running and Configuring the FOCUS Database Server (z/OS Only)
        Server Profiles
        Profile Commands
      Server Security
        Server Security Overview
        Configuring Authentication
        Configuring Privileges and Other Authorizations
        Configuring Server Encryption
        Access to Connection Information in WebFOCUS Procedures
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Allocation for UNIX and z/OS UNIX System Services
        Temporary File Directory Structure for Non-PDS Deployment
      Data Adapters
        Configuring an Adapter
        Changing the Adapter Configuration
        Configuring a Remote Server
      Metadata
        Creating Synonyms
        Testing Synonyms
        Managing Synonyms
        Metadata Wizard
      Stored Procedures
        Creating a Stored Procedure
        Editing a Stored Procedure
        Running a Stored Procedure
        Scheduling a Procedure
        Sending an E-mail Notification for a Procedure
        Stress Testing a Procedure
        Running Impact Analysis Reports
      Server Workspace Manager
        Configuring Workspace Manager
        Workspace Configuration Settings
        Editing Configuration Files
        Fine-Tuning the Server
        Monitoring Server Activity
      Listeners and Special Services
        Using the Listeners and Special Services Configuration Panes
      Troubleshooting
        Viewing Version Information
        Analyzing Server Activity
        Analyzing FOCUS Database Server Activity
        Tracing Server Activity
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for the Unified Server
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for USS/HFS Deployment
        Retrieving IBISNAP Output
        Recording and Reproducing User Actions
        Troubleshooting the Console
        Workspace Manager Safe Mode
        Server Processes
        Gathering Diagnostic Information for Customer Support Services
      Unicode Support
        Unicode and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Accessing Unicode Data
        Selecting, Reformatting, and Manipulating Characters
        Sort Order Under Unicode
        Added Unicode Support for Master Files, Data Files, and Application Directory Names
        Unicode PDF Output
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Adapter Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, IBM i, and z/OS
      Introduction to Adapters
        Processing Requests
        Functions of an Adapter
        Data Management
        Metadata Services With SQLENGINE SET
        Additional Master File Attributes
      Using the Adapter for 1010data
        Configuring the Adapter for 1010data
        Managing 1010data Metadata
        Customizing the 1010data Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Adabas
        Preparing the Adabas Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas
        Adabas Overview
        Managing Adabas Metadata
        Overview of Master and Access Files
        Master Files for Adabas
        Access Files for Adabas
        Mapping Adabas Descriptors
        Mapping Adabas Files With Variable-Length Records and Repeating Fields
        Using the GROUP Attribute to Cross-Reference Files
        Platform-Specific Functionality
        Customizing the Adabas Environment
        Adabas Reporting Considerations
        Adabas Writing Considerations
        Adapter Navigation
        Entry Segment Retrieval of Adabas Records
        Descendant Periodic Groups and Multi-Value Fields
        Descendant Adabas Records
      Using the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Preparing the Adabas Stored Procedures Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Managing Adabas Stored Procedure Metadata
        Invoking an Adabas Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Caché
        Preparing the Caché Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Caché
        Managing Caché Metadata
        Customizing the Caché Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Managing CICS Transaction Metadata
        Invoking a CICS Transaction
        Running a TPG/SPG/AAS Transaction
      Using the Adapters for C-ISAM and ISAM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter
        Managing C-ISAM Metadata
        Maintaining C-ISAM Data Sources Using SQL Commands
        Using a Secondary Index in C-ISAM and ISAM Files
      Using the Adapter for DATACOM
        Preparing the DATACOM Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DATACOM
        DATACOM Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing DATACOM Metadata
        Master Files for DATACOM
        Access Files for DATACOM
        Describing Multi-File Structures for DATACOM
        Data Retrieval Logic for DATACOM
      Using the Adapter for DB2
        Preparing the DB2 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB2
        Managing DB2 Metadata
        Reporting Against a DB2 Stored Procedure
        Customizing the DB2 Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Using DB2 Cube Views
        Calling a DB2 Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Preparing the DB Heritage Files Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Managing DB Heritage Files Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Multi-Format Logical Files
        DB Heritage Files Record Selection Efficiencies
      Using the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Preparing the Web Application Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Managing Enterprise Java Beans Metadata
      Using the Adapter for ERwin
        Preparation Steps for ERwin
        Configuring the Adapter for ERwin
        Enhancing Synonyms With ERwin Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Essbase
        Preparing the Essbase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Essbase
        Managing Essbase Metadata
        Customizing the Essbase Environment
        Essbase Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Modifying Essbase Data
      Using the Adapter for Excel
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel
        Managing Excel Metadata
        Customizing the Excel Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Managing Metadata for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
      Using the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Managing Metadata for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
      Using the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Preparing the HP Neoview Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Managing HP Neoview Metadata
        Customizing the HP Neoview Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/DB
        Preparing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing IDMS/DB Metadata
        Master Files for IDMS/DB
        Access Files for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Sample File Descriptions
        File Retrieval
        Record Retrieval
        Customizing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Tracing the Adapter for IDMS/DB
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/SQL
        Preparing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/SQL
        Managing IDMS/SQL Metadata
        Customizing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for IMS
        IMS Environments: Overview
        Preparing the IMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS
        Managing IMS Metadata
        Master File Attributes
        Access File Attributes (DBCTL)
        Migrating From an Existing MVS Server (DBCTL)
        WebFOCUS Reporting With IMS
        Maintaining IMS Data Sources (DBCTL)
      Using the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Preparing the IMS Transactions Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Managing IMS Transactions Metadata
        Invoking an IMS Transaction
        Invoking an IMS Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Information Manager
        IBM Information/Management
        How the Server Works With Information/Management
        InfoMan Hardware and Software Requirements
        Configuring the Adapter for InfoMan
        Defining the Adapter for InfoMan User ID and Session ID
        InfoMan Access Control
        Server Security in InfoMan
        IBM Information/Management Database Security
        AUTOIMAN Configuration File
        Describing InfoMan Data Sources
        Executing AUTOIMAN
        Working With AUTOIMAN
        Master File Generation Facility in InfoMan
        PIDT Selection Panel in InfoMan
        Retrieval PIDT Name Confirmation in InfoMan
      Using the Adapter for Informix
        Preparing the Informix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Informix
        Managing Informix Metadata
        Customizing the Informix Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Informix Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Ingres
        Preparing the Ingres Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Ingres
        Managing Ingres Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Interplex
        Preparing the Interplex Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Interplex
        Managing Interplex Metadata
        Customizing the Interplex Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for iWay Adapter Framework (IWAF)
        Preparing the IWAF Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IWAF
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for JDBC
        Preparing the JDBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JDBC
        Managing JDBC Metadata
        Customizing the JDBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Preparing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Environment
        Overview of the Setup Process
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Creating Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Refreshing the Metadata Repository
        Refresh Security Extracts
        Converting Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne (Non IBM i Platforms Only)
        Setting the UDCDIC Environment Variable (Windows only)
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Installation Prerequisites
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Managing JD Edwards World Metadata
        Enabling JD Edwards World Security
        Enabling Tracing
        Frequently Asked Questions
      Using the Adapter for Lawson
        Adapter for Lawson: Overview
        Configuring the Adapter for Lawson
        Preparing the Lawson Environment
        Managing Lawson Metadata
        Updating Lawson Security Information
      Using the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Preparing the Lotus Notes Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Managing Lotus Notes Metadata
      Using the Adapter for LDAP
        Preparing the LDAP Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for LDAP
        Managing LDAP Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Preparing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Managing Microsoft Access Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Preparing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Managing MetaMatrix Metadata
        Customizing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
        Microsoft SQL Server Compatibility With ODBC
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
      Using the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Server Environment for Millennium
        Configuring the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Millennium Environment
        Managing Millennium Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Millennium Data Source
      Using the Adapter for Model 204
        Preparing the Model 204 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Model 204
        Model 204 Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Model 204 Metadata
        Master Files for Model 204
        Access Files for Model 204
        Customizing the Model 204 Environment
        Using Customized Security Exits
        Adapter Tracing for Model 204
      Using the Adapter for MQSeries
        Preparing the MQSeries Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MQSeries
        Managing MQSeries Metadata
        Customizing the MQSeries Environment
      Using the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Preparing the Mumps Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Managing Mumps Metadata
        Including Records in a Mumps Data Source
      Using the Adapter for MySQL
        Preparing the MySQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MySQL
        Managing MySQL Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the MySQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL
        Preparing the NATURAL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL
        Managing Metadata for NATURAL
        Invoking a NATURAL Program
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Installing NATURAL Support Programs
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Managing NATURAL CICS Transactions Metadata
        NATURAL Data Buffer Processing API
        Invoking a NATURAL CICS Transaction
      Using the Adapter for Netezza
        Preparing the Netezza Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Netezza
        Managing Netezza Metadata
        Customizing the Netezza Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Nucleus
        Preparing the Nucleus Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Nucleus
        Managing Nucleus Metadata
        Customizing the Nucleus Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for ODBC
        Preparing the ODBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for ODBC
        Managing ODBC Metadata
        Customizing the ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Oracle
        Preparing the Oracle Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle
        Managing Oracle Metadata
        Reporting Against an Oracle Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Oracle Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Oracle Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Preparing the Oracle E-Business Suite Environment
        Data Access and Security
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Maintaining Security Rules
      Using the Adapter for parAccel
        Configuring the Adapter for parAccel
        Managing parAccel Metadata
      Using the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Managing PeopleSoft Metadata
        Managing PeopleSoft Secured Data Access
        Managing Connections to PeopleSoft
        Using Administrative Utilities
        Migrating from 7.1x and 7.6.x to 7.7
        Advanced Administrative Topics
      Using the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Preparing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Managing PostgreSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Progress
        Preparing the Progress Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Progress
        Managing Progress Metadata
        Customizing the Progress Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for PSQL
        Preparing the PSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PSQL
        Managing PSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Query/400
        Preparing the Adapter for Query/400 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Query/400
        Managing Query/400 Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Rdb
        Preparing the Rdb Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Rdb
        Managing Rdb Metadata
        Using Multiple Rdb DBMS Files
        Using Multischema Rdb DBMS Files
        Rdb Database Driver Performance
      Using the Adapter for Red Brick
        Preparing the Red Brick Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Red Brick
        Managing Red Brick Metadata
        Customizing the Red Brick Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Remote Servers
        Configuring Remote Servers
        Managing Metadata for Remote Servers
        Executing Stored Procedures
      Using the Adapter for RMS
        Preparing the RMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for RMS
        Managing RMS Metadata
        Manually Describing RMS Files
        Describing Complex RMS Keyed
        Associating an RMS Data Source to a Master File
        Retrieving Data From RMS Files
        Syntax for RMS Master File Attributes
        RMS Attribute Summary
        Read/Write Usage Limitations of the Adapter for RMS
      Using the Adapter for SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (BW)
        Preparing the SAP BW Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP BW
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Creating BEx Queries
        SAP BW Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Managing SAP BW Metadata
        Customization Settings
        Support for BEx Structures
        Producing SAP BW Requests Using SQL
      Using the Adapter for SAP
        Preparing the SAP Environment
        Accessing Multiple SAP Systems
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP
        Post-Configuration Tasks in an SAP Environment
        Managing SAP Metadata
        SAP Table Class Support for an Individual Table
        SAP Support for a Function Module
        SAP Data Type Support
        SAP Open/SQL Support
        Advanced SAP Features
        Setting Up the Report Processing Mode
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Producing SAP Requests
      Using the Adapter for Siebel
        Software Requirements for the Adapter for Siebel
        Preparing the Siebel Environment
        Preparing the Server Environment for Adapter Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for Siebel
        Managing Siebel Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQLBase
        Preparing the SQLBase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQLBase
        Managing SQLBase Metadata
        Customizing the SQLBase Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
        Preparing the SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services
        Managing SQL Server Analysis Services Metadata
        Customizing the SQL Server Analysis Services Environment
        SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Supra
        Preparing the Supra Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Supra
        Supra Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Supra Metadata
        Supra Modules
        Adapter Tracing
      Using the Adapter for Sybase
        Preparing the Sybase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Sybase
        Managing Sybase Metadata
        Reporting Against a Sybase Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Sybase Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Sybase Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Teradata
        Preparing the Teradata Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Teradata
        Managing Teradata Metadata
        Reporting Against a Teradata Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Teradata Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Teradata Macro or Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Transoft
        Preparing the Transoft Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Transoft
        Managing Transoft Metadata
        Customizing the Transoft Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniData
        Preparing the UniData Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniData
        Managing UniData Metadata
        Customizing the UniData Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniVerse
        Preparing the UniVerse Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniVerse
        Managing UniVerse Metadata
        Customizing the UniVerse Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for VSAM
        Preparing the Environment for VSAM
        Configuring the Adapter for VSAM
        Managing VSAM Metadata
        Associating a VSAM Data Source With a Master File
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a VSAM Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
        Maintaining VSAM KSDS Data Sources
        Using VSAM Relative Record Data Set (RRDS) Files
        Reviewing SQL Updates to VSAM Data Sources
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Using the Adapter for XBRL
        What Is XBRL?
        Configuring the Adapter for XBRL
        Reporting Against XBRL Instance Documents
        Reporting on Dimensions
      Using the Adapter for XML
        Preparing the XML Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for XML
        Managing XML Metadata
      XA Support
        XA Transaction Management
        Supported Interfaces
        Implementation
        Vendor Specifics
      Aggregate Awareness Support
        Relational Adapters and Aggregated SQL Queries
        Aggregate Awareness in an RDBMS
      Cluster Join
        Embedded Joins
        Embedded Join Master Files
      Translating COBOL File Descriptions
        Creating Synonyms From COBOL File Descriptions
        Controlling the Translation of a COBOL File Description
      Data Set Compression Exit: ZCOMP
        Invoking the ZCOMP Exit
        What Happens When ZCOMP is LOADED?
      Dynamic Private User Exit
        FOCSAM and the GETPRV User Exit
        Physical Implementation of the GETPRV Exit
        Master File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Access File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Calling Parameters and Work Areas
      Validation for Special Characters and Reserved Words
        Validation for Special Characters
        Validation for Reserved Words
      Launch PDF
  DataMigrator
    iWay DataMigrator User's Guide
      Introduction to DataMigrator
        Data Management and Migration Overview
        What Is DataMigrator?
        DataMigrator Architecture
        DataMigrator Server
        DataMigrator Data Management Console
        Server Web Console
        Designing Data Flows and Process Flows
        Revised Functionality
        Getting Help
        iWay Software on the Web
      Setting Up DataMigrator
        DataMigrator Setup At a Glance
        Remote Server Setup At a Glance
        DataMigrator Setup
        Initiating Server Administration Tasks
        Authorizing DataMigrator Server Usage and Administration
        Managing Application Directories and Configuring the Application Path
        Configuring Data Adapters
        Creating Metadata
        Testing Sample Data and Process Flows
        Performing Server Administration Tasks
        Upgrading DataMigrator From Release 4.3 or 5.1
        Upgrading DataMigrator from Release 5.2, 5.3, 7.1, or 7.6
      Planning a DataMigrator Application
        Designing Your Application
        Using Synonyms for Data Sources and Data Targets
        Reviewing Your Data Sources
        Reviewing Your Data Targets
        Establishing Security for DataMigrator
      Working in the Data Management Console
        Data Management Console Interface
        Navigation Pane
        DataMigrator Workspace
        Text Editor
        Main Menu
        Toolbars
        Text Editor Toolbar
        Console Log
        Setting Flow Properties
        Viewing Properties
        Setting User Preferences
        User Privileges
        License Code
        Configuring National Language Support
        Ending a Data Management Console Session
      Designing a Data Flow
        The Data Flow Interface
        Simple Data Flow at a Glance
        Complex Data Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Data Flow
        Specifying Data Sources
        Creating a Source Transformation in a Data Source Object
        Joining Data Sources
        Adding a SELECT to a Data Flow
        Adding a UNION to a Data Flow
        Selecting Columns
        Testing the SQL Statement
        Specifying Filters in a Data Flow
        Specifying Sorts
        Selecting a Data Target
        Specifying Data Target Options
        Mapping Transformations
        Using Variables in a Flow
        Using Functions
        Column Formats and Mapping
        Setting Properties of a Flow
        Running a Data Flow
        Creating a Direct Load Flow
        Creating a DBMS SQL Flow
        Creating a Quick ETL Copy
      Designing a Process Flow
        Process Flow Methodology
        Process Flow Interface
        Simple Process Flow At a Glance
        Complex Process Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Process Flow
        Adding a Saved Procedure to a Process Flow
        Assigning and Using Variables in a Process Flow
        Maintaining Continuous Processing in a Single Agent
        Executing a Process Flow That Contains Only Stored Procedures
        Adding E-Mail Messages to a Process Flow
        Setting Connection Logic
        Grouping and Controlling Simultaneous Execution of Flows
        Running a Process Flow
        Scheduling a Process Flow
      Tutorial: Creating Data and Process Flows With DataMigrator
        What You Are Going To Do
        Startup and Setup Tasks
        Exercise 1: Creating the Data Flow
        Selecting and Joining Data Sources
        Selecting and Managing Columns
        Adding Data Targets
        Submitting the Data Flow
        Data Flow Review
        Exercise 2: Creating the Process Flow
        Starting the Process Flow
        Adding a Data Flow Object to the Process Flow
        Branching in the Process Flow
        Submitting the Process Flow
      Generating Reports, Viewing the Log File, and Printing Flows
        DataMigrator Log, Statistics, and Summary Flow Reports
        Scheduler Reports
        Impact Analysis Reports on Synonyms, Procedures and Columns
        Working With a Report
        Viewing a Detailed Flow Report and Log File
        Printing a Graphical Representation of a Data or Process Flow
      Optimizing Performance
        Improving Data Extraction Performance
        Using Automatic Passthru
        Improving Data Loading Performance
        Improving Lookup Performance
      Working With Synonyms
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Using Variables in a Synonym
        Variables Attribute Summary
        Use a Variable in a Synonym
        Creating, Enhancing, and Editing Synonyms Using Modeling View
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Viewing Data Lineage for a Column
      Advanced DataMigrator Tips and Techniques
        Overview of Examples
        Creating Sample Data and Metadata
        Horizontal Partitioning with Multi-Table Load
        Using the Decode Function
        Generating a Surrogate Key
        Generating a Surrogate Key Using Slowly Changing Dimensions
        Mapping to a Sequential File of a Specific Format
        Creating and Using Reusable Transformations
        Creating a Target File With Multiple RECTYPEs
        Combining Multiple Sources Rows in a Single Target Row
        Using Lookups to Create Multi-Table Flows Without Joins
        Record Logging
        Using Variables in Data Flows
        Creating a Data Flow Using a Target Based on a Predefined XML Schema
        Loading a Target Table Using the File Listener
        Sending a Target File to a FTP Server
        Loading a Star Schema
        Iterating Through Multiple Tables
      Change Data Capture
        Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture
        Enabling Database for Logging
        CDC Configuration
      DataMigrator Log Statistics and Tables
        Log and Statistics Tables
      Event-Based Scheduling
        Starting Flows With CMRUN
        Starting Flows With CMASAP
        Starting Flows With Your Own API Program
        Starting Flows From FOCUS
        Determining the Status of an Event-Based Flow
      Problems, Errors, and Troubleshooting
        DataMigrator Status Codes and Server Messages
        Server Run-Time Error Codes
        DataMigrator Management Problem Resolution
        Including Run-Time Messages in the ETL Log
        Performing a Trace to Diagnose Server Problems
      Customizing Your Environment
        DataMigrator Parameters
      Source Management
        Overview of Source Management
        Source Control Security Server and Client Setup
        Configuring Source Management and Setting Up Source Control
        Using a Source Control System to Manage Procedures and Synonyms
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Functions Reference
      Functions Overview
        Function Arguments
        Function Categories
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Character Functions
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Number to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
      SQL Character Functions
        CHAR_LENGTH: Finding the Length of a Character String
        CONCAT: Concatenating Two Character Strings
        DIGITS: Converting a Numeric Value to a Character String
        EDIT: Editing a Value According to a Format (SQL)
        LCASE: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        LTRIM: Removing Leading Spaces
        POSITION: Finding the Position of a Substring
        RTRIM: Removing Trailing Spaces
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring From a String Value (SQL)
        TRIM: Removing Leading or Trailing Characters (SQL)
        UCASE: Converting a Character String to Uppercase
        VARGRAPHIC: Converting to Double-byte Character Data
      SQL Date and Time Functions
        CURRENT_DATE: Obtaining the Date
        CURRENT_TIME: Obtaining the Time
        CURRENT_TIMESTAMP: Obtaining the Timestamp (Date/Time)
        DAY: Obtaining the Day of the Month From a Date/Timestamp
        DAYS: Obtaining the Number of Days Since January 1, 1900
        EXTRACT: Obtaining a Datetime Field From Date/Time/Timestamp
        HOUR: Obtaining the Hour From Time/Timestamp
        MICROSECOND: Obtaining Microseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MILLISECOND: Obtaining Milliseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MINUTE: Obtaining the Minute From Time/Timestamp
        MONTH: Obtaining the Month From Date/Timestamp
        SECOND: Obtaining the Second Field From Time/Timestamp
        YEAR: Obtaining the Year From Date/Timestamp
      SQL Data Type Conversion Functions
        CAST: Converting to a Specific Data Type
        CHAR: Converting to a Character String
        DATE: Converting to a Date
        DECIMAL: Converting to Decimal Format
        FLOAT: Converting to Floating Point Format
        INT: Converting to an Integer
        SMALLINT: Converting to a Small Integer
        TIME: Converting to a Time
        TIMESTAMP: Converting to a Timestamp
      SQL Numeric Functions
        ABS: Returning an Absolute Value (SQL)
        LOG: Returning a Logarithm (SQL)
        SQRT Returning a Square Root (SQL)
      SQL Miscellaneous Functions
        COUNTBY: Incrementing Column Values Row by Row
        HEX: Converting to Hexadecimal
        IF: Testing a Condition
        LENGTH: Obtaining the Physical Length of a Data Item
        VALUE: Coalescing Data Values
      SQL Operators
        CASE: SQL Case Operator
        COALESCE: Coalescing Data Values
        NULLIF: NULLIF Operator
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Resource Management
    Resource Analyzer Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Analyzer?
        Resource Analyzer Overview
        Resource Analyzer for Decision Support Analysis
        Uses for Resource Analyzer: Performance Analysis
        Introduction to Data Access and Performance Analysis With Resource Analyzer
        Sample Data Access Questions
        How Resource Analyzer Works
        Software Prerequisites
        Overview of the Web Console
        Overview of Reporting With Resource Analyzer
        Integrating Resource Analyzer With WebFOCUS, Managed Reporting, and ReportCaster
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
        Event Routing
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Resource Analyzer Report Options
        Reports Overview
        Resource Analyzer Reporting
        Resource Analyzer Report Options
        General Reports
        Usage Analysis Reports
        Domain Analysis Report
        Impact Analysis Report
        Performance Analysis Reports
        Network Analysis Reports
        Graph Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Resource Governor Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Governor?
        Resource Governor Overview
        Resource Governor Features
        Resource Governor Operations
        How Resource Governor Works
        Resource Governor Usage Monitoring
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
        Event Routing
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Creating Business Rules
        Creating Business Rules
      Resource Governor Administration
        The Resource Governor Administrator on the Web Console
        Usage Monitoring
        Rule Parameters
        Building Rules
        Governing
      Resource Governor Reports
        Resource Governor Reporting
        Resource Governor Report Options
        General Reports
        Resource Governor Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Business Rule Language (BRL)
        Using Business Rule Language (BRL)
        BRL Factual Information
        BRL Keywords
        Pre-defined Variables
        Internal Functions
        Customized Rule Examples
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
        Using PMF Content on your Mobile Device
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing the Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Adding and Editing Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Designing Dimension Loads
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Designing a Simple Measure Load
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Scheduling Measure Loads
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Creating Measures With the New Measure Wizard
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Combining Security Modes
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration Guide
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Snapshot and Restore
        Manually Creating a BID Portal View for PMF
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing Manage Reporting Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  References
    Stored Procedure Reference
      Introducing Stored Procedures
        Calling a Stored Procedure
        Stored Procedure Libraries
        Setting the Execution Order
      Calling a Program as a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Compiled Program
        Calling a Program With EDARPC
        Calling a Program With CALLPGM or EXEC
        Calling a Program With SQL EX
        Passing Parameters
        Program Communication
      Calling a JAVA Class as a Stored Procedure
        Execute Using CALLJAVA
        Execute Using EX
        Execute Using SQL EX and SQL CPJAVA EX
        Passing Parameters
        Writing a JAVA Class
        JAVA Class Communication
        Compiling and Running a JAVA Program
      Writing a 3GL Compiled Stored Procedure Program
        Program Requirements
        Setting Up the Control Block
        Storing Program Values
        Error Handling
        Issuing the CREATE TABLE Command
      Writing a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Commands Included in a Procedure
        Commands and Processing
        Commenting a Procedure
        Sending a Message to a Client Application
        Controlling Execution
        Using Variables
        Supplying Values for Variables
        Branching
        Looping
        Calling Another Procedure
        The -REMOTE Commands
        Reading From and Writing to an External File
        .EVAL Operator
        Creating Expressions
        Using Functions
        Using Commands Specific to an Operating System
        ON TABLE HOLD
        ON TABLE PCHOLD
      Platform-Specific Commands and Features
        DYNAM Command (MVS)
        Comparison of TSO Commands, JCL, and DYNAM
        DDNAME Translation in User-Written Subroutines: MSODDX
        FILEDEF Command Under VM
        FILEDEF Command Under UNIX, Windows, IBM i, z/OS, and OpenVMS
      Dialogue Manager Quick Reference
        Dialogue Manager Commands
      GENCPGM Usage
        Using GENCPGM
        Subroutine Source Examples and Runtime Testing
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    iWay API Reference V7.1
      Introducing the API
        Introduction to the API
        API Call-Level interface
        Overview of the Data Reference Model
        Introduction to Messaging and Queuing
      API Data Structures
        Data Type Summary
        Data Structures
        Column Information Block
      Interface Overview
        Administrative Method Calls
        Communications Method Calls
        Data Access Method Calls
        Control Flow
      Method Reference
        Using API Methods
        API Method Calls
      Environment Variables
        Assigning and Inspecting Variables
        Global and Local Variables
        Valid Setting Codes and Variables
      Usage Considerations
        SQL Translation
        Using Prepared Statements
        Large Object Support
        National Language Support
        Transaction Processing
        Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs)
        Security Considerations
      Advanced Usage Considerations
        Multithreading
        Multiplexing (Deprecated)
        Semiplexing (User Multiplexing)
        Result Set Management
        Passivating Connection Option
      Platform-Specific Considerations
        Using the API in the OS/400 Environment
        Using the API in the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Using the API in the OS/390 and z/OS Environment
        Using the API in the MVS Environment
        Using the API in the OpenVMS Environment
        Using the API in the UNIX Environment
        Using the API in the VM Environment
      Tracing
        Tracing Within the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Alternative Tracing Methods
        Tracing Within the MVS Environment
        Tracing Within the UNIX, OS/390, z/OS, OpenVMS and OS/400 Environments
        Configuring Tracing
        Activation of Tracing
      Messaging and Queuing
        Asynchronous Database Processing With the API
        API Messaging and Queuing Model
        Transaction Processing Considerations
        Method Calls
        Processing Answer Set Large Objects
      Sample Include, Copybook and Global Files
        C and C++ Header File: EDA.H
        Cobol Copybook: EDACPY
        Visual Basic Globals:EDAGLOB.BAS
      Programming Examples
        Sample Files
        API Programming in C
        API Programming in C++
        API Programming in Visual Basic
        API Programming in Cobol
        API Programming in RPG
      Status Codes
        API Status Codes
        API Status Code Descriptions
      Launch PDF
    iWay Messages and Codes Manual V7.1
      Application Agent Messages
        Messages 001 - 2000
      Supra Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2001 - 2200
      Infoman Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2201 - 2300
      NOMAD Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2401 - 2500
      General SQL Messages
        Messages 2501 - 2700
      DSM Mumps Messages
        Messages 2701 - 2900
      Adabas Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 3001 - 3100
        Messages 4451 - 4600
      General Table Service Messages
        Messages 3201 - 4000
        Messages 36201 - 36600
      IMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4201 - 4300
        Messages 42001 - 42200
      CA/IDMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4301 - 4450
      TOTAL Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4601 - 4800
      MODEL 204 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4801 - 5000
      System 2000 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 11001 - 11400
        Messages 12001 - 12301
        Messages 13501 - 14001
        Messages 50001 - 50101
      XA Transaction Manager Messages
        Messages 11501 - 11600
      CA-DATACOM Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 12001 - 12300
        Messages 13001 - 13100
        Messages 14001 - 14902
        Messages 21101 - 21200
        Messages 50001 - 50100
      General Server Messages
        Messages 13001 - 13400
      SQL Translator Messages
        Messages 14001 - 14200
      DataMigrator (ETL Manager) Messages
        Messages 18001 - 18800
      Fusion Database Messages
        Messages 20001 - 20600
      Server Messages
        Messages 32001 - 32600
      Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 35801 - 36000
      Resource Analyzer/Resource Governor Messages
        Messages 36001 - 36200
      XML Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 42201 - 42456
      WebFOCUS Messages
        Messages 43001 - 43039
      Essbase Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43201 - 43280
      FOCUS Bull Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43501 - 43583
      Application Adapter Server Messages
        Messages 43701 - 43905
      General Parser Messages
        Messages 44001 - 44619
      Connector Error Messages
        Messages 0 - 10 and -1 to -39
      Common User Abend Codes
        Codes 401 - 4091
      XMI/Datacom and Miscellaneous Error Messages
        XMI/Datacom Error Messages
        Messages 1714 - 1850
      COBOL FD Translator Messages
        COBOL FD Translator Messages
      The EDA198 Error Message
        EDA198 Error Message Overview
        Diagnosing EDA198 on VM
        Diagnosing EDA198 on OS/390 and z/OS
      Launch PDF
    iWay SQL Reference V7.1
      Introduction
        SQL Translation Services
        Language Dialect
      SQL Services
        SQL Passthru Services
        Using SQL Passthru
        Enabling SQL Passthru
        Catalog Requirements
        Valid Database Engine Settings
        SQL Translation Services
        SQL Translation Operations
        Dialect Translation
        Data Manipulation Language (DML) Generation
        Join Optimization in DML Generation
      Language Elements
        BNF Conventions
        Characters
        Tokens
        Qualifiers
      SQL Reference
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        SELECT Statement
        Scalar Functions
        Column Functions
        Predicates
        Data Manipulation Commands
        Commit and Rollback
      Tables and Views
        Creating Tables
        Creating Views
      Preparing and Executing SQL Requests
        Preparing SQL Requests
        Executing SQL Requests
      SQL Translate Keywords
        Keywords
      BNF Summary
        Condensed SQL Language Syntax Definition
      Launch PDF
  Technical Memos
    Technical Memo 4505: WebFOCUS HTML Report Accessibility Support
    Technical Memo 4647: Configuring Single Sign-on to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Using Kerberos
    Technical Memo 4690: Saving Report Output in Excel 2007/2010 Format
    Technical Memo 4693: Using the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In
    Technical Memo 4694: WebFOCUS Row-Level and Column-Level Security
    Technical Memo 4695: Using the Magnify Prototype Wizard
    Technical Memo 4697: Nested Applications
    Technical Memo 4699: Using Magnify With The Google Search Engine
    Technical Memo 4700: Accessing an HTML Composer Application on the iPad
    Technical Memo 4701: Multi-Drill on Text Selection
    Technical Memo 4704: WebFOCUS PDF Report Accessibility Support
    Technical Memo 4705: WebFOCUS to Go: Setting Up the Mobile Faves App
    Technical Memo 4707: Accessing an HTML Composer Application on a Mobile Device
    Technical Memo 4709: WebFOCUS Unicode Support
    Technical Memo 4711: PDF Remediation
    Technical Memo 4713: Opening WebFOCUS Generated Presentations in PowerPoint 2010
    Technical Memo 4714: WebFOCUS Mobile: Subscribing to WebFOCUS Reports Using the Mobile Faves App Watch Feature
    Technical Memo 4719: Hiding Report Options (Buttons) in the Managed Reporting Deferred Status Interface
    Technical Memo 4723: Styling an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
    Technical Memo 4727: Customizing Icons for Active Technologies Reports and Dashboards
    Technical Memo 4731: ReportCaster Failover
    Technical Memo 4733: Configuring ReportCaster Group Administration Functions
    Technical Memo 4734: Using Plug-ins for ReportCaster
  Best Practices
    Considerations When Using ReportCaster
    WebFOCUS Security Methodology and Best Practices
  Security and Administration
    WebFOCUS Security and Administration
      WebFOCUS Components and Deployment Options
        WebFOCUS Components
        WebFOCUS Deployment Options
      WebFOCUS Processing Concepts
        Security Planning
        WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script and Configuration Files
        WebFOCUS Profiles
        Java Application Server Files
        Customizing WebFOCUS Request Processing
        WebFOCUS Encryption Techniques
        WebFOCUS User Authentication Options
      WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Accessing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        WebFOCUS Administration Console Functionality
        Securing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        ReportCaster Settings
        Magnify Settings
        WebFOCUS Utilities
        Quick Links
        WebFOCUS Client Upgrade Configuration
      WebFOCUS Client Core Processing Details
        Core Processing of WebFOCUS Requests
        WebFOCUS Client Security
        WebFOCUS Client Administration
        Setting Authentication Credentials
      WebFOCUS Reporting Server Core Processing Details
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings
      Managed Reporting Processing Details
        Managed Reporting Architecture
        Managed Reporting Sign-on Processing
        Dashboard Sign-On Processing
        Managed Reporting Configuration Files
        Managed Reporting Internal Variables
        Managed Reporting Settings in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Deferred Receipt Processing
        Accessing Reports From Outside Managed Reporting
      Configuring Managed Reporting for Trusted or External Authentication
        Benefits of Trusted and External Authentication
        Preparing for Trusted or External Authentication
        Configuring Trusted Authentication
        Configuring External Authentication
        Propagating the Managed Reporting ID to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Configuring Managed Reporting for External Authorization
        Benefits of External Authorization
        Preparing for External Authorization
        Configuring Managed Reporting Administered RDBMS Authorization
        Configuring Externally Administered Authorization
        Advanced Topics
      WebFOCUS Encryption Features
        Configuring WebFOCUS in an SSL Environment
        WebFOCUS Encryption
        Encryption Using the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Encrypting WFS Files Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Encrypting WebFOCUS Data, Procedures, and Data Restriction Rules
      Manipulating WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script Commands
        Copying WebFOCUS Variables Using the WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in
        HTTP Header Variables Available for Script Processing
      WebFOCUS Diagnostics
        Using Diagnostic Tools in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        HTTP Request Headers and JVM Property Information
        Monitoring WebFOCUS Sessions
        Stopping a WebFOCUS Request
        Using WebFOCUS Verification Tools
        Tracing WebFOCUS Processing
        Viewing Security and Header Variables in Use
      Filtering Data
        WebFOCUS Data Security
        WebFOCUS Data Filters
        Filtering Metadata in the WebFOCUS Development Tools
      Localizing WebFOCUS
        Configuring National Language Support
        Customizing the Dynamic Language Switch
        Manually Customizing WebFOCUS Client Messages
      Protecting Your WebFOCUS Installation
        File System Permissions for Windows and UNIX
        Protecting WebFOCUS Variables
        Protecting the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Protecting Managed Reporting Applications
        Protecting WebFOCUS Reporting Server Data Sources
        Disabling Operating System Commands
      Developing Your Own WebFOCUS Plug-in
        Overview of Plug-in Processing
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFEXT Setting
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFTRANSINOUT Setting
      Developing a Managed Reporting Realm Driver Extension
        Introduction
        Where to Go for Information
      Developing a Reporting Server Authentication Exit
        Pre-Verify User ID Exit
      Developing a Dynamic DBA Rule
        WebFOCUS DBA Exit
      Developer Studio Custom Logon Templates
        How Logon Templates Work
        Creating a Template File
      Launch PDF
  7.7.03 New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      Active Technologies Enhancements
        Active Technologies Roadmap
        WebFOCUS Mobile Business Intelligence
        Switching the Chart Engine
      Upload Data Utility Enhancements
        Upload Data Utility Roadmap
        Using Uploaded Data Files in Joins
        New Alpha Variable (AnV) Data Type Supported by Upload Data File Utility
      WebFOCUS InfoAssist Enhancements
        WebFOCUS InfoAssist Roadmap
        Using a Reference Line Dynamically
      Developer Studio Enhancements
        Developer Studio Roadmap
        Controlling Section 508 Support for PDF Output
        Controlling Section 508 Support for HTML Output
        Controlling the Display of Report Output
        Controlling Fields Included in a HOLD or PCHOLD File
        Controlling Output When a TABLE Request Retrieves Zero Records
        Controlling the Behavior of Requests That Use PRINT With Multiple DST Operators
      HTML Composer Enhancements
        HTML Composer Roadmap
        Styling Options for a Tab Control
        Chain Separator and Line Separator
      Report Painter Enhancements
        Report Painter Roadmap
        Report Options Enhancements for PDF
        Align Column Titles (Section 508) Option
        Application Container and Compound Report Size Options
        Automatic Expansion of Sort Levels
      Managed Reporting Enhancements
        Managed Reporting Roadmap
        Using InfoAssist and Power Painter with Reporting Objects in Restricted Domains
        Enabling the Display of the Properties Details Option
        New Alternate Managed Reporting Change Management Extract Utility
      WebFOCUS Client Enhancements
        WebFOCUS Client Roadmap
        Managed Reporting Support for Common Access Card (CAC) Trusted Logon
        Support for AES Encryption
      Reporting Language Enhancements
        Reporting Language Roadmap
        New Accessibility Parameters for HTML and PDF Report Output
        Restricting Access to Values Using WHERE Criteria
        LCWORD3: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        Retrieving the Current Date or Date-Time Value in Any Valid Format
      ReportCaster Enhancements
        ReportCaster Roadmap
        Documentation Enhancements
        Storing FTP Credentials
        Default Check Box for Zip Settings
        Storing the FTP Server Name
        Default FTP/SFTP Location Field in the FTP/SFTP Settings
        Viewing ReportCaster Job Status
      National Language Support Enhancements
        National Language Support Roadmap
        Courier New Unicode Font in Windows
      Server Enhancements
        Server Administration Roadmap
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        Adapter Administration Roadmap
        SQL Adapters
        XML-Based Adapters
        ERP Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Data Migrator Roadmap
        Creating a Quick ETL Copy
        Supporting TEXT (TX) Columns
        Clearing User Preferences
        Sending a Target File to an FTP Server
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Roadmap
        Event Routing
        Collecting Data in the Resource Management Repository
        Non-Archived Log Files
        Data Manipulation Language Monitoring
        Create Repository DDL Only Option
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
      WebFOCUS Release Notes Version 7 Release 7.03
        WebFOCUS
        Managed Reporting
        InfoAssist
        Power Painter
        Report Assistant
        Graphs
        OLAP
        Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Open Portal Services
        Developer Studio
        Active Technologies
        ReportCaster
        Two-Way Email
        Magnify
        Web and Application Servers
        National Language Support (NLS)
        Maintain
        Visual Discovery
      Launch PDF
    Server Release Notes
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: EXL07, EXL2K, EXL97, EXCEL
        Using PowerPoint Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding an HTML TOC to a Report
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Support for Repeated Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, EXL07, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Background Color in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Long and Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        Identifying a Data Source Overview
        Specifying a Data Source Name: FILENAME
        Identifying a Data Source Type: SUFFIX
        Specifying Byte Order
        Providing Descriptive Information for a Data Source: REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        The Field Name: FIELDNAME
        The Field Synonym: ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        Defining a Dimension: WITHIN
        Validating Data: ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        Alternative Report Column Titles: TITLE
        Documenting the Field: DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        Describing a Virtual Field: DEFINE
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX Attribute
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        Specifying an Access Type: The ACCESS Attribute
        Limiting Data Source Access: The RESTRICT Attribute
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Placing Security Information in a Central Master File
        Summary of Security Attributes
        Hiding Restriction Rules: The ENCRYPT Command
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        Creating a New Data Source: The CREATE Command
        Rebuilding a Data Source: The REBUILD Command
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        Changing Data Source Structure: The REORG Subcommand
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned Project
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Allocation for UNIX and z/OS UNIX System Services
        Temporary File Directory Structure for Non-PDS Deployment
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using ISAPI
        Using CGI
        Using a Dynamic Multi-Select Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
        Amper Auto-Prompting
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Web Page With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameter Values Categorized by Functional Area
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS or TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between a Blank and a Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        PUTCOOKI: Submitting a Value to a Browser Cookie
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Reporting Tools
    Creating Reports With Report Assistant
      Introducing Report Assistant
        About Report Assistant
        Accessing Report Assistant
        Layout of Report Assistant
      Designing a Report
        Building Your Report With Report Assistant
        Selecting Report Fields
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Defining Field Characteristics
        Applying Predefined and Cascading StyleSheets
        Customizing Headings and Footings
      Working With Data and Data Sources
        Selecting Records for a Report
        Limiting Data With Filters
        Working With Joins
      Controlling Report Output
        Applying Report Output Options
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running a Report
        Saving a Report
        Editing a Report
      Report Assistant Field Reference
        Report Assistant Field References
        Field Selection Tab
        Report Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab
        Join Options Tab
        Report Options Tab
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reports With Report Painter
      Report Painter Basics
        Report Painter Layout and Toolbars
        Using the Object Inspector
        Viewing Options
        Business Intelligence Features
        Report Painter Limitations
        Field Properties and Report Options Dialog Boxes
      Creating Reports With Report Painter
        Adding a Field as a Report Column
        Displaying Data
        Sorting Data
        Selecting Data
        Universal Concatenation in Report Painter
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Including a Total or Subtotal
        Adding a Page Heading or Footing
        Formatting a Column
        Choosing an Output Format
        Creating a Drill Down Procedure
        Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running and Saving a Report
        Creating Precision Reports
        Using User Defined Functions
      Creating Guided Reports
        Creating a Guided Report
      Styling Reports With Report Painter
        Styling With Fonts, Colors, and Grids
        Styling or Aligning an Individual Item in a Text String
        Aligning Fields and Text in Headings and Footings
        Defining a Conditional Report Style
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Adding an Image
        Using the StyleSheet File Selector
        Generating Format-Specific Style Blocks
        Using Excel Templates
        Using Excel Named Ranges in WebFOCUS Applications
        Generating Overflow Sheets for an Excel 2000 Report
        Using PowerPoint Output Format and PowerPoint Templates
        Setting Up the Report Page
        Creating Mailing Labels
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Temporary Fields With Report Painter
        Creating a Calculated Value With Report Painter
        Creating Expressions for Temporary Fields
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Charts With Graph Tools
      Introduction to Creating Charts
        Graph Overview
        Determining Graphing Objectives
        Creating Custom Graph Templates
        Accessing the Graph Tools from WebFOCUS Environments
      Creating Graphs With Graph Assistant
        Accessing the Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Graph Type and Style
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Working With Joins in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing Your Graph
        Graph Types Tab
        Field Selection Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Field Selection Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Selection Criteria Tab in Graph Assistant of the Managed Reporting Environment
        Join Options Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Properties Tab
      Creating Graphs With Advanced Graph Assistant
        Accessing Advanced Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Selecting Data for a Graph
        Data Display Options
        Filtering Data for a Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs With Advanced Merge
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Working With Joins
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding and Editing Labels in a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing a Graph
        Modifying Graph Properties With Chart Editing Forms
      Customizing Graphs With the Graph Editor
        Choosing a Graph Type
        Applying Color and Line Options in Graphs
        Applying Font Options in Graphs
        Adding Chart Titles
        Creating and Loading GIF Files
        Applying Gradient Fill (All Graph Types)
        Applying Texture Fill (All Graph Types)
        Zooming and Panning in Bar Graphs
        3D Chart Options
        3D Custom Viewing Options
        3D Preset Viewing Options
        Bar, Line, and Area Charts
        Dual Y Options
        Group Axis Options
        Pie Chart Options
        Stock Chart Options
        X1 Axis Options
        Y1 Axis Options
        Y2 Axis Options
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Composer
      Using the HTML Composer
        Uses for the HTML Composer
        Getting Started With the HTML Composer
        Creating a Report Page Layout
      Creating and Using Parameters in the HTML Composer
        Creating Parameter Values
        Using Form Controls to Supply Incoming Parameter Values
        Using Input Controls to Supply Parameter Values
        Supplying Parameter Values to External Reports
        Styling Your Layout
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Laying Out Objects With the HTML Composer
        Controlling the HTML Composer Environment
        Adding ReportCaster Schedule Capability to the HTML Composer
        Running a Managed Reporting Report Deferred From the HTML Composer
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Composer Pages
        Specifying an HTML File as a Load Screen
      Using Templates in the HTML Composer
        Understanding and Using Templates
        Manipulating the Objects of Templates
      Creating Guided Report Forms
        Getting Started With Guided Reports
      Chaining Controls for Dependencies in the HTML Composer
        Automatically Chaining Parameters From the New Parameters Dialog Box
        Chaining Controls on the Parameters Tab
        Applying Conditions to a Chain
        Populating Controls One at a Time
        Using the Chain Separator and Line Separator
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Report Library Integration in the HTML Composer
        Integrating the Report Library
      Creating a Rich Internet Application (RIA) With the HTML Composer
        RIA Overview
        Creating a RIA With the HTML Composer
        Usage Notes and RIA Example
      Using Google Maps in the HTML Composer
        Configuring WebFOCUS for Google Maps
        Creating WebFOCUS Procedures for Google Maps
        Adding a Google Map
        Customizing the Google Map Properties
        Integrating WebFOCUS With Google Maps
        Using the Google Maps Functionality
        JavaScript Functions
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Active Technologies User's Guide
      Active Technologies
        Active Technologies Report Overview
        Available Output Formats for Using Active Technologies
        Product Requirements for Using Active Technologies
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Painter
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Assistant
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
      Using an Active Technologies Report
        Navigating Between Pages
        Filtering and Highlighting Data
        Calculating Data
        Sorting Data
        Using Tab Window Navigation
        Controlling Report Display
        Using Data Visualization
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Using the Grid Tool
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool
        Using the Pivot Tool
        Saving, Exporting, and E-mailing Active Technologies Reports
      Active Technologies for Mobile Web Apps
        Requirements for Mobile Web Apps
        Mobile Web Apps Features
        Standard Gesture Support
        Running an Active Technologies Report on a Mobile Device
        Running an Active Dashboard on a Mobile Device
      Working With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Active Technologies Report Integration With Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Pivot Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Formatting Legend Options for an Active Technologies Chart for Adobe Flash Player
        Customizing Containers and the Dashboard Bar for Active Technologies Reports and Dashboards
        Using Active Technologies for PDF
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Active Technologies Dashboard Overview
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Using Advanced Design Features for Active Technologies Dashboards
        Overview
        Changing the Color of the Border of Charts
        Changing the Background Color of an Individual Tab
        Controlling Active Technologies With Custom JavaScript Code
        Working With the Global Filter Feature
        Managing Active Technologies Form Controls
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Creating Active Technologies Components With WebFOCUS Syntax
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Chart Type Syntax
        Chart Type Syntax Introduction
        FLEX Default Flash Chart Type
        AHTML Default JavaScript Chart Type and FLEX and APDF Flash Chart for Disconnected Mode
        FLEX Flash Chart Type and AHTML JavaScript Chart Type
        Chart Types Mapped to Default Chart Types
        Additional Active Technologies Chart Types Available With CHART-TYPE Syntax
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Document Composer
      Document Composer Overview
        Uses for the Document Composer
        Getting Started With the Document Composer
      Creating Compound Reports
        Creating a Compound Layout Report
        Output Formats for Compound Reports
        Adding a Reporting Object to a Compound Report
      Viewing Pages in the Document Composer
        On Demand Viewing in the Document Composer
        Viewing Simulated or Live Data in the Document Composer
        Moving Pages With the Thumbnails Tab
        Positioning Objects and Keyboard Shortcuts
      Using Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Creating, Saving, and Editing Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Using an Existing Page Master in Another Document
      Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects
        Setting Overflow Options in the Document Composer
        Using Fixed Overflow in the Document Composer
        Using Flowing Overflow in the Document Composer
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in the Document Composer
        Adding Different Headers and Footers on an Overflow Page
      Applying a Table of Contents and Bookmarks
        Adding a Table of Contents Page
        Using Bookmarks in the Document Composer
      Using Drill Through in the Document Composer
        Using Drill Through
      Using Page Layouts in the Document Composer
        Using Page Layouts
      Formatting Text in the Document Composer
        Formatting Text Elements
      Adding Page Numbers to Your Document With the Document Composer
        Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Using Active Technologies Reports to Create Active Dashboards
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Power Painter
      Introducing Power Painter
        About Power Painter
        Configuring the Power Painter License Code
        Accessing Power Painter
        Introducing Power Painter Options and Palettes
        Selecting and Adding a Data Source
        Customizing the Power Painter Environment
      Working With Power Painter Objects
        About Power Painter Objects
        Inserting a Report Object
        Inserting a Graph Object
        Inserting an Image Object
        Inserting a Text Object
        Inserting a Line Object
        Displaying Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
      Using Standard Reporting Functions
        Incorporating Standard Reporting Functions Into a Report
        Importing Values From External Files for WHERE Statements
        Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility
      Controlling Report Overflow and Position of Objects
        About Report Overflow and Object Positioning
        Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter
        Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter
        Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Two-Way Email
      Using Two-Way Email
        Two-Way Email User Steps
        Subscribing for the First Time
        Replying to the Confirmation Message
        Receiving Your Templates for the First Time
        Requesting a Report
        Updating Your Subscription Information
        Responding to an Alert
      Two-Way Email Administration
        Accessing the Administrator Console
        Adding or Deleting a Subscriber
        Maintaining an E-mail Address
        Refreshing User Templates
        Using the Job Log
        Using the Event Log
        Checking the Status of a Job or Canceling a Job
      Developing a Two-Way Email Template
        How Two-Way Email Works
        Creating a Template
        Maintaining a Template
        Sending a Template to Users
        Attaching a Two-Way Email Template to an Alert
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  InfoAssist
    WebFOCUS InfoAssist User's Manual
      Introducing and Launching InfoAssist
        Introducing InfoAssist
        Introducing Personal InfoAssist
        Accessing InfoAssist
        Launching InfoAssist
      Setting InfoAssist User Preferences
        Changing User Preferences
      Using the InfoAssist Application Window
        Components of the InfoAssist Application Window
        Selecting From the Application Main Menu
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Accessing Properties Using the Control Panel
        Understanding the Resources Panel
        Understanding the Results Panel
        Using the Navigation Taskbar
        Using the Status Bar
      Building InfoMini Applications
        Understanding InfoMini Applications
        Creating an InfoMini Application
      Using Slicers
        Creating Slicers
        Filtering With Slicers
      Customizing and Styling Reports
        Excel Output for Reports
        Styling Reports
        Using Custom Reporting Features
        Creating Customized Report Outputs
      Hierarchical Reporting in InfoAssist
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
      Creating and Customizing Charts
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Using Custom Chart Features
        Adding a Page Heading and Page Footing to a Chart
        Designing a Chart in Active Preview
      Using Document View and Building Compound Documents
        Accessing Document View
        Building a Compound Document
        Adding Active Technologies Form Controls to a Compound Document
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    InfoAssist Videos
      Getting Started
      Creating Reports
      Creating Charts
      Using the Home Tab
      Using the Insert Tab
      Using the Format Tab
      Using the Data Tab
      Using the Slicers Tab
      Using the Layout Tab
      Using the View Tab
      Using the Field Tab
      Using the Series Tab
  Managed Reporting
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Deployment Process
        Using Managed Reporting
        Accessing Dashboard
        Customizing Dashboard
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Creating Domains, Groups, Roles, and Users
        Using the Managed Reporting Administration Interface
        Creating Domains
        Creating Groups
        Creating Users
        Creating Roles
        Customizing the Interface
      User Management
        User Management Tree Object
        Managing User Reports
        Promoting a Custom Report to a Standard Report
        Considerations When Copying and Moving Reports
        Managing Standard Report References
        Managing Reporting Object References
      Managing Dashboard
        Managing Public Views
        Managing Group Views
        Managing Library Only Views
        Managing Private Views
        Logging On to Dashboard and View Inheritance
        Managing Users
        Controlling the Idle Limit for Authenticated and Public Users
        Handling Messages
        Hiding Report Types in the Domain Tree
        Hiding the Share Report Option for Finished My Reports
        Displaying Optional Properties in Dashboard
        Creating Standard Reports, Reporting Objects, and Other File in Dashboard
      Creating Public and Group Views
        What Is a Public View?
        What Is a Group View?
        What Is a Library Only Group View?
        Adding a Group or Public View
        Directing Users to a Group View Upon Login
        Adding a Library Only View
        Removing a Public or Group View
        Editing a Public or Group View
        Customizing Dashboard Pages for a Public or Group View
        Copying a Public or Group View
        Refreshing the Views List
        Exiting the Public Views or Group Views Window
      Customizing Dashboard
        Before You Begin Customizing Dashboard
        Opening the View Builder
        Selecting a Template
        Selecting Custom Colors
        Positioning the Domain Tree, Role Tree, and Banner
        Inserting a Logo
        Customizing the Banner
        Creating a Custom Toolbar
        Adding a Message of the Day
        Customizing the Logoff Window
        Changing the ReportCaster Scheduling Tool
        Changing the ReportCaster Interface
        Resetting the View Builder
        Globally Enabling Reporting Tools in Dashboard
        Saving Selections and Exiting a Customization
        Exiting the View Builder
      Creating a Role Tree
        What Is a Role Tree?
        Adding a Role Tree
        Editing a Role Tree
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Creating Filters For Standard Reports
        Executing a Domain Profile in Dashboard
        Selecting Content Layout
      Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Running the Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility Output Files
        Master Files and Sample Procedure
        Reporting From Extract Files
        Property Flags
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Change Management Load Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      Additional Administration Topics
        Selecting the Tool Type for ReportCaster
        Debugging
        Setting Up Traces for Managed Reporting User Requests
        Repository File Name Processing
        Obtaining a List of Available Master Files
      Application Integration Topics
        Invoking the Deferred Report Status Interface Directly
        Managed Reporting Browser Window Feature
        Using Launch Pages Outside the Default Repository
      Managing Deferred Tickets
        Managing Deferred Workload
        Managing the Deferred Ticket Cleanup Utility
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Developer for Windows
        Using Managed Reporting
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Working With Domains
        Using Domains in Managed Reporting
        Guidelines for Copy or Cut and Paste in Domains
        Setting Domain Properties
        Customizing Managed Reporting
      Working With Standard Reports
        Working With Standard Reports
        Creating and Editing Standard Reports
        Applying Predefined Style Sheets to a Report
        Adding a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
        Importing Procedures and Other Files Into Managed Reporting
        Ignoring Code in a Procedure (FOCEXEC)
        Coding Considerations for Saved Parameter Reports
        Execution of a Managed Reporting Procedure Using –INCLUDE or EX
        Execution of a Server Procedure
        Drilling Down From a MR Procedure to a Procedure on the Server
        Incorporating Images Into Managed Reporting Requests
        Launching a Self-Service Application of Report Assistant
      Creating Reporting Objects
        Reporting Objects
        Running a Reporting Object From Domain Builder
        Components of a Reporting Object
        Other Component
        Creating and Customizing a Join in Developer Studio
        Creating and Customizing a Join in the Browser
        Virtual Fields (DEFINE Statements)
        Filters
        Selection Criteria (WHERE Statements)
        Creating an Application Object
        Report Component
        Graph Component
      Creating Launch Pages and Publishing Reports
        Working With Launch Pages
        Creating Launch Pages With the Publish Utility
        Working With Amper Auto-Prompting
        Working With the HTML Composer
      Data Servers Feature
        Working With Data Servers
        Working With Server Applications
        Working With Application Files
        Create Synonym Behavior
        Searching Domains for Master Files and Fields With the Impact Analysis Tool
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      ReportCaster Alerts
        Alert Reporting Overview
        Components of an Alert
        Creating an Alert
        Creating Joins and Defines With the Text Editor
        Checking Alerts
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Features
        Managed Reporting Interface
      Using Dashboard
        Opening Dashboard
        Required Browser Settings
        Recommended Browser Settings
        Personalizing Your Dashboard
        Dashboard Layout
        Selecting a Domain
        Using Domain Tree Items
        Creating Reports in Dashboard
        Stopping Requests in Dashboard
        PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard
        Running Deferred Reports
        Using Role Trees
        Viewing Content Blocks
        Using Banner Hyperlinks
        Searching Domains
        Creating a Favorites List
        Mobile Favorites
        Viewing Reports in the Report Library
        Viewing Recently Run Reports
        Setting User Options
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Selecting Content Layout
      Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Deferred Report Status Interface Features
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Using the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Using the Viewer Control Panel
        Creating On-Demand Paging Reports
      Using Java Applet Managed Reporting
        Accessing Managed Reporting
        Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting
        Running a Report
        Sharing a Report
        Creating a Report or Graph
        Creating Procedures With the Text Editor
        Editing a My Report
        Editing a Custom Report and its Properties
        Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE
        Filtering Data
        Searching a Domain
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Administration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Component Pack and Third-Party Applications
        Benefits of Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
      Using WebFOCUS Portal Components
        WebFOCUS Components Overview
        JVM Support Information
        Optional Portal Parameters
        Disabling WebFOCUS Tools
        WebFOCUS Component URLs
        Portlet Parameters
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Report Components
      Configuring JSR 168 Portal Environments
        Understanding the JSR 168 Portlet Specification
        Installing and Deploying WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Gateway
        Configuring JSR 168 Portlet Parameters
        Using the Output Portlet
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Vignette Application Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Sun ONE Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the JBoss Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA AquaLogic Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Apache Jetspeed Portal
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2007
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2010
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the IBM WebSphere Portal Server Version 6.1
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Oracle Portal Server (Oracle 10g)
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Defining a WebFOCUS Application Under the Oracle Application Server
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Registering the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Testing the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Computer Associates CleverPath Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA WebLogic Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing WebFOCUS Portlets
        Adding WebFOCUS Portlets to the BEA WebLogic Portal
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Pagelets for the PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Adding the URLContentRetriever.jar File to PeopleSoft
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Pagelets
        Using WebFOCUS Pagelets
      Installing Certified NetWeaver iViews for the SAP Enterprise Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing the WebFOCUS Open Portal Gateway on the SAP Application Server
        Configuring User Mapping
        Importing .PAR Files
        Configuring WebFOCUS iViews
        Importing the WEBFOCUSOPS.EPA File
        Removing Applications Using the Archive Remover
        Using the Output Portlet
        Using WebFOCUS iViews
      Installing WebFOCUS Categories for the TIBCO PortalBuilder
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Categories
        Configuring the Report Category
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Developer Studio
    Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        Additional WebFOCUS Products
        WebFOCUS Architecture
        Developer Studio Architecture
        Developer Studio Directory Structure
        Developer Studio Explorer Layout
        Project-Based and Remote Development Environments
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Logging Off Areas in WebFOCUS Environments
        Developer Studio Data Access and Descriptions
      Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Development Environment
        Development Tools
      Setting Preferences
        General Tab
        Reporting Tab
        Explorer Tab
        Source Control Tab
        External Tools Tab
        Title Format Tab
      Tutorial: Creating an OLAP-enabled Report in Developer Studio
        OLAP Tutorial Overview
        Before You Begin
        Creating the OLAP Project
        Creating the OLAP Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With a Procedural Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With the CENTORD Data Source
        Manipulating Report Output
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reporting Applications With Developer Studio
      Creating a Reporting Application
        What Is a Reporting Application?
        Project-based and Remote Development Environments
        Creating a Project
        Organizing a Project
        Using Workspace Files
        Adding a Master File to a Project
        Uploading Data Files
        Using Uploaded Data Files in Joins
        Viewing and Modifying Project Properties
        Managing a Project With Source Control
        Securing a Project
        Removing a Project
      Partitioning and Deploying Project Files
        Deployment Basics
        Summary of Steps
        Step 1: Identify the Target Servers
        Step 2: Create a Deployment Scenario
        Step 3: Partition the Project Files
        Step 4: Deploy the Project Files
        Configuring the Target Servers (Optional)
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
      Joining and Merging Data Sources
        What Is a Join?
        Types of Joins
        Joining Different Kinds of Data Sources
        Creating a Join With Graphical Tools
        Creating Multi-Field Joins
        Using Conditional Joins
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Customizing a Join
        Working With Joins
        Reporting With a Join
        Saving a Join
        Merging Data Sources Using the Match Wizard
      Hierarchical Reporting
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Manipulating Aggregated Data in an Essbase or SAP BW Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
        Showing Hierarchies in the HTML Composer
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
      Creating a Reporting Procedure
        Selecting a Creation Tool
        Incorporating a Procedure Into an Application
        Copying a Procedure
        Creating a Procedure Component
        Working With a Component
        Using the SQL Report Wizard
        Assigning a Logical Name With the Allocation Wizard
        Calling a Procedure From the Current One
        Using the Engine Tool
        Managing Flow of Control
        Working With a Full Procedure
        Running a Procedure
        Canceling a Running Procedure
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs
        Viewing Reports in Your Browser
        Drilling Down for Details
        Navigating Through Multi-Page Web Reports
        Controlling Viewer Display Options
        Using the Clipboard
        Printing Report and Graph Output
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
        Troubleshooting OLAP Reports
      Saving and Reusing Report Output
        Types of Output Files
        Creating Output Files
        Output File Formats
        Save Report Output as a Native Temporary Table In Report Painter
        Saving Reports as HTML Output
        Saving Reports as Print Display Output: PDF, PS
        Saving Reports Using Excel Formats
      Creating an Update Application With Update Assist
        Update Assist (Step 1 of 6): Selecting Segments to Update
        Update Assist (Step 2 of 6): Selecting Fields to Update
        Update Assist (Step 3 of 6): Selecting Navigation Options
        Update Assist (Step 4 of 6): Selecting a Color Scheme
        Update Assist (Step 5 of 6): Selecting Output File Options
        Update Assist (Step 6 of 6): Confirming Selections
        About Your Update Assist Application
        Editing Your Update Assist Application
        Calling an Update Assist Procedure From a WebFOCUS Report
        Usage Notes
      Editing Application Components as Text in Developer Studio
        Text Editor
        The Other Component
        The Comment Component
        Creating a Text File or a Procedure Component as Text
        Opening Application Components as Text
        Finding and Replacing Text
        Changing Text Color and Case Size
        Adding Headings and Footings
        Using Bookmarks to Move Within a File
        Running a Procedure From the Editor
        Opening a Graphical Tool From the Text Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With Graphical Tools
      Describing and Accessing Data Overview
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        How Applications Interpret Data
        Obtaining a Synonym
        What You Can Do With a Synonym
        Ways to Enhance a Synonym
        How an Application Uses a Synonym
        Alternative Tools on the Reporting Server Console
      Accessing Data and Creating Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters and Remote Servers in Developer Studio
        Creating Synonyms in Developer Studio
        Defining a Remote Server in the WebFOCUS Client Communication File
      Using the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Setting Up Multilingual Titles and Descriptions
        Enhancing Synonyms Using the Modeling View
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Defining Dimensions for OLAP Analysis
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
        Creating Business Views
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Creating Filters in a Synonym
        Adding Computed Fields (COMPUTE) in a Synonym
        Storing the Number of Repetitions of a Repeating Field in a Virtual Field
        Defining Attributes and Creating Expressions for Custom Fields
        Adding Group Fields in a Synonym
        Applying Database Administrator Security
      Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Analyzing Procedures With the Impact Analysis Tool
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Adding Data and Rebuilding FOCUS Data Sources
        Creating a FOCUS Data Source
        Rebuilding a Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Financial Reports
      Financial Reporting and Analysis for the Enterprise
        WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Benefits
        Enterprise Financial Reporting: A Critical Cornerstone of Business
        Financial Reporting Within and Beyond an Organization
        Financial Reporting and Government Regulations
        The WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Platform
        WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
        Learning More About the WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
      Creating Reports With Financial Report Painter
        Financial Report Painter Overview
        Starting a Financial Report
        Designing Your Financial Report
        Running a Financial Report
        Retrieving FOR Field Values From a Data Source
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Supplying Data Directly
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Text
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Formatting Financial Reports
        Adding, Inserting, and Deleting Rows
        Editing Row Types and Properties
        Adding and Deleting Columns
      Creating a Financial Report Using the Financial Report Painter
        Create a Project
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Tutorial: Creating an Income Statement Using Unconsolidated Data
        Tutorial Overview
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Join the Data Sources
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Describing Data for an FML Hierarchy
        Data Requirements for FML Hierarchies
        Coding an FML Hierarchy in a Text Editor
        Defining an FML Hierarchy in the Synonym Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Magnify
    Magnify End User Manual
      Introducing Magnify
        About Magnify
        Accessing Magnify
      Conducting a Search With Magnify
        Searching With Magnify
        Navigating Magnify Search Results
        Viewing Content Through Additional Links
        Accessing Magnify on Mobile Devices
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Developer's Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Overview of Implementing Magnify
        Planning for Enterprise Search
        About Configuring Magnify
        Magnify Search Configuration Example
      Configuring an iWay Channel
        Configuring An iWay Channel
        Configure a Listener
        Create an Inlet
        Create the Emitter
        Create an Outlet
        Create a Channel
        Deploy a Channel
        Verifying the Emitter Destination Directory
      Creating the Indexing Process Flow
        About the Transaction Indexing Process Flow
        Storing Metadata Values
        Creating the HTML Document
        Feed HTML Document to the Search Engine
        Completing the Process Flow
        Validating and Testing the Process Flow
        Publishing the Process Flow
        Process Flow Considerations
      Reconfiguring and Deploying the iWay Channel
        About Reconfiguring the iWay Channel
        Creating the New Route
        Modifying the Original Channel
        Building and Deploying the Modified Channel
        Backing Up and Importing iWay Workflows
      Customizing the Magnify User Interface
        Customization Overview
        Adding Date Information to Magnify Search Results
      Indexing Using FORMAT MAGNIFY Command
        FORMAT MAGNIFY
      Magnify Protocols
        Magnify Protocols for Indexing Documents
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Security and Administration
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Configuring the Search Engine
        Configuring the Search Engine
      Configuring Magnify Collections
        Defining Collections
      Using the Security Features
        About Magnify Security
        Enabling Security in Magnify With Lucene
        Enabling Collection-Level Security
      Magnify Diagnostics
        Magnify Diagnostics Pages
        Indexing Large Files
        Magnify Request Parameters
        Verifying Documents in the Lucene Index
        Retrieving Index Library Properties
        Retrieving Field Values From the Lucene Index
        Online Lucene Resources
      Magnify Demo Search Application
        Century Electronics Sample Search Application
        Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Installation
        Configuring a Port Number
        Feeding Content to Magnify
        Additional Features
        Collection Security
        Multiple Categorizations
        Process Flow
        Deleting Extraneous Files
        Previous Versions
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Maintain
    Maintain Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS Maintain
        Road Map: Where Should You Go?
        What Is WebFOCUS Maintain?
        Overview of Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      WebFOCUS Maintain Basic Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating a Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Explorer
        Adding a Data Source to Your Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Project Explorer
        Designing a Form
        Saving Your Work
        Selecting a Starting Object
        Running Your Project Locally
        Using Radio Buttons
        Giving Your Form a New Title
        Writing Data to the Data Source
        Adding a Form to Display Data From a Data Source
        Using the HTML Overflow Property
        Adding Form Navigation Buttons
        Deploying Your Project to a Different WebFOCUS Server
        Adding Images to Your Project
        What's Next?
      WebFOCUS Maintain Advanced Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating an Update Form
        Updating a Record in a Data Source
        Using Scripts for User Feedback
        Updating a Data Source Using a Read/Write Grid
        Creating a Welcome Screen Using the Menu Control
        Adding a WebFOCUS Report to Your Application
        Using a JavaScript Function to Define an E-mail Link
        Adding a Pop-up Calendar
        Getting Help in the Maintain Development Environment
      WebFOCUS Maintain Concepts
        Set-based Processing
        Controlling a Procedure's Flow
        Executing Other Maintain Procedures
        Forms and Event-driven Processing
        Reading From a Data Source
        Writing to a Data Source
        Transaction Processing
        Classes and Objects
      WebFOCUS Maintain Sample Data Sources
        Fannames Data Source
        Users Data Source
        Contact Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project
        Opening WebFOCUS Maintain
        Applications and Projects
        What Are the Building Blocks of a WebFOCUS Maintain Project?
        Editing Projects in the Maintain Development Environment
        Viewing System Messages in the Output Window
        Searching for Text in Your Project
        Editing Project Components as Text
        Incorporating Data Sources Into Your Project
        Using the Resource Wizard
        Team Development
      Developing Procedures
        Overview
        Specifying Data Sources for Your Procedure
        Using Functions in Procedures
        Using Variables in Procedures
        Using Data Source Stacks in Procedures
        Using the Type Wizard
        Using Import Modules
        Testing Procedures With the Run Procedure Option
      Using the Form Editor
        Form Editor Overview
        Layout of the Form Editor
        Using the Controls Palette
        Using the Property Sheet
        Using Drawing Aids
        Selecting Multiple Controls
        Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Duplicating Controls
        Resizing Controls
        Aligning Controls
        Spacing Controls
        Grouping Controls
        Changing the Order of Controls
        Undoing and Redoing Actions
        Layering Controls
      Developing and Using Forms
        Before You Begin Designing Forms
        Creating and Managing Forms
        Copying a Form Within a Procedure
        Changing Form Properties
        Using Cascading Style Sheets
        Dynamically Manipulating Forms at Run Time
        How WebFOCUS Maintain Saves Your Forms
        Using a Driver Procedure
      Defining Events and Event Handlers
        Using the Event Handler Editor
        Events
        Using a Maintain Function as an Event Handler
        Using Script Functions as Event Handlers
        Using Web Links as Event Handlers
      Developing and Using Controls
        Which Control Should You Use?
        Using Buttons
        Using Check Boxes
        Using Combo Boxes and List Boxes
        Using Edit Boxes and Multi-Edit Boxes
        Using Frames
        Using Grids and HTML Tables
        Using Group Boxes
        Using HTML Objects
        Using Images
        Using Java Applets
        Using Lines
        Using Menus
        Using Radio Buttons
        Using Text
        Using ActiveX Controls
        Dynamically Manipulating Controls at Run Time
        Defining Colors for Your Form and Controls
        Assigning Help to Your Forms and Controls
        Assigning Tab Order to Controls
      Form and Control Properties Reference
        (GroupCode) Property
        (Name) Property
        Alignment Property
        Alt Property
        AlternateRowColor Property
        BackColor Property
        BackColorOver Property
        BackgroundImage Property
        Border Property
        BorderColor Property
        BorderText Property
        BorderWidth Property
        Bottom Property
        Calendar Property
        CaseStyle Property
        Checked Property
        Columns Property
        Content Property
        CSSName Property
        CursorPointer Property
        DefaultButton Property
        Enabled Property
        FixedColumns Property
        Font Property
        ForeColor Property
        ForeColorOver Property
        GridLines Property
        HeaderBackColor Property
        HeaderFont Property
        HeaderForeColor Property
        Headers Property
        Height Property
        Help Property
        Hyperlink Property
        IBIValidation Property
        Image Property
        ImageDown Property
        ImageOver Property
        ItemBorder Property
        Layer Property
        Left Property
        ListItems Property
        Map Property
        MaximizeBox and MinimizeBox Properties
        MultiSelection Property
        OnLoad Property
        Orientation Property
        Overflow Property
        Password Property
        PenWidth Property
        ReadOnly Property
        Right Property
        Rows Property
        ScrollBars Property
        ScrollHeight and ScrollWidth Properties
        Scrolling Property
        SelectedItem/SelectedItems Property
        Sizeable Property
        Source Property
        Stretched Property
        Tabstop Property
        Text Property
        TextOnLeft Property
        Title Property
        ToolTipText Property
        Top Property
        Visible Property
        Width Property
        ZIndex Property
      Executing Other Procedures
        The Advantages of Modularizing Source Code
        Using the CALL and EXEC Commands
        Executing a Procedure on Another Server: AT Server
        Keeping or Terminating the Server Session: KEEP/DROP
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain Procedures: FROM...INTO
        Passing Parameters Between a Maintain Procedure and a WebFOCUS Procedure: FROM ... INTO
        Optimizing Performance: Data Continuity and Memory Management
      Using WebFOCUS Procedures in Your Application
        What Can WebFOCUS Procedures Do?
        Incorporating WebFOCUS Procedures Into Your Project
        Executing WebFOCUS Procedures From Maintain Procedures
        Using WebFOCUS Report Output in Maintain
        Executing Maintain Procedures From WebFOCUS Report Procedures
        Using Variable Binding From WebFOCUS Reports
      Developing Classes and Objects
        What Are Classes and Objects?
        Defining Classes
        Reusing Classes: Class Libraries
        Declaring Objects
      Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Compiling WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures
        Executing WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures From Outside the Maintain Development Environment
        Security and Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Customizing Key Functions and JavaScript for WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Closing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Developing an Application for a Shared Application Server
      Designing Applications for Scalability and Performance
        Application Partitioning
        Presentation Logic
        Database Logic
        Miscellaneous Business Logic
        EXEC Command, CALL Command, and System Resources
        Use When Appropriate
        Using the Best Parts
        Persistence Management
        Development Standards
        Tips for Designing Applications
      Ensuring Transaction Integrity
        Transaction Integrity Overview
        Why Is Transaction Integrity Important?
        Defining a Transaction
        Evaluating Whether a Transaction Was Successful
        Concurrent Transaction Processing
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for DB2 Data Sources
      Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        WebFOCUS Maintain Application Debugger
        Type on EDAPRINT
        Maintain Statement Trace
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        Additional Trace Settings
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Deploying Legacy Applications to the Web
        What Are the Differences Between Windows-Deployed and Web-Deployed Applications?
        Legacy Form Properties and Behavior
        Upgrading Legacy Windows Applications
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Maintain Language Reference
      Language Rules Reference
        Case Sensitivity
        Specifying Names
        Reserved Words
        What Can You Include in a Procedure?
        Multi-line Commands
        Terminating a Command's Syntax
        Adding Comments
      Expressions Reference
        Types of Expressions You Can Write
        Writing Numeric Expressions
        Writing Date Expressions
        Writing Date-Time Expressions
        Writing Character Expressions
        Writing Logical Expressions
        Writing Conditional Expressions
        Handling Null Values in Expressions
      Command Reference
        Language Summary
        BEGIN
        CALL
        CASE
        COMMIT
        COMPUTE
        COPY
        DECLARE
        DECRYPT
        DELETE
        DESCRIBE
        ENCRYPT / DECRYPT
        END
        EXEC
        FocCount
        FocCurrent
        FocError
        FocErrorRow
        FocFetch
        FocIndex
        FocMsg
        GOTO
        IF
        INCLUDE
        INFER
        MAINTAIN
        MATCH
        MNTCON CDN_FEXINPUT
        MNTCON COMPILE
        MNTCON EX
        MNTCON EXIT_WARNING
        MNTCON LOADIMAGE
        MNTCON MATCH_CASE
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        MNTCON RADIO_BUTTON_EMIT_TEXT
        MNTCON REMOTESTYLE
        MNTCON RUN
        MNTCON RUNIMAGE
        MODULE
        NEXT
        ON MATCH
        ON NEXT
        ON NOMATCH
        ON NONEXT
        PERFORM
        REPEAT
        REPOSITION
        REVISE
        ROLLBACK
        SAY
        SET
        STACK CLEAR
        STACK SORT
        SYS_MGR
        SYS_MGR.DBMS_ERRORCODE
        SYS_MGR.ENGINE
        SYS_MGR.FOCSET
        SYS_MGR.GET_INPUTPARAMS_COUNT
        SYS_MGR.GET_NAMEPARM
        SYS_MGR.GET_POSITIONPARM
        SYS_MGR.PRE_MATCH
        TYPE
        UPDATE
        Winform
      WebFOCUS Maintain Error Messages
        Error Message Listings
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster Administration
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Processing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Features
      Enabling User Capabilities
        Accessing the ReportCaster User Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      ReportCaster Security
        ReportCaster Credentials
        ReportCaster Security Settings
        Additional User IDs for Use With ReportCaster
        Configuring ReportCaster With External Authentication
        ReportCaster Remote Authentication
        Include Windows Domain Name With User ID for IWA
        File System Permissions
        Optional Encryption Providers for ReportCaster
      Configuring ReportCaster
        About Configuring ReportCaster
        Distribution Servers Settings
        Repository Settings
        Security Settings
        General Preferences Settings
        Email Settings
        FTP/SFTP Settings
        Zip Settings
        Other Schedule Defaults
        Log Settings
        Traces Settings
        Code Page Settings
        LDAP Settings
        Data Servers Settings
        Two-Way Email Settings
        Report Library Settings
        Managed Reporting Settings
        Library Search Settings
        Customizing ReportCaster Plug-ins
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling ReportCaster Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        ReportCaster Repository Creation Tracing
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Tracing for ReportCaster
        Using the Java Console
      ReportCaster Administrative Tasks
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Globally Updating Repository Field Values
      ReportCaster Repository Tables and Reports
        About Repository Reports
        ReportCaster Repository Tables
      Loading User IDs Into the ReportCaster Repository
        Using the Synchronize External Users Utility
        Using SQL Statements to Load ReportCaster User IDs and Groups
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Development and Library Content
      Introducing ReportCaster
        Overview of ReportCaster
        The ReportCaster Development Interface
        ReportCaster Library Content
        Considerations When Using ReportCaster
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Administration Applet Version
      Accessing ReportCaster and Enabling User Capabilities in the Applet
        Security Warning
        Accessing the ReportCaster Applet
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      Creating a Schedule Using the ReportCaster Applet
        Overview
        Schedule Tab
        Creating a Task
        Specifying Distribution Options
        Specifying Optional and Notification Settings
      Maintaining Schedules in the ReportCaster Applet Interface
        Maintaining a Schedule
        Schedule Blackout Dates
      Tracking a Schedule in the Applet Interface
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Troubleshooting ReportCaster Log Reports
      Working With Distribution Lists in the ReportCaster Applet
        Distribution List Overview
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      Using the ReportCaster Console
        Accessing the ReportCaster Console
        ReportCaster Console Options
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        Viewing, Running, and Deleting a Scheduled Job
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Using the Log Option to View Information About a Distributed Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
        Globally Replacing Field Values in the ReportCaster Repository
        Logging Off the ReportCaster Console
        Accessing the Online Help File
      Using the Report Library From the Applet
        Using the Report Library
        Managing Users and Groups Using the Library Access List Interface
        Accessing Library Content
        Viewing Library Reports
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill-Through Support
        Library Management
      Using Change Management
        About ReportCaster Change Management
      Configuring ReportCaster Using the Applet Tool
        About the ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool
        General Configuration Settings in the Applet
        LDAP Settings
        Data Server Settings in the Applet
        Two-Way Email Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Settings in the Applet
        Managed Reporting Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Integration With the Google Search Engine
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster HTML User Interface Manual
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Using the Scheduling Wizard
        Overview
        Schedule Options
        Report Information
        Report Parameters
        Distribution Options in the Scheduling Wizard
        Priority, Notification, and Zip File Options
        Running a Schedule Without Saving It
      Working With Distribution Lists in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Distribution or Address Book List Interface
        Creating a Distribution or Address Book List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      Maintaining a Schedule Using the HTML User Interface
        About the Schedules Interface
        Editing a Schedule in the HTML User Interface
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Schedule Blackout Dates
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Using the Report Library from the HTML Interface
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Report Library
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill Through Support
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
      ReportCaster API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Troubleshooting API Samples
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        User Samples
        Credential Authentication
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Tables Accessed by the Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        ReportCaster Repository Tables Accessed by the Servlets
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Enable
    WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex 4.x User's Guide
      Introduction
        RIA Technologies
        About WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex
      Prerequisites and Download Instructions
        Software Prerequisites
        Downloading WebFOCUS Enable From Information Builders
        Compatibility Features
        IBI NameSpace: Prefix for WebFOCUS Enable Components
      Custom Components and Properties
        About Components and Properties
        Component/Property Tables
        Customizing Component Properties
      Developing a WebFOCUS Enable Application
        Sample Application
        Application Basics
        Creating a Flex Project
        Creating an Input File in WebFOCUS Developer Studio
        Creating an Application Canvas
        Creating a Title for the Dashboard
        Adding Custom Animation
        Logically Organizing Content With the TabNavigator
        Binding a Procedure to the ibiDataGrid Using Custom Components
        Creating an Aggregated Grid Using Existing ibiDataGrid Data
        Creating a Filter
        Using the ibiDataGrid to Filter Other Components
        Creating a Pie Chart and Column Chart
        Adding a Tree Control, Combo Box, and Slider
        Compiling SWF Files
        Turning Off the Show Message Window Context Menu
      Creating Other Charts
        Preparing the Layout and Adding the Charts
        Understanding Additional Chart Types
      Deploying an Application
        Deploying an Application in Managed Reporting Business Intelligence Dashboard
      Customizing WebFOCUS Enable Applications
        ibiDataGrid Customization Options
        Using Filters
        Customizing IBI Chart Components
        Using IBI Custom Event Listeners and Functions
      Using the WebFOCUS Enable API
        Initializing an Application
        Creating an Aggregated DataGrid
        Saggregate
        Filtering Details of the DataGrid From the List Box
        Filtering an Aggregated DataGrid From the List Box
        Creating a Pie Chart
      IBI Component for Google Maps API for Flash
        ibiMap001 Features
      Building a Basic Dashboard
        Building the Dashboard
      Adding Styles to a Dashboard
        Creating Flex Style Codes
        Applying Styles to the ibiDataGrid
        Applying Styles to ibiColumnChart and ibiPieChart
        Creating Flex Functions
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex Release Notes
      WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex Release Notes
        Release Notes Version 2.0.1
        Release Notes Version 2.0.0
        Launch PDF
  Visual Discovery
    Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components With Developer Studio
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Key Features
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server (Thin Client)
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Developing an Analytic Dashboard
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Distributing a Visual Discovery File With ReportCaster
        Working With Visual Discovery Components on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
      Tutorial: Building a Visual Discovery Analytic Dashboard
        Before You Begin
        Building an Analytic Dashboard With Visual Discovery Components
      Deploying Visual Discovery Applications
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for Server (Thin Client)
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Visualization Components: Descriptions and Usage
        What Is a Glyph?
        Bar Charts
        Line Charts
        Pie Charts
        Histograms
        Counts
        Data Constellations
        Data Constellation Maps
        Data Sheets
        Multiscapes
        Paraboxes
        Scatter Plots
        Summary Sheets
        Time Tables
        Perspectives
      Inserting Chart Controls Into a Visual Discovery Dashboard
        Building an Application With Advanced Chart Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Graphics
    WebFOCUS Graphics
      Graphing Basics
        What Is Scalable Vector Graphics?
        Viewing Scalable Vector Graphics
        Portable Network Graphics
        Virtual Coordinate System
        Implementing API Calls
      Using WebFOCUS Graphics
        How Properties and Methods Work
        The GraphType Property
        How Graphs Are Imaged
        Chart Layout Manager
        Graph-Wide Parameters
        Graph Frame Attributes
        Axis Attributes
        Grid Lines
        Curve Fit Lines
        Java 2D Line Objects
        Risers and Markers
        Legends
        Labels and Titles
        Data Text
        Customizing Data Text
        Formatting Numbers
        Formatting Text Objects
        Java 2D Text Objects
        Autofitting
        Graph-Specific Properties and Methods
        Colors and Shading
        Textures and Gradients
        Panning, Rotating, and Scaling
        Graph Editing Characteristics
        Annotations
        Drill-Down and URLs
        Multiple Drill-Down From Graph
        Alternate Formatting
        Beveled Borders
        Reference Lines
      Using Data in a Graph
        Graph Titles and Labels
        Data Scrolling and Zooming
        How Missing Data Is Handled
        Data Requirements for Different Graph Types
      Properties
        Properties for Graphs
        AdjustAutoScaleForRefLines
        AlignMultiYBars
        AltFmtFrameSeparator
        AltFmtFrameNumColors
        Autoshading
        AutoshadingWalls
        AxisTextAutofitMax
        AxisTextAutofitMin
        AxisTextAutofitMode
        AxisTextAutofitPercent
        BiDirectional
        BoxPlotType
        Cascade
        ColorMode
        ConnectLineMarkers
        ConnectParetoBars
        ConnectScatterMarkers
        CubeFocusFactor
        CubeIsometricProjection
        CubeLightSourceX
        CubeLightSourceY
        CubeLightSourceZ
        CubePanX
        CubePanY
        CubeProportional
        CubeRiserInterpolation
        CubeSizeX
        CubeSizeY
        CubeSizeZ
        CubeSquareRisers
        CubeTranslationX
        CubeTranslationY
        CubeTranslationZ
        CubeViewerX
        CubeViewerY
        CubeViewerZ
        CubeWallThickX
        CubeWallThickY
        CubeWallThickZ
        CubeZoomFactor
        CurveFitEquationDisplay
        CurveFitHighOrderFirst
        CurveFitNumSegments
        DataItemsAlongSeries
        DataLineThickness
        DataScrollerPresenceGroups
        DataScrollerPresenceSeries
        DataSortType
        DataTextAngleDefault
        DataTextDisplay
        DataTextFormat
        DataTextFormatPattern
        DataTextPosition
        DataTextRadiusDefault
        DataTextStackedTotalOnTop()
        DataTextTemplateBubble
        DataTextTemplateHiLo
        DataTextTemplateScatter
        DepthAngle
        DepthRadius
        Display3DFloor
        Display3DLeftWall
        Display3DRightWall
        DisplayBarAsPictograph
        DisplayFunnelGroup
        DisplayParetoSeries
        DocumentHeightInTwips
        DocumentWidthInTwips
        DrawAreaMarkers
        DrawCompleteAreaRiser
        DualAxisLineDisplay
        DualAxisSplitPosition
        ExactColorByHeight
        ExtendToFrameEdge
        FillMissingData
        FootnoteAutofit
        FootnoteDisplay
        FootnoteString
        ForceSeriesAbsolute
        FrameAutoShade
        FrameDisplay
        FunnelLabelValueLocation
        GaugeBackgroundStyle
        GaugeColorCenterByQuality
        GaugeDescending
        GaugeIgnoreBackgroundStyle
        GaugeMajorAutoStep
        GaugeMajorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeMinorAutoStep
        GaugeMinorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeNeedleStyle
        GaugeRelativeInnerRadius
        GaugeRelativeThickness
        GaugeSizeMode
        GaugeStartAngle
        GaugeStopAngle
        GraphType
        Grid3DFloorDisplayX
        Grid3DFloorDisplayZ
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayY
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayZ
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayX
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayX
        Grid3DRiserDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayZ
        HiliteBarResize
        IgnoreGridSkip
        IgnoreTickSkip
        InterpretAsHLOC
        LegendAutomatic
        LegendDisplay
        LegendMarkerPosition
        LegendMarkersPerRow
        LegendOrient
        LegendReverse
        LegendScroll
        LegendSeriesCount
        LegendSeriesStart
        LegendTextAutofit
        MajorGridDrawEveryCount
        MajorGridTickInterval
        MinorGridTickInterval
        MarkerDisplay
        MarkerSizeDefault
        MoveAxisTitles
        NestedLabels
        NullLegendMarkerShapesAsSquares
        NumMissingDataSegments
        NumPieArcSegmentsPerPixel
        OtherPercentage
        OtherSeries
        OutputSVG
        OverDrawSkip
        O1AxisLineDisplay
        O1AxisSide
        O1ExcludeMaxLabel
        O1ExcludeMinLabel
        O1LabelAutoAngle
        O1LabelAutofit
        O1LabelAutoSkip
        O1LabelDisplay
        O1LabelMargin
        O1LabelRotate
        O1LabelSkipBegin
        O1LabelSkipCount
        O1LabelStagger
        O1LabelWrap
        O1MajorGridDisplay
        O1MajorGridStyle
        O1MajorTickDisplay
        O1MajorTickStyle
        O1MinorGridCount
        O1MinorGridDisplay
        O1MinorGridStyle
        O1MinorTickCount
        O1MinorTickDisplay
        O1MinorTickStyle
        O1TitleAutofit
        O1TitleDisplay
        O1TitleString
        O2ExcludeMaxLabel
        O2ExcludeMinLabel
        O2LabelAutofit
        O2LabelAutoSkip
        O2LabelDisplay
        O2LabelRotate
        O2LabelSkipBegin
        O2LabelSkipCount
        O2LabelWrap
        O2TitleAutofit
        O2TitleDisplay
        O2TitleString
        ParetoDisplayThreshold
        ParetoY2MajorGridStep
        ParetoY2MajorTickStep
        PieBarLabelDisplay
        PieBarLabelString
        PieBarSeries
        PieDepth
        PieFeelerTextDisplay
        PieFeelerTextFormat
        PieFeelerTextFormatPattern
        PieLabelDisplay
        PieRingSize
        PieRingTotalDisplay
        PieRingTotalFormat
        PieRingTotalFormatPattern
        PieRotate
        PieSorting
        PiesPerRow
        PieTilt
        Place
        PrimitiveAntialiasing
        QuadrantLineCountX
        QuadrantLineCountY
        ReferencePercentageMode
        ReferenceTextPosition
        RemoveDuplicateDataText
        RepositionDataTextCollision
        RepositionStackedDataTextCollision
        ReshapeEnable
        ResizeBarMode
        ReverseGroups
        ReverseSeries
        Riser3DThicknessY
        RiserBarGroupSpacing
        RiserBorderMode
        RiserWidth
        ScaleFromZero
        ScrollOffsetGroup
        ScrollOffsetSeries
        SelectionEnable
        SelectionEnableMove
        SeriesAreRows
        SeriesDefaultBorderColor
        SeriesDefaultTransparentBorderColor
        SeriesLineWidthDefault
        SeriesLooping
        ShadowXOffsetDefault
        ShadowYOffsetDefault
        SizeToContainer
        SmoothLines
        SquareMarkers
        StackedDataValueSum
        Stock52WeekHighDisplay
        Stock52WeekHighValue
        Stock52WeekLowDisplay
        Stock52WeekLowValue
        StockCandleForVolumeColor
        StockCloseSplitDisplay
        StockCloseTicksDisplay
        StockMovingAverageDisplay
        StockOpenTicksDisplay
        StockTickLength
        SubtitleAutofit
        SubtitleDisplay
        SubtitleString
        TextAntialiasing
        TextAutofitMax
        TextAutofitMin
        TitleAutofit
        TitleDisplay
        TitleString
        ToolTipDelay
        ToolTipDisplay
        ToolTipMode
        ToolTipTimeoutEnabled
        TransparentMarkers
        TransparentMarkerSize
        UseDefaultBubbleMarker
        UseOffScreen
        UseSeriesBorderDefaults
        UseSeriesShapes
        UseTimeScaleAxis
        ValidGroupsMin
        ValidSeriesMin
        ViewableGroups
        ViewableGroupsStock
        ViewableSeries
        ViewableSeriesStock
        Viewing3DAnglePreset
        WaterfallLastGroupTotal
        WaterfallStackColorMode
        X1AxisDescending
        X1AxisLineDisplay
        X1AxisSide
        X1ExcludeMaxLabel
        X1ExcludeMinLabel
        X1LabelAutofit
        X1LabelDisplay
        X1LabelFormat
        X1LabelFormatPattern
        X1LabelRotate
        X1LabelStagger
        X1LogScale
        X1MajorGridDisplay
        X1MajorGridStep
        X1MajorGridStepAuto
        X1MajorGridStyle
        X1MajorTickDisplay
        X1MajorTickStyle
        X1MinorGridDisplay
        X1MinorGridStep
        X1MinorGridStepAuto
        X1MinorGridStyle
        X1MinorTickDisplay
        X1MinorTickStyle
        X1MustIncludeZero
        X1OffScaleDisplay
        X1ScaleMax
        X1ScaleMaxAuto
        X1ScaleMin
        X1ScaleMinAuto
        X1TitleAutofit
        X1TitleDisplay
        X1TitleString
        X1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y1AxisDescending
        Y1AxisLineDisplay
        Y1AxisSide
        Y1ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y1ExcludeMinLabel
        Y1LabelAutofit
        Y1LabelDisplay
        Y1LabelFormat
        Y1LabelFormatPattern
        Y1LabelRotate
        Y1LabelStagger
        Y1LogScale
        Y1MajorGridDisplay
        Y1MajorGridStep
        Y1MajorGridStepAuto
        Y1MajorGridStyle
        Y1MajorTickDisplay
        Y1MajorTickStyle
        Y1MinorGridDisplay
        Y1MinorGridStepAuto
        Y1MinorGridStyle
        Y1MinorTickDisplay
        Y1MinorTickStepAuto
        Y1MinorTickStyle
        Y1MustIncludeZero
        Y1OffScaleDisplay
        Y1ScaleMax
        Y1ScaleMaxAuto
        Y1ScaleMin
        Y1ScaleMinAuto
        Y1TitleAutofit
        Y1TitleDisplay
        Y1TitleString
        Y1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y2AxisDescending
        Y2AxisLineDisplay
        Y2AxisSide
        Y2ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y2ExcludeMinLabel
        Y2LabelAutofit
        Y2LabelDisplay
        Y2LabelFormat
        Y2LabelFormatPattern
        Y2LabelRotate
        Y2LabelStagger
        Y2LogScale
        Y2MajorGridDisplay
        Y2MajorGridStep
        Y2MajorGridStepAuto
        Y2MajorGridStyle
        Y2MinorGridDisplay
        Y2MinorGridStep
        Y2MinorGridStepAuto
        Y2MinorGridStyle
        Y2MustIncludeZero
        Y2OffScaleDisplay
        Y2ScaleMax
        Y2ScaleMaxAuto
        Y2ScaleMin
        Y2ScaleMinAuto
        Y2TitleAutofit
        Y2TitleDisplay
        Y2TitleString
        Y2ZeroLineDisplay
        Y3AxisDescending
        Y3LogScale
        Y3ZeroLineDisplay
        Y4AxisDescending
        Y4LogScale
        Y4ZeroLineDisplay
        Y5AxisDescending
        Y5LogScale
        Y5ZeroLineDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextStackedTotalOnTopDisplay
        ZoomDirection
        ZoomPercentage
      Methods
        get Methods
        restore Methods
        save()
        send Methods
        set Methods
      Methods That Return an Object ID
        Object ID Methods
        getAllSeries()
        getAnnotation()
        getAnnotationBox()
        getAnnotationLabel()
        getAnnotationLine()
        getAreaRiser()
        getAreaRiserBottom()
        getAreaRiserTop()
        getBarRiser()
        getBarRiserBottom()
        getBarRiserSide()
        getChartBackground()
        getColorByHeight()
        getCubeFloor()
        getCubeFloorGridX()
        getCubeFloorGridZ()
        getCubeLeftWall()
        getCubeLeftWallGridY()
        getCubeLeftWallGridZ()
        getCubeRightWall()
        getCubeRightWallGridX()
        getCubeRightWallGridZ()
        getCubeRiserFace()
        getCubeRiserGridX()
        getCubeRiserGridY()
        getCubeRiserGridZ()
        getCurveFitCorrelationText()
        getCurveFitCorrelationTextbox()
        getCurveFitEquationText()
        getCurveFitEquationTextbox()
        getCurveFitLineRiser()
        getDataText()
        getExceptionalRiser()
        getFootnote()
        getFootnoteBox()
        getFrame()
        getFrameBottom()
        getFrameSeparator()
        getFrameSide()
        getFunnelCrust()
        getFunnelFeeler()
        getFunnelLabel()
        getFunnelValueLabel()
        getGaugeArea()
        getGaugeBackground()
        getGaugeBand1...5()
        getGaugeBand1...5Label()
        getGaugeLabel()
        getGaugeMajorTick()
        getGaugeMinorTick()
        getGaugeNeedle()
        getGaugeScaleArea()
        getGaugeTitle()
        getGlobal()
        getGroup()
        getGroupScroller()
        getGroupScrollerEditBox()
        getGroupScrollerEditLeft()
        getGroupScrollerEditRight()
        getGroupScrollerEditThumb()
        getGroupScrollerThumb()
        getHistogramRiser()
        getLegendArea()
        getLegendMarker()
        getLegendScroller()
        getLegendScrollerThumb()
        getLegendText()
        getLegendTextBox()
        getLineMarker()
        getLineRiser()
        getLineRiserSide()
        getLineRiserTop()
        getNestedO1Label0...8()
        getNestedO1Label0...8Box()
        getNestedO1LabelLine()
        getNonZeroBaseLineZeroLine()
        getO1Axis()
        getO1AxisLine()
        getO1Label()
        getO1MajorGrid()
        getO1MajorTick()
        getO1MinorGrid()
        getO1MinorTick()
        getO1Title()
        getO1TitleBox()
        getO2Axis()
        getO2Label()
        getO2MajorGrid()
        getO2MinorGrid()
        getO2Title()
        getO2TitleBox()
        getParetoLineMarker()
        getParetoLineRiser()
        getParetoLineRiserSide()
        getParetoLineRiserSide1()
        getParetoLineRiserSide2()
        getParetoLineRiserTop()
        getParetoLineRiserTop1()
        getParetoLineRiserTop2()
        getPieBarConnectLineBottom()
        getPieBarConnectLines()
        getPieBarLabel()
        getPieBarRiserTop()
        getPieBarSlice()
        getPieBarSliceCrust()
        getPieFeelerLine()
        getPieFrame()
        getPieLabel()
        getPieRingLabel()
        getPieSliceFeelerPercent()
        getPieSliceFeelerValue()
        getPieSliceLabel()
        getPlaceHorzO1LabelsTitle()
        getPlaceVertO1LabelsTitle()
        getQuadrantLine()
        getReferenceLine()
        getReferenceLineLegendText()
        getReferenceLineO1()
        getReferenceLineO2()
        getReferenceLineX1()
        getReferenceLineY1()
        getReferenceLineY2()
        getReferenceLineTextO1()
        getReferenceLineTextO2()
        getReferenceLineTextX1()
        getReferenceLineTextY1()
        getReferenceLineTextY2()
        getScatterQuadrantLine()
        getSeries()
        getSeriesGroup()
        getSeriesScroller()
        getSeriesScrollerEditBox()
        getSeriesScrollerEditLeft()
        getSeriesScrollerEditRight()
        getSeriesScrollerEditThumb()
        getSeriesScrollerThumb()
        getSlice()
        getSliceCrust()
        getSliceRing()
        getSpectralLegendMarker()
        getSpectralMarker()
        getStackConnectLine()
        getStock52WeekHighLine()
        getStock52WeekLowLine()
        getStockCloseTick()
        getStockFallingRiser()
        getStockHighLine()
        getStockLowerRiser()
        getStockLowLine()
        getStockMALine()
        getStockOpenTick()
        getStockRiser()
        getStockRisingRiser()
        getStockVolumeRiser()
        getSubTitle()
        getSubTitleBox()
        getThermGaugeArea()
        getThermGaugeBackground()
        getThermGaugeNeedle()
        getTimeScaleLevel()
        getTitle()
        getTitleBox()
        getWaterFallLine()
        getX1Axis()
        getX1AxisLine()
        getX1Label()
        getX1MajorGrid()
        getX1MajorTick()
        getX1MinorGrid()
        getX1MinorTick()
        getX1Title()
        getX1TitleBox()
        getX1ZeroLine()
        getY1Axis()
        getY1AxisLine()
        getY1FrontZeroLine()
        getY1Label()
        getY1MajorGrid()
        getY1MajorTick()
        getY1MinorGrid()
        getY1MinorTick()
        getY1Title()
        getY1TitleBox()
        getY1ZeroLine()
        getY2Axis()
        getY2AxisLine()
        getY2FrontZeroLine()
        getY2Label()
        getY2MajorGrid()
        getY2MajorTick()
        getY2MinorGrid()
        getY2MinorTick()
        getY2Title()
        getY2TitleBox()
        getY2ZeroLine()
        getY3Axis()
        getY3AxisLine()
        getY3FrontZeroLine()
        getY3Label()
        getY3MajorGrid()
        getY3MajorTick()
        getY3MinorGrid()
        getY3MinorTick()
        getY3Title()
        getY3TitleBox()
        getY3ZeroLine()
        getY4Axis()
        getY4AxisLine()
        getY4Label()
        getY4MajorGrid()
        getY4MajorTick()
        getY4MinorGrid()
        getY4MinorTick()
        getY4Title()
        getY4TitleBox()
        getY4ZeroLine()
        getY5Axis()
        getY5AxisLine()
        getY5Label()
        getY5MajorGrid()
        getY5MajorTick()
        getY5MinorGrid()
        getY5MinorTick()
        getY5Title()
        getY5TitleBox()
        getY5ZeroLine()
      Graph Types and 3D Preset Viewing Angles
        Graph Types
        3D Preset Viewing Angles
      Graph Properties Index
        Current Graph Properties
        Graph Properties Reserved For Future Use
        Graph Properties Reserved for Internal Use
      Graph Methods Index
        Current Graph Methods
        Reserved for Future Use
        Reserved for Internal Use
      IdentObj Methods Index
        Current IndentObj Methods
        IndentObj Methods Reserved for Future Use
      Static Variables
        Current Static Variables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems: ESRI ArcGIS Server and ArcGIS Flex API
      Introducing Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Geographic Information Systems
        Defining the Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
        GBIS Components
        New Features
      WebFOCUS GIS Adapter Architecture
        XML-based Configuration Blocks
        Orientation Modes
      Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        Creating a Map Service
      Using the WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer Components
        WebFOCUS Map Component
        WebFOCUS Report Component
        Synthetic Layer Component
        WebFOCUS Data View Component
        JavaScript Functions Available From Flexmapviewer.jsp
      Creating WebFOCUS GIS Procedures
        Incorporating the GIS Filter
        Creating a Report Procedure
        Creating an Identify Procedure
        Creating a Map Procedure
      Useful Techniques and Examples
        Creating Drill-Downs From a Report to a Map
        Drawing Multiple Map Layers
        Transitioning Between Map Images
        Including Custom Libraries
        Embedding Custom JavaScript Functions in the ESRIINFO.XML File
        Directing Alternate Report Output to Different Windows
        Specifying Custom Colors in Your FOCEXEC
        Automatically Zooming On Selected Portions of the Map
        Automatically Zooming On Features of the Map That Were Drawn
        Controlling the Visible Map Viewing Area
        Controlling Layers That Are Visible
        Increasing the Maximum Number of Selectable Map Features
        Improving Map and Report Response Time
        Specifying Default Drawing Methods for Additional Features on the Map
        Describing and Working With a Synthetic Layer
        Defining a Tiled Map Service
        Loading the Flex Map Viewer
        Using Symbols Defined in Your Configuration File
        Controlling Layers That are Visible
        Enabling a Buffer Using Selected Features From the Layer
      Glossary of Related Terms
        A-E
        F-H
        I-L
        M-Q
        R-T
        U-X
      XML Schema Reference
        Root Element <mapfexs>
        Class Definitions
        Constants
      Symbol Class Settings and Parameters
        SimpleLineSymbol
        SimplePolygonSymbol
        SimpleMarkerSymbol
        RasterMarkerSymbol
        TrueTypeMarkerSymbol
        CallOutMarkerSymbol
        TextMarkerSymbol
      HTML Color Values
        Color Value Table
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems API Reference
      Introducing the WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems Architecture
        WebFOCUS for GIS Architecture
      Adapter for GIS Functions
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Load a Map Viewer
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Execute Report Viewer
        Post EsriInfo to the Adapter for GIS
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Execute Report Viewer
        Load an XML File Into the Adapter for GIS
        Load an XML File Into the Adapter for GIS Cache and Return a Unique Dom Key
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Load a Template File for the Map Viewer
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Load a Widget Configuration File for Individual Widgets From the WebFOCUS Menu
        Post to the Adapter for GIS to Register a Selection Geometry Shape Needed to Run a Report
        Get the Adapter for GIS to Execute a Report
        Post to the Adapter for GIS to Execute a Map Fex
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Web Services
    WebFOCUS Web Services
      WebFOCUS Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using WebFOCUS Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
        WebFOCUS Web Services Architecture
      Using the WebFOCUS WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating WSDL Files With the WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating a Generic WSDL File for an Application
        Creating a WebFOCUS Report as a Web Service Function
        Creating a Managed Reporting Report as a Web Service Function
        Choosing Functions for a WSDL File
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service With Apache Axis
      WebFOCUS Web Service Structures
        Structures
      WebFOCUS Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Managed Reporting Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
        Debugging WebFOCUS Web Services Adapter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Web Services
      ReportCaster Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using ReportCaster Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
      Using the ReportCaster WSDL Creation Utility
        WSDL Creation Utility Overview
        Creating a WSDL File for a ReportCaster Web Service
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service in Java
      ReportCaster Web Service Structures
        Structures
      ReportCaster Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Address Book Service Functions
        Logon Function
        Library Access Service Functions
        Library Content Service Functions
        Console Service Functions
        Log Service Functions
        User Service Functions
        Schedule Service Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting ReportCaster Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  WebFOCUS API
    WebFOCUS API Developer's Reference
      Introduction to WebFOCUS API
        Introducing WebFOCUS API
        Installation Requirements for the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API at a Glance
        Components of the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API Packages and Classes
        WebFOCUS Request Processing
      WebFOCUS API Functionality
        Managed Reporting Authentication
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Authentication
        Running a WebFOCUS Server Procedure
        Running a Managed Reporting Standard Report
        Running a Managed Reporting My Report
        Getting a List of Domains
        Getting a List of Domains for a Particular User
        Getting a List of Users
        User Flags
      WebFOCUS API Samples
        Elements of the WebFOCUS API Sample Application
        WebFOCUS API Sample Web Application Structure
        Sample Java Files
      Troubleshooting
        Debugging a WebFOCUS API Application
        WebFOCUS Error Codes
        Managed Reporting Error Codes
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Installation and Configuration
    Server Installation WebFOCUS Reporting Server DataMigrator Server
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for IBM i
    Developer Studio Installation and Configuration
  Reporting Server Administration
    Server Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, IBM i, and z/OS
      Server Introduction
        Using the Web Console
        My Console Options
        Configuration Overview
        Running and Configuring the FOCUS Database Server (z/OS Only)
        Server Profiles
        Profile Commands
      Server Security
        Server Security Overview
        Configuring Authentication
        Configuring Privileges and Other Authorizations
        Configuring Server Encryption
        Access to Connection Information in WebFOCUS Procedures
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Allocation for UNIX and z/OS UNIX System Services
        Temporary File Directory Structure for Non-PDS Deployment
      Data Adapters
        Configuring an Adapter
        Changing the Adapter Configuration
        Configuring a Remote Server
      Metadata
        Creating Synonyms
        Testing Synonyms
        Managing Synonyms
        Metadata Wizard
      Stored Procedures
        Creating a Stored Procedure
        Editing a Stored Procedure
        Running a Stored Procedure
        Scheduling a Procedure
        Sending an E-mail Notification for a Procedure
        Stress Testing a Procedure
        Running Impact Analysis Reports
      Server Workspace Manager
        Configuring Workspace Manager
        Workspace Configuration Settings
        Editing Configuration Files
        Fine-Tuning the Server
        Monitoring Server Activity
      Listeners and Special Services
        Using the Listeners and Special Services Configuration Panes
      Troubleshooting
        Viewing Version Information
        Analyzing Server Activity
        Analyzing FOCUS Database Server Activity
        Tracing Server Activity
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for the Unified Server
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for USS/HFS Deployment
        Retrieving IBISNAP Output
        Recording and Reproducing User Actions
        Troubleshooting the Console
        Workspace Manager Safe Mode
        Server Processes
        Gathering Diagnostic Information for Customer Support Services
      Unicode Support
        Unicode and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Accessing Unicode Data
        Selecting, Reformatting, and Manipulating Characters
        Sort Order Under Unicode
        Added Unicode Support for Master Files, Data Files, and Application Directory Names
        Unicode PDF Output
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Adapter Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, IBM i, and z/OS
      Introduction to Adapters
        Processing Requests
        Functions of an Adapter
        Data Management
        Metadata Services With SQLENGINE SET
        Additional Master File Attributes
      Using the Adapter for 1010data
        Configuring the Adapter for 1010data
        Managing 1010data Metadata
        Customizing the 1010data Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Adabas
        Preparing the Adabas Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas
        Adabas Overview
        Managing Adabas Metadata
        Overview of Master and Access Files
        Master Files for Adabas
        Access Files for Adabas
        Mapping Adabas Descriptors
        Mapping Adabas Files With Variable-Length Records and Repeating Fields
        Using the GROUP Attribute to Cross-Reference Files
        Platform-Specific Functionality
        Customizing the Adabas Environment
        Adabas Reporting Considerations
        Adabas Writing Considerations
        Adapter Navigation
        Entry Segment Retrieval of Adabas Records
        Descendant Periodic Groups and Multi-Value Fields
        Descendant Adabas Records
      Using the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Preparing the Adabas Stored Procedures Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Managing Adabas Stored Procedure Metadata
        Invoking an Adabas Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Caché
        Preparing the Caché Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Caché
        Managing Caché Metadata
        Customizing the Caché Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Managing CICS Transaction Metadata
        Invoking a CICS Transaction
        Running a TPG/SPG/AAS Transaction
      Using the Adapters for C-ISAM and ISAM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter
        Managing C-ISAM Metadata
        Maintaining C-ISAM Data Sources Using SQL Commands
        Using a Secondary Index in C-ISAM and ISAM Files
      Using the Adapter for DATACOM
        Preparing the DATACOM Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DATACOM
        DATACOM Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing DATACOM Metadata
        Master Files for DATACOM
        Access Files for DATACOM
        Describing Multi-File Structures for DATACOM
        Data Retrieval Logic for DATACOM
      Using the Adapter for DB2
        Preparing the DB2 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB2
        Managing DB2 Metadata
        Reporting Against a DB2 Stored Procedure
        Customizing the DB2 Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Using DB2 Cube Views
        Calling a DB2 Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Preparing the DB Heritage Files Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Managing DB Heritage Files Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Multi-Format Logical Files
        DB Heritage Files Record Selection Efficiencies
      Using the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Preparing the Web Application Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Managing Enterprise Java Beans Metadata
      Using the Adapter for ERwin
        Preparation Steps for ERwin
        Configuring the Adapter for ERwin
        Enhancing Synonyms With ERwin Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Essbase
        Preparing the Essbase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Essbase
        Managing Essbase Metadata
        Customizing the Essbase Environment
        Essbase Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Modifying Essbase Data
      Using the Adapter for Excel
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel
        Managing Excel Metadata
        Customizing the Excel Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Managing Metadata for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
      Using the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Managing Metadata for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
      Using the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Preparing the HP Neoview Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Managing HP Neoview Metadata
        Customizing the HP Neoview Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/DB
        Preparing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing IDMS/DB Metadata
        Master Files for IDMS/DB
        Access Files for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Sample File Descriptions
        File Retrieval
        Record Retrieval
        Customizing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Tracing the Adapter for IDMS/DB
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/SQL
        Preparing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/SQL
        Managing IDMS/SQL Metadata
        Customizing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for IMS
        IMS Environments: Overview
        Preparing the IMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS
        Managing IMS Metadata
        Master File Attributes
        Access File Attributes (DBCTL)
        Migrating From an Existing MVS Server (DBCTL)
        WebFOCUS Reporting With IMS
        Maintaining IMS Data Sources (DBCTL)
      Using the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Preparing the IMS Transactions Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Managing IMS Transactions Metadata
        Invoking an IMS Transaction
        Invoking an IMS Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Information Manager
        IBM Information/Management
        How the Server Works With Information/Management
        InfoMan Hardware and Software Requirements
        Configuring the Adapter for InfoMan
        Defining the Adapter for InfoMan User ID and Session ID
        InfoMan Access Control
        Server Security in InfoMan
        IBM Information/Management Database Security
        AUTOIMAN Configuration File
        Describing InfoMan Data Sources
        Executing AUTOIMAN
        Working With AUTOIMAN
        Master File Generation Facility in InfoMan
        PIDT Selection Panel in InfoMan
        Retrieval PIDT Name Confirmation in InfoMan
      Using the Adapter for Informix
        Preparing the Informix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Informix
        Managing Informix Metadata
        Customizing the Informix Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Informix Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Ingres
        Preparing the Ingres Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Ingres
        Managing Ingres Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Interplex
        Preparing the Interplex Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Interplex
        Managing Interplex Metadata
        Customizing the Interplex Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for iWay Adapter Framework (IWAF)
        Preparing the IWAF Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IWAF
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for JDBC
        Preparing the JDBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JDBC
        Managing JDBC Metadata
        Customizing the JDBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Preparing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Environment
        Overview of the Setup Process
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Creating Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Refreshing the Metadata Repository
        Refresh Security Extracts
        Converting Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne (Non IBM i Platforms Only)
        Setting the UDCDIC Environment Variable (Windows only)
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Installation Prerequisites
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Managing JD Edwards World Metadata
        Enabling JD Edwards World Security
        Enabling Tracing
        Frequently Asked Questions
      Using the Adapter for Lawson
        Adapter for Lawson: Overview
        Configuring the Adapter for Lawson
        Preparing the Lawson Environment
        Managing Lawson Metadata
        Updating Lawson Security Information
      Using the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Preparing the Lotus Notes Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Managing Lotus Notes Metadata
      Using the Adapter for LDAP
        Preparing the LDAP Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for LDAP
        Managing LDAP Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Preparing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Managing Microsoft Access Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Preparing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Managing MetaMatrix Metadata
        Customizing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
        Microsoft SQL Server Compatibility With ODBC
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
      Using the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Server Environment for Millennium
        Configuring the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Millennium Environment
        Managing Millennium Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Millennium Data Source
      Using the Adapter for Model 204
        Preparing the Model 204 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Model 204
        Model 204 Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Model 204 Metadata
        Master Files for Model 204
        Access Files for Model 204
        Customizing the Model 204 Environment
        Using Customized Security Exits
        Adapter Tracing for Model 204
      Using the Adapter for MQSeries
        Preparing the MQSeries Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MQSeries
        Managing MQSeries Metadata
        Customizing the MQSeries Environment
      Using the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Preparing the Mumps Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Managing Mumps Metadata
        Including Records in a Mumps Data Source
      Using the Adapter for MySQL
        Preparing the MySQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MySQL
        Managing MySQL Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the MySQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL
        Preparing the NATURAL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL
        Managing Metadata for NATURAL
        Invoking a NATURAL Program
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Installing NATURAL Support Programs
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Managing NATURAL CICS Transactions Metadata
        NATURAL Data Buffer Processing API
        Invoking a NATURAL CICS Transaction
      Using the Adapter for Netezza
        Preparing the Netezza Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Netezza
        Managing Netezza Metadata
        Customizing the Netezza Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Nucleus
        Preparing the Nucleus Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Nucleus
        Managing Nucleus Metadata
        Customizing the Nucleus Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for ODBC
        Preparing the ODBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for ODBC
        Managing ODBC Metadata
        Customizing the ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Oracle
        Preparing the Oracle Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle
        Managing Oracle Metadata
        Reporting Against an Oracle Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Oracle Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Oracle Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Preparing the Oracle E-Business Suite Environment
        Data Access and Security
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Maintaining Security Rules
      Using the Adapter for parAccel
        Configuring the Adapter for parAccel
        Managing parAccel Metadata
      Using the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Managing PeopleSoft Metadata
        Managing PeopleSoft Secured Data Access
        Managing Connections to PeopleSoft
        Using Administrative Utilities
        Migrating from 7.1x and 7.6.x to 7.7
        Advanced Administrative Topics
      Using the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Preparing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Managing PostgreSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Progress
        Preparing the Progress Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Progress
        Managing Progress Metadata
        Customizing the Progress Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for PSQL
        Preparing the PSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PSQL
        Managing PSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Query/400
        Preparing the Adapter for Query/400 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Query/400
        Managing Query/400 Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Rdb
        Preparing the Rdb Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Rdb
        Managing Rdb Metadata
        Using Multiple Rdb DBMS Files
        Using Multischema Rdb DBMS Files
        Rdb Database Driver Performance
      Using the Adapter for Red Brick
        Preparing the Red Brick Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Red Brick
        Managing Red Brick Metadata
        Customizing the Red Brick Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Remote Servers
        Configuring Remote Servers
        Managing Metadata for Remote Servers
        Executing Stored Procedures
      Using the Adapter for RMS
        Preparing the RMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for RMS
        Managing RMS Metadata
        Manually Describing RMS Files
        Describing Complex RMS Keyed
        Associating an RMS Data Source to a Master File
        Retrieving Data From RMS Files
        Syntax for RMS Master File Attributes
        RMS Attribute Summary
        Read/Write Usage Limitations of the Adapter for RMS
      Using the Adapter for SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (BW)
        Preparing the SAP BW Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP BW
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Creating BEx Queries
        SAP BW Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Managing SAP BW Metadata
        Customization Settings
        Support for BEx Structures
        Producing SAP BW Requests Using SQL
      Using the Adapter for SAP
        Preparing the SAP Environment
        Accessing Multiple SAP Systems
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP
        Post-Configuration Tasks in an SAP Environment
        Managing SAP Metadata
        SAP Table Class Support for an Individual Table
        SAP Support for a Function Module
        SAP Data Type Support
        SAP Open/SQL Support
        Advanced SAP Features
        Setting Up the Report Processing Mode
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Producing SAP Requests
      Using the Adapter for Siebel
        Software Requirements for the Adapter for Siebel
        Preparing the Siebel Environment
        Preparing the Server Environment for Adapter Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for Siebel
        Managing Siebel Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQLBase
        Preparing the SQLBase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQLBase
        Managing SQLBase Metadata
        Customizing the SQLBase Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
        Preparing the SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services
        Managing SQL Server Analysis Services Metadata
        Customizing the SQL Server Analysis Services Environment
        SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Supra
        Preparing the Supra Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Supra
        Supra Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Supra Metadata
        Supra Modules
        Adapter Tracing
      Using the Adapter for Sybase
        Preparing the Sybase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Sybase
        Managing Sybase Metadata
        Reporting Against a Sybase Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Sybase Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Sybase Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Teradata
        Preparing the Teradata Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Teradata
        Managing Teradata Metadata
        Reporting Against a Teradata Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Teradata Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Teradata Macro or Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Transoft
        Preparing the Transoft Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Transoft
        Managing Transoft Metadata
        Customizing the Transoft Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniData
        Preparing the UniData Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniData
        Managing UniData Metadata
        Customizing the UniData Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniVerse
        Preparing the UniVerse Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniVerse
        Managing UniVerse Metadata
        Customizing the UniVerse Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for VSAM
        Preparing the Environment for VSAM
        Configuring the Adapter for VSAM
        Managing VSAM Metadata
        Associating a VSAM Data Source With a Master File
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a VSAM Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
        Maintaining VSAM KSDS Data Sources
        Using VSAM Relative Record Data Set (RRDS) Files
        Reviewing SQL Updates to VSAM Data Sources
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Using the Adapter for XBRL
        What Is XBRL?
        Configuring the Adapter for XBRL
        Reporting Against XBRL Instance Documents
        Reporting on Dimensions
      Using the Adapter for XML
        Preparing the XML Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for XML
        Managing XML Metadata
      XA Support
        XA Transaction Management
        Supported Interfaces
        Implementation
        Vendor Specifics
      Aggregate Awareness Support
        Relational Adapters and Aggregated SQL Queries
        Aggregate Awareness in an RDBMS
      Cluster Join
        Embedded Joins
        Embedded Join Master Files
      Translating COBOL File Descriptions
        Creating Synonyms From COBOL File Descriptions
        Controlling the Translation of a COBOL File Description
      Data Set Compression Exit: ZCOMP
        Invoking the ZCOMP Exit
        What Happens When ZCOMP is LOADED?
      Dynamic Private User Exit
        FOCSAM and the GETPRV User Exit
        Physical Implementation of the GETPRV Exit
        Master File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Access File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Calling Parameters and Work Areas
      Validation for Special Characters and Reserved Words
        Validation for Special Characters
        Validation for Reserved Words
      Launch PDF
  DataMigrator
    iWay DataMigrator User's Guide
      Introduction to DataMigrator
        Data Management and Migration Overview
        What Is DataMigrator?
        DataMigrator Architecture
        DataMigrator Server
        DataMigrator Data Management Console
        Server Web Console
        Designing Data Flows and Process Flows
        Revised Functionality
        Getting Help
        iWay Software on the Web
      Setting Up DataMigrator
        DataMigrator Setup At a Glance
        Remote Server Setup At a Glance
        DataMigrator Setup
        Initiating Server Administration Tasks
        Authorizing DataMigrator Server Usage and Administration
        Managing Application Directories and Configuring the Application Path
        Configuring Data Adapters
        Creating Metadata
        Testing Sample Data and Process Flows
        Performing Server Administration Tasks
        Upgrading DataMigrator From Release 4.3 or 5.1
        Upgrading DataMigrator from Release 5.2, 5.3, 7.1, or 7.6
      Planning a DataMigrator Application
        Designing Your Application
        Using Synonyms for Data Sources and Data Targets
        Reviewing Your Data Sources
        Reviewing Your Data Targets
        Establishing Security for DataMigrator
      Working in the Data Management Console
        Data Management Console Interface
        Navigation Pane
        DataMigrator Workspace
        Text Editor
        Main Menu
        Toolbars
        Text Editor Toolbar
        Console Log
        Setting Flow Properties
        Viewing Properties
        Setting User Preferences
        User Privileges
        License Code
        Configuring National Language Support
        Ending a Data Management Console Session
      Designing a Data Flow
        The Data Flow Interface
        Simple Data Flow at a Glance
        Complex Data Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Data Flow
        Specifying Data Sources
        Creating a Source Transformation in a Data Source Object
        Joining Data Sources
        Adding a SELECT to a Data Flow
        Adding a UNION to a Data Flow
        Selecting Columns
        Testing the SQL Statement
        Specifying Filters in a Data Flow
        Specifying Sorts
        Selecting a Data Target
        Specifying Data Target Options
        Mapping Transformations
        Using Variables in a Flow
        Using Functions
        Column Formats and Mapping
        Setting Properties of a Flow
        Running a Data Flow
        Creating a Direct Load Flow
        Creating a DBMS SQL Flow
        Creating a Quick ETL Copy
      Designing a Process Flow
        Process Flow Methodology
        Process Flow Interface
        Simple Process Flow At a Glance
        Complex Process Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Process Flow
        Adding a Saved Procedure to a Process Flow
        Assigning and Using Variables in a Process Flow
        Maintaining Continuous Processing in a Single Agent
        Executing a Process Flow That Contains Only Stored Procedures
        Adding E-Mail Messages to a Process Flow
        Setting Connection Logic
        Grouping and Controlling Simultaneous Execution of Flows
        Running a Process Flow
        Scheduling a Process Flow
      Tutorial: Creating Data and Process Flows With DataMigrator
        What You Are Going To Do
        Startup and Setup Tasks
        Exercise 1: Creating the Data Flow
        Selecting and Joining Data Sources
        Selecting and Managing Columns
        Adding Data Targets
        Submitting the Data Flow
        Data Flow Review
        Exercise 2: Creating the Process Flow
        Starting the Process Flow
        Adding a Data Flow Object to the Process Flow
        Branching in the Process Flow
        Submitting the Process Flow
      Generating Reports, Viewing the Log File, and Printing Flows
        DataMigrator Log, Statistics, and Summary Flow Reports
        Scheduler Reports
        Impact Analysis Reports on Synonyms, Procedures and Columns
        Working With a Report
        Viewing a Detailed Flow Report and Log File
        Printing a Graphical Representation of a Data or Process Flow
      Optimizing Performance
        Improving Data Extraction Performance
        Using Automatic Passthru
        Improving Data Loading Performance
        Improving Lookup Performance
      Working With Synonyms
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Using Variables in a Synonym
        Variables Attribute Summary
        Use a Variable in a Synonym
        Creating, Enhancing, and Editing Synonyms Using Modeling View
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Viewing Data Lineage for a Column
      Advanced DataMigrator Tips and Techniques
        Overview of Examples
        Creating Sample Data and Metadata
        Horizontal Partitioning with Multi-Table Load
        Using the Decode Function
        Generating a Surrogate Key
        Generating a Surrogate Key Using Slowly Changing Dimensions
        Mapping to a Sequential File of a Specific Format
        Creating and Using Reusable Transformations
        Creating a Target File With Multiple RECTYPEs
        Combining Multiple Sources Rows in a Single Target Row
        Using Lookups to Create Multi-Table Flows Without Joins
        Record Logging
        Using Variables in Data Flows
        Creating a Data Flow Using a Target Based on a Predefined XML Schema
        Loading a Target Table Using the File Listener
        Sending a Target File to a FTP Server
        Loading a Star Schema
        Iterating Through Multiple Tables
      Change Data Capture
        Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture
        Enabling Database for Logging
        CDC Configuration
      DataMigrator Log Statistics and Tables
        Log and Statistics Tables
      Event-Based Scheduling
        Starting Flows With CMRUN
        Starting Flows With CMASAP
        Starting Flows With Your Own API Program
        Starting Flows From FOCUS
        Determining the Status of an Event-Based Flow
      Problems, Errors, and Troubleshooting
        DataMigrator Status Codes and Server Messages
        Server Run-Time Error Codes
        DataMigrator Management Problem Resolution
        Including Run-Time Messages in the ETL Log
        Performing a Trace to Diagnose Server Problems
      Customizing Your Environment
        DataMigrator Parameters
      Source Management
        Overview of Source Management
        Source Control Security Server and Client Setup
        Configuring Source Management and Setting Up Source Control
        Using a Source Control System to Manage Procedures and Synonyms
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Functions Reference
      Functions Overview
        Function Arguments
        Function Categories
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Character Functions
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Number to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
      SQL Character Functions
        CHAR_LENGTH: Finding the Length of a Character String
        CONCAT: Concatenating Two Character Strings
        DIGITS: Converting a Numeric Value to a Character String
        EDIT: Editing a Value According to a Format (SQL)
        LCASE: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        LTRIM: Removing Leading Spaces
        POSITION: Finding the Position of a Substring
        RTRIM: Removing Trailing Spaces
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring From a String Value (SQL)
        TRIM: Removing Leading or Trailing Characters (SQL)
        UCASE: Converting a Character String to Uppercase
        VARGRAPHIC: Converting to Double-byte Character Data
      SQL Date and Time Functions
        CURRENT_DATE: Obtaining the Date
        CURRENT_TIME: Obtaining the Time
        CURRENT_TIMESTAMP: Obtaining the Timestamp (Date/Time)
        DAY: Obtaining the Day of the Month From a Date/Timestamp
        DAYS: Obtaining the Number of Days Since January 1, 1900
        EXTRACT: Obtaining a Datetime Field From Date/Time/Timestamp
        HOUR: Obtaining the Hour From Time/Timestamp
        MICROSECOND: Obtaining Microseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MILLISECOND: Obtaining Milliseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MINUTE: Obtaining the Minute From Time/Timestamp
        MONTH: Obtaining the Month From Date/Timestamp
        SECOND: Obtaining the Second Field From Time/Timestamp
        YEAR: Obtaining the Year From Date/Timestamp
      SQL Data Type Conversion Functions
        CAST: Converting to a Specific Data Type
        CHAR: Converting to a Character String
        DATE: Converting to a Date
        DECIMAL: Converting to Decimal Format
        FLOAT: Converting to Floating Point Format
        INT: Converting to an Integer
        SMALLINT: Converting to a Small Integer
        TIME: Converting to a Time
        TIMESTAMP: Converting to a Timestamp
      SQL Numeric Functions
        ABS: Returning an Absolute Value (SQL)
        LOG: Returning a Logarithm (SQL)
        SQRT Returning a Square Root (SQL)
      SQL Miscellaneous Functions
        COUNTBY: Incrementing Column Values Row by Row
        HEX: Converting to Hexadecimal
        IF: Testing a Condition
        LENGTH: Obtaining the Physical Length of a Data Item
        VALUE: Coalescing Data Values
      SQL Operators
        CASE: SQL Case Operator
        COALESCE: Coalescing Data Values
        NULLIF: NULLIF Operator
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Resource Management
    Resource Analyzer Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Analyzer?
        Resource Analyzer Overview
        Resource Analyzer for Decision Support Analysis
        Uses for Resource Analyzer: Performance Analysis
        Introduction to Data Access and Performance Analysis With Resource Analyzer
        Sample Data Access Questions
        How Resource Analyzer Works
        Software Prerequisites
        Overview of the Web Console
        Overview of Reporting With Resource Analyzer
        Integrating Resource Analyzer With WebFOCUS, Managed Reporting, and ReportCaster
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
        Event Routing
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Resource Analyzer Report Options
        Reports Overview
        Resource Analyzer Reporting
        Resource Analyzer Report Options
        General Reports
        Usage Analysis Reports
        Domain Analysis Report
        Impact Analysis Report
        Performance Analysis Reports
        Network Analysis Reports
        Graph Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Resource Governor Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Governor?
        Resource Governor Overview
        Resource Governor Features
        Resource Governor Operations
        How Resource Governor Works
        Resource Governor Usage Monitoring
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
        Event Routing
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Creating Business Rules
        Creating Business Rules
      Resource Governor Administration
        The Resource Governor Administrator on the Web Console
        Usage Monitoring
        Rule Parameters
        Building Rules
        Governing
      Resource Governor Reports
        Resource Governor Reporting
        Resource Governor Report Options
        General Reports
        Resource Governor Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Business Rule Language (BRL)
        Using Business Rule Language (BRL)
        BRL Factual Information
        BRL Keywords
        Pre-defined Variables
        Internal Functions
        Customized Rule Examples
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
        Using PMF Content on your Mobile Device
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing the Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Adding and Editing Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Designing Dimension Loads
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Designing a Simple Measure Load
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Scheduling Measure Loads
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Creating Measures With the New Measure Wizard
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Combining Security Modes
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration Guide
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Snapshot and Restore
        Manually Creating a BID Portal View for PMF
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing Manage Reporting Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  References
    Stored Procedure Reference
      Introducing Stored Procedures
        Calling a Stored Procedure
        Stored Procedure Libraries
        Setting the Execution Order
      Calling a Program as a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Compiled Program
        Calling a Program With EDARPC
        Calling a Program With CALLPGM or EXEC
        Calling a Program With SQL EX
        Passing Parameters
        Program Communication
      Calling a JAVA Class as a Stored Procedure
        Execute Using CALLJAVA
        Execute Using EX
        Execute Using SQL EX and SQL CPJAVA EX
        Passing Parameters
        Writing a JAVA Class
        JAVA Class Communication
        Compiling and Running a JAVA Program
      Writing a 3GL Compiled Stored Procedure Program
        Program Requirements
        Setting Up the Control Block
        Storing Program Values
        Error Handling
        Issuing the CREATE TABLE Command
      Writing a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Commands Included in a Procedure
        Commands and Processing
        Commenting a Procedure
        Sending a Message to a Client Application
        Controlling Execution
        Using Variables
        Supplying Values for Variables
        Branching
        Looping
        Calling Another Procedure
        The -REMOTE Commands
        Reading From and Writing to an External File
        .EVAL Operator
        Creating Expressions
        Using Functions
        Using Commands Specific to an Operating System
        ON TABLE HOLD
        ON TABLE PCHOLD
      Platform-Specific Commands and Features
        DYNAM Command (MVS)
        Comparison of TSO Commands, JCL, and DYNAM
        DDNAME Translation in User-Written Subroutines: MSODDX
        FILEDEF Command Under VM
        FILEDEF Command Under UNIX, Windows, IBM i, z/OS, and OpenVMS
      Dialogue Manager Quick Reference
        Dialogue Manager Commands
      GENCPGM Usage
        Using GENCPGM
        Subroutine Source Examples and Runtime Testing
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    iWay API Reference V7.1
      Introducing the API
        Introduction to the API
        API Call-Level interface
        Overview of the Data Reference Model
        Introduction to Messaging and Queuing
      API Data Structures
        Data Type Summary
        Data Structures
        Column Information Block
      Interface Overview
        Administrative Method Calls
        Communications Method Calls
        Data Access Method Calls
        Control Flow
      Method Reference
        Using API Methods
        API Method Calls
      Environment Variables
        Assigning and Inspecting Variables
        Global and Local Variables
        Valid Setting Codes and Variables
      Usage Considerations
        SQL Translation
        Using Prepared Statements
        Large Object Support
        National Language Support
        Transaction Processing
        Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs)
        Security Considerations
      Advanced Usage Considerations
        Multithreading
        Multiplexing (Deprecated)
        Semiplexing (User Multiplexing)
        Result Set Management
        Passivating Connection Option
      Platform-Specific Considerations
        Using the API in the OS/400 Environment
        Using the API in the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Using the API in the OS/390 and z/OS Environment
        Using the API in the MVS Environment
        Using the API in the OpenVMS Environment
        Using the API in the UNIX Environment
        Using the API in the VM Environment
      Tracing
        Tracing Within the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Alternative Tracing Methods
        Tracing Within the MVS Environment
        Tracing Within the UNIX, OS/390, z/OS, OpenVMS and OS/400 Environments
        Configuring Tracing
        Activation of Tracing
      Messaging and Queuing
        Asynchronous Database Processing With the API
        API Messaging and Queuing Model
        Transaction Processing Considerations
        Method Calls
        Processing Answer Set Large Objects
      Sample Include, Copybook and Global Files
        C and C++ Header File: EDA.H
        Cobol Copybook: EDACPY
        Visual Basic Globals:EDAGLOB.BAS
      Programming Examples
        Sample Files
        API Programming in C
        API Programming in C++
        API Programming in Visual Basic
        API Programming in Cobol
        API Programming in RPG
      Status Codes
        API Status Codes
        API Status Code Descriptions
      Launch PDF
    iWay Messages and Codes Manual V7.1
      Application Agent Messages
        Messages 001 - 2000
      Supra Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2001 - 2200
      Infoman Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2201 - 2300
      NOMAD Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2401 - 2500
      General SQL Messages
        Messages 2501 - 2700
      DSM Mumps Messages
        Messages 2701 - 2900
      Adabas Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 3001 - 3100
        Messages 4451 - 4600
      General Table Service Messages
        Messages 3201 - 4000
        Messages 36201 - 36600
      IMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4201 - 4300
        Messages 42001 - 42200
      CA/IDMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4301 - 4450
      TOTAL Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4601 - 4800
      MODEL 204 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4801 - 5000
      System 2000 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 11001 - 11400
        Messages 12001 - 12301
        Messages 13501 - 14001
        Messages 50001 - 50101
      XA Transaction Manager Messages
        Messages 11501 - 11600
      CA-DATACOM Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 12001 - 12300
        Messages 13001 - 13100
        Messages 14001 - 14902
        Messages 21101 - 21200
        Messages 50001 - 50100
      General Server Messages
        Messages 13001 - 13400
      SQL Translator Messages
        Messages 14001 - 14200
      DataMigrator (ETL Manager) Messages
        Messages 18001 - 18800
      Fusion Database Messages
        Messages 20001 - 20600
      Server Messages
        Messages 32001 - 32600
      Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 35801 - 36000
      Resource Analyzer/Resource Governor Messages
        Messages 36001 - 36200
      XML Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 42201 - 42456
      WebFOCUS Messages
        Messages 43001 - 43039
      Essbase Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43201 - 43280
      FOCUS Bull Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43501 - 43583
      Application Adapter Server Messages
        Messages 43701 - 43905
      General Parser Messages
        Messages 44001 - 44619
      Connector Error Messages
        Messages 0 - 10 and -1 to -39
      Common User Abend Codes
        Codes 401 - 4091
      XMI/Datacom and Miscellaneous Error Messages
        XMI/Datacom Error Messages
        Messages 1714 - 1850
      COBOL FD Translator Messages
        COBOL FD Translator Messages
      The EDA198 Error Message
        EDA198 Error Message Overview
        Diagnosing EDA198 on VM
        Diagnosing EDA198 on OS/390 and z/OS
      Launch PDF
    iWay SQL Reference V7.1
      Introduction
        SQL Translation Services
        Language Dialect
      SQL Services
        SQL Passthru Services
        Using SQL Passthru
        Enabling SQL Passthru
        Catalog Requirements
        Valid Database Engine Settings
        SQL Translation Services
        SQL Translation Operations
        Dialect Translation
        Data Manipulation Language (DML) Generation
        Join Optimization in DML Generation
      Language Elements
        BNF Conventions
        Characters
        Tokens
        Qualifiers
      SQL Reference
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        SELECT Statement
        Scalar Functions
        Column Functions
        Predicates
        Data Manipulation Commands
        Commit and Rollback
      Tables and Views
        Creating Tables
        Creating Views
      Preparing and Executing SQL Requests
        Preparing SQL Requests
        Executing SQL Requests
      SQL Translate Keywords
        Keywords
      BNF Summary
        Condensed SQL Language Syntax Definition
      Launch PDF
Release 7.7.02
  Technical Memos
    Technical Memo 4505: WebFOCUS HTML Report Accessibility Support
    Technical Memo 4647: Configuring Single Sign-on to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Using Kerberos
    Technical Memo 4690: Saving Report Output in Excel 2007 Format
    Technical Memo 4693: Using the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In
    Technical Memo 4695: Using the Magnify Prototype Wizard
    Technical Memo 4697: Nested Applications
    Technical Memo 4698: Using the Active Technologies API
    Technical Memo 4699: Using Magnify With The Google Search Engine
    Technical Memo 4700: Accessing an HTML Composer Application on the iPad
    Technical Memo 4711: PDF Remediation
    Technical Memo 4719: Hiding Report Options (Buttons) in the Managed Reporting Deferred Status Interface
  Best Practices
    Considerations When Using ReportCaster
  Security and Administration
    WebFOCUS Security and Administration
      WebFOCUS Components and Deployment Options
        WebFOCUS Components
        WebFOCUS Deployment Options
      WebFOCUS Processing Concepts
        Security Planning
        WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script and Configuration Files
        WebFOCUS Profiles
        Java Application Server Files
        Customizing WebFOCUS Request Processing
        WebFOCUS Encryption Techniques
        WebFOCUS User Authentication Options
      WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Accessing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        WebFOCUS Administration Console Functionality
        Securing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        ReportCaster Settings
        Magnify Settings
        WebFOCUS Utilities
        Quick Links
        WebFOCUS Client Upgrade Configuration
      WebFOCUS Client Core Processing Details
        Core Processing of WebFOCUS Requests
        WebFOCUS Client Security
        WebFOCUS Client Administration
        Setting Authentication Credentials
      WebFOCUS Reporting Server Core Processing Details
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings
      Managed Reporting Processing Details
        Managed Reporting Architecture
        Managed Reporting Sign-on Processing
        Dashboard Sign-On Processing
        Managed Reporting Configuration Files
        Managed Reporting Internal Variables
        Managed Reporting Settings in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Deferred Receipt Processing
        Accessing Reports From Outside Managed Reporting
      Configuring Managed Reporting for Trusted or External Authentication
        Benefits of Trusted and External Authentication
        Preparing for Trusted or External Authentication
        Configuring Trusted Authentication
        Configuring External Authentication
        Propagating the Managed Reporting ID to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Configuring Managed Reporting for External Authorization
        Benefits of External Authorization
        Preparing for External Authorization
        Configuring Managed Reporting Administered RDBMS Authorization
        Configuring Externally Administered Authorization
        Advanced Topics
      WebFOCUS Encryption Features
        Configuring WebFOCUS in an SSL Environment
        WebFOCUS Encryption
        Encryption Using the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Encrypting WFS Files Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Encrypting WebFOCUS Data, Procedures, and Data Restriction Rules
      Manipulating WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script Commands
        Copying WebFOCUS Variables Using the WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in
        HTTP Header Variables Available for Script Processing
      WebFOCUS Diagnostics
        Using Diagnostic Tools in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        HTTP Request Headers and JVM Property Information
        Monitoring WebFOCUS Sessions
        Stopping a WebFOCUS Request
        Using WebFOCUS Verification Tools
        Tracing WebFOCUS Processing
        Viewing Security and Header Variables in Use
      Filtering Data
        WebFOCUS Data Security
        WebFOCUS Data Filters
        Filtering Metadata in the WebFOCUS Development Tools
      Localizing WebFOCUS
        Configuring National Language Support
        Customizing the Dynamic Language Switch
        Manually Customizing WebFOCUS Client Messages
      Protecting Your WebFOCUS Installation
        File System Permissions for Windows and UNIX
        Protecting WebFOCUS Variables
        Protecting the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Protecting Managed Reporting Applications
        Protecting WebFOCUS Reporting Server Data Sources
        Disabling Operating System Commands
      Developing Your Own WebFOCUS Plug-in
        Overview of Plug-in Processing
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFEXT Setting
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFTRANSINOUT Setting
      Developing a Managed Reporting Realm Driver Extension
        Introduction
        Where to Go for Information
      Developing a Reporting Server Authentication Exit
        Pre-Verify User ID Exit
      Developing a Dynamic DBA Rule
        WebFOCUS DBA Exit
      Developer Studio Custom Logon Templates
        How Logon Templates Work
        Creating a Template File
      Launch PDF
  7.7.02 New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      WebFOCUS InfoAssist Enhancements
        Using InfoMini
        Creating Slicers
        Adding Active Form Controls to a Compound Document
        Using the Size & Arrange Group
      Active Technologies Enhancements
        Active Technologies Form Controls
        Text Formatting Markup Tags
        Display Syntax for Global Filter Icon and Dashboard Bar
      Developer Studio Enhancements
        Hiding a Sort Field
        Setting the Default Report Format
        Propagating Mixed-Case Column Titles to a HOLD File
        Ignoring ON Phrases for Absent Fields
        Creating Accordion Reports That Expand by Row
      HTML Composer Enhancements
        Using Templates in the HTML Composer
        Using Guided Report Mode in the HTML Composer
        Adding a Compound Document to an HTML Page
        Adding Flash Content to the Layout
        Multi-Select Form Controls
        Converting a Double List Control to Another Control Type
      Document Composer Enhancements
        Adding Active Technologies Report Controls to a Layout
        Outputting in User-Defined Format
        Adding Vertical Sort Fields in a Table of Contents
        Using PDF Drill Through
      Report Painter Enhancements
        Guided Reports
        Auto Drill Enhancements
        Database Format for XFOCUS Data Sources
        Database Format for HP Neoview Tables
        Using User-Defined Functions
      Power Painter Enhancements
        Adding a Simple Prompt to the Auto Prompting Facility
      Managed Reporting Enhancements
        Restricting My Reports Content Within a Domain
        Enhancement When Saving A Deferred Report as a My Report
        Using the Publish Option in Dashboard
        Accessing View Builder From Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Quick Data Support With 64-Bit Excel 2010
      WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Enhancements
        Support for Sharepoint Portal 2010
      WebFOCUS Client Enhancements
        Authenticating WebFOCUS Administration Console Access With Managed Reporting Credentials
        Using an Advanced Standard Encryption Cipher in Reporting Server Communication
      Reporting Language Enhancements
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Propagating Mixed-Case Column Titles to a HOLD File
        Column Titles for FML and BY ROWS OVER Requests
        Passing WebFOCUS Dates to Excel 2000
        Hiding Null Columns in ACROSS Groups
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        WebFOCUS Amper Autoprompt Facility Field Selection Enhancement
        Supporting Multiple DST Operators in the Same Request
        Creating Accordion By Row Reports
        Controlling Non-Printed Fields Propagated to a Hold File With SET HOLDLIST=EXPLICIT
        Excel 2007 Support
      WebFOCUS Graphics Enhancements
        Controlling Data Text Values That Are the Same for Two or More Series
        Repositioning a Data Text Value If Multiple Values Are Colliding
        Making the Last Riser in a Waterfall Chart Into a Total That Touches the X-Axis
        Setting Color Mode to Distinguish Positive and Negative Numbers in Waterfall Charts
        Controlling the Zero Data Value When the Cumulative Stack Total Is Zero
        Returning the Object ID of a Connected Line in a Stacked Chart
        Specifying HEX Values for RGB Colors in STY Files
      ReportCaster Enhancements
        Scheduling Tool Custom Template Option
        Using the View Option in the ReportCaster Interfaces
      National Language Support Enhancements
        Unicode Enhancements
        Support for Simplified Chinese Installation
        Support for Russian as a Localized Version
      Adapter for Geographic Information Systems Enhancements
        WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex Components
      Magnify Enhancements
        Indexing Using FORMAT MAGNIFY Command (CFR)
        Magnify Security
        Magnify Search-Based Application
        Magnify Administration
      Server Enhancements
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Performance
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        SQL Adapters
        XML-Based Adapters
        ERP Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
        All Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Primary Key Analysis Report
        Function Assist
        Scheduled Events Report
        New XML Target
        Where Condition With Sub-Select
        DBCS Character Functions
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Domain Analysis Report
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
    Server Release Notes
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: Excel 2000, Excel 97, Excel
        Using PowerPoint Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding an HTML TOC to a Report
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Support for Repeated Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Long and Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        Identifying a Data Source Overview
        Specifying a Data Source Name: FILENAME
        Identifying a Data Source Type: SUFFIX
        Providing Descriptive Information for a Data Source: REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        The Field Name: FIELDNAME
        The Field Synonym: ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        Defining a Dimension: WITHIN
        Validating Data: ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        Alternative Report Column Titles: TITLE
        Documenting the Field: DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        Describing a Virtual Field: DEFINE
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX Attribute
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        Specifying an Access Type: The ACCESS Attribute
        Limiting Data Source Access: The RESTRICT Attribute
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Placing Security Information in a Central Master File
        Summary of Security Attributes
        Hiding Restriction Rules: The ENCRYPT Command
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        Creating a New Data Source: The CREATE Command
        Rebuilding a Data Source: The REBUILD Command
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        Changing Data Source Structure: The REORG Subcommand
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned Project
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Creating and Working With Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Managing Applications and Paths in the Web Console
        Managing Applications and Paths in the Data Management Console
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using ISAPI
        Using CGI
        Using a Dynamic Multi-Select Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
        Amper Auto-Prompting
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Web Page With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameter Values Categorized by Functional Area
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
        Character Functions for AnV Fields
        Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Lookup Data Source
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date and Time Functions
        Date and Time Function Notes
        Date and Time Function Terminology
        Using Standard Date and Time Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date Field
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Numeric Format
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
        TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months to or From Dates
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days to or From a Date
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between a Blank and a Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST and NORMSINV: Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
      Input/Output Functions
        PUTDDREC and CLSDDREC: Opening, Closing, and Writing Files
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Reporting Tools
    Creating Reports With Report Assistant
      Introducing Report Assistant
        About Report Assistant
        Accessing Report Assistant
        Layout of Report Assistant
      Designing a Report
        Building Your Report With Report Assistant
        Selecting Report Fields
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Defining Field Characteristics
        Applying Predefined and Cascading StyleSheets
        Customizing Headings and Footings
      Working With Data and Data Sources
        Selecting Records for a Report
        Limiting Data With Filters
        Working With Joins
      Controlling Report Output
        Applying Report Output Options
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running a Report
        Saving a Report
        Editing a Report
      Report Assistant Field Reference
        Report Assistant Field References
        Field Selection Tab
        Report Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab
        Join Options Tab
        Report Options Tab
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reports With Report Painter
      Report Painter Basics
        Report Painter Layout and Toolbars
        Using the Object Inspector
        Viewing Options
        Business Intelligence Features
        Report Painter Limitations
        Field Properties and Report Options Dialog Boxes
      Creating Reports With Report Painter
        Adding a Field as a Report Column
        Displaying Data
        Sorting Data
        Selecting Data
        Universal Concatenation in Report Painter
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Including a Total or Subtotal
        Adding a Page Heading or Footing
        Formatting a Column
        Choosing an Output Format
        Creating a Drill Down Procedure
        Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running and Saving a Report
        Creating Precision Reports
        Using User Defined Functions
      Creating Guided Reports
        Creating a Guided Report
      Styling Reports With Report Painter
        Styling With Fonts, Colors, and Grids
        Styling or Aligning an Individual Item in a Text String
        Aligning Fields and Text in Headings and Footings
        Defining a Conditional Report Style
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Adding an Image
        Using the StyleSheet File Selector
        Generating Format-Specific Style Blocks
        Using Excel Templates
        Using Excel Named Ranges in WebFOCUS Applications
        Generating Overflow Sheets for an Excel 2000 Report
        Using PowerPoint Output Format and PowerPoint Templates
        Setting Up the Report Page
        Creating Mailing Labels
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Temporary Fields With Report Painter
        Creating a Calculated Value With Report Painter
        Creating Expressions for Temporary Fields
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Charts With Graph Tools
      Introduction to Creating Charts
        Graph Overview
        Determining Graphing Objectives
        Creating Custom Graph Templates
        Accessing the Graph Tools from WebFOCUS Environments
      Creating Graphs With Graph Assistant
        Accessing the Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Graph Type and Style
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Working With Joins in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing Your Graph
        Graph Types Tab
        Field Selection Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Field Selection Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Selection Criteria Tab in Graph Assistant of the Managed Reporting Environment
        Join Options Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Properties Tab
      Creating Graphs With Advanced Graph Assistant
        Accessing Advanced Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Selecting Data for a Graph
        Data Display Options
        Filtering Data for a Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs With Advanced Merge
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Working With Joins
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding and Editing Labels in a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing a Graph
        Modifying Graph Properties With Chart Editing Forms
      Customizing Graphs With the Graph Editor
        Choosing a Graph Type
        Applying Color and Line Options in Graphs
        Applying Font Options in Graphs
        Adding Chart Titles
        Creating and Loading GIF Files
        Applying Gradient Fill (All Graph Types)
        Applying Texture Fill (All Graph Types)
        Zooming and Panning in Bar Graphs
        3D Chart Options
        3D Custom Viewing Options
        3D Preset Viewing Options
        Bar, Line, and Area Charts
        Dual Y Options
        Group Axis Options
        Pie Chart Options
        Stock Chart Options
        X1 Axis Options
        Y1 Axis Options
        Y2 Axis Options
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Composer
      Using the HTML Composer
        Uses for the HTML Composer
        Getting Started With the HTML Composer
        Creating a Report Page Layout
      Creating and Using Parameters in the HTML Composer
        Creating Parameter Values
        Using Form Controls to Supply Incoming Parameter Values
        Using Input Controls to Supply Parameter Values
        Supplying Parameter Values to External Reports
        Styling Your Layout
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Laying Out Objects With the HTML Composer
        Controlling the HTML Composer Environment
        Adding ReportCaster Schedule Capability to the HTML Composer
        Running a Managed Reporting Report Deferred From the HTML Composer
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Composer Pages
        Specifying an HTML File as a Load Screen
      Using Templates in the HTML Composer
        Understanding and Using Templates
        Manipulating the Objects of Templates
      Creating Guided Report Forms
        Getting Started With Guided Reports
      Chaining Controls for Dependencies in the HTML Composer
        Automatically Chaining Parameters From the New Parameters Dialog Box
        Chaining Controls on the Parameters Tab
        Applying Conditions to a Chain
        Populating Controls One at a Time
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Report Library Integration in the HTML Composer
        Integrating the Report Library
      Creating a Rich Internet Application (RIA) With the HTML Composer
        RIA Overview
        Creating a RIA With the HTML Composer
        Usage Notes and RIA Example
      Using Google Maps in the HTML Composer
        Configuring WebFOCUS for Google Maps
        Creating WebFOCUS Procedures for Google Maps
        Adding a Google Map
        Customizing the Google Map Properties
        Integrating WebFOCUS With Google Maps
        Using the Google Maps Functionality
        JavaScript Functions
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Active Technologies User's Guide
      Active Technologies
        Active Technologies Report Overview
        Available Output Formats for Using Active Technologies
        Product Requirements for Using Active Technologies
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Painter
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Assistant
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
      Using an Active Technologies Report
        Navigating Between Pages
        Filtering and Highlighting Data
        Calculating Data
        Sorting Data
        Using Tab Window Navigation
        Controlling Report Display
        Using Data Visualization
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Using the Grid Tool
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool
        Using the Pivot Tool
        Saving, Exporting, and E-mailing Active Technologies Reports
      Working With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Active Technologies Report Integration With Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Pivot Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Formatting Legend Options for an Active Technologies Chart for Adobe Flash Player
        Customizing Containers and the Dashboard Bar for Active Technologies Reports and Dashboards
        Using Active Technologies for PDF
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Active Technologies Dashboard Overview
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Using Advanced Design Features for Active Technologies Dashboards
        Overview
        Changing the Color of the Border of Charts
        Changing the Background Color of an Individual Tab
        Controlling Active Technologies With Custom JavaScript Code
        Working With the Global Filter Feature
        Managing Active Technologies Form Controls
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Creating Active Technologies Components With WebFOCUS Syntax
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Document Composer
      Document Composer Overview
        Uses for the Document Composer
        Getting Started With the Document Composer
      Creating Compound Reports
        Creating a Compound Layout Report
        Output Formats for Compound Reports
        Adding a Reporting Object to a Compound Report
      Viewing Pages in the Document Composer
        On Demand Viewing in the Document Composer
        Viewing Simulated or Live Data in the Document Composer
        Moving Pages With the Thumbnails Tab
        Positioning Objects and Keyboard Shortcuts
      Using Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Creating, Saving, and Editing Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Using an Existing Page Master in Another Document
      Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects
        Setting Overflow Options in the Document Composer
        Using Fixed Overflow in the Document Composer
        Using Flowing Overflow in the Document Composer
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in the Document Composer
        Adding Different Headers and Footers on an Overflow Page
      Applying a Table of Contents and Bookmarks
        Adding a Table of Contents Page
        Using Bookmarks in the Document Composer
      Using Drill Through in the Document Composer
        Using Drill Through
      Using Page Layouts in the Document Composer
        Using Page Layouts
      Formatting Text in the Document Composer
        Formatting Text Elements
      Adding Page Numbers to Your Document With the Document Composer
        Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Using Active Technologies Reports to Create Active Dashboards
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Power Painter
      Introducing Power Painter
        About Power Painter
        Configuring the Power Painter License Code
        Accessing Power Painter
        Introducing Power Painter Options and Palettes
        Selecting and Adding a Data Source
        Customizing the Power Painter Environment
      Working With Power Painter Objects
        About Power Painter Objects
        Inserting a Report Object
        Inserting a Graph Object
        Inserting an Image Object
        Inserting a Text Object
        Inserting a Line Object
        Displaying Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
      Using Standard Reporting Functions
        Incorporating Standard Reporting Functions Into a Report
        Importing Values From External Files for WHERE Statements
        Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility
      Controlling Report Overflow and Position of Objects
        About Report Overflow and Object Positioning
        Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter
        Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter
        Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Two-Way Email
      Using Two-Way Email
        Two-Way Email User Steps
        Subscribing for the First Time
        Replying to the Confirmation Message
        Receiving Your Templates for the First Time
        Requesting a Report
        Updating Your Subscription Information
        Responding to an Alert
      Two-Way Email Administration
        Accessing the Administrator Console
        Adding or Deleting a Subscriber
        Maintaining an E-mail Address
        Refreshing User Templates
        Using the Job Log
        Using the Event Log
        Checking the Status of a Job or Canceling a Job
      Developing a Two-Way Email Template
        How Two-Way Email Works
        Creating a Template
        Maintaining a Template
        Sending a Template to Users
        Attaching a Two-Way Email Template to an Alert
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  InfoAssist
    WebFOCUS InfoAssist User's Manual
      Introducing and Launching InfoAssist
        Introducing InfoAssist
        Introducing Personal InfoAssist
        Accessing InfoAssist
        Launching InfoAssist
      Setting InfoAssist User Preferences
        Changing User Preferences
      Using the InfoAssist Application Window
        Components of the InfoAssist Application Window
        Selecting From the Application Main Menu
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Accessing Properties Using the Control Panel
        Understanding the Resources Panel
        Understanding the Results Panel
        Using the Navigation Taskbar
        Using the Status Bar
      Building InfoMini Applications
        Understanding InfoMini Applications
        Creating an InfoMini Application
      Using Slicers
        Creating Slicers
        Filtering With Slicers
      Customizing and Styling Reports
        Excel Output for Reports
        Styling Reports
        Using Custom Reporting Features
        Creating Customized Report Outputs
      Hierarchical Reporting in InfoAssist
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
      Creating and Customizing Charts
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Using Custom Chart Features
        Adding a Page Heading and Page Footing to a Chart
        Designing a Chart in Active Preview
      Using Document View and Building Compound Documents
        Accessing Document View
        Building a Compound Document
        Adding Active Technologies Form Controls to a Compound Document
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Managed Reporting
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Deployment Process
        Using Managed Reporting
        Accessing Dashboard
        Customizing Dashboard
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Creating Domains, Groups, Roles, and Users
        Using the Managed Reporting Administration Interface
        Creating Domains
        Creating Groups
        Creating Users
        Creating Roles
        Customizing the Interface
      User Management
        User Management Tree Object
        Managing User Reports
        Promoting a Custom Report to a Standard Report
        Considerations When Copying and Moving Reports
        Managing Standard Report References
        Managing Reporting Object References
      Managing Dashboard
        Managing Public Views
        Managing Group Views
        Managing Library Only Views
        Managing Private Views
        Logging On to Dashboard and View Inheritance
        Managing Users
        Controlling the Idle Limit for Authenticated and Public Users
        Handling Messages
        Hiding Report Types in the Domain Tree
        Hiding the Share Report Option for Finished My Reports
        Displaying Optional Properties in Dashboard
        Creating Standard Reports, Reporting Objects, and Other File in Dashboard
      Creating Public and Group Views
        What Is a Public View?
        What Is a Group View?
        What Is a Library Only Group View?
        Adding a Group or Public View
        Directing Users to a Group View Upon Login
        Adding a Library Only View
        Removing a Public or Group View
        Editing a Public or Group View
        Customizing Dashboard Pages for a Public or Group View
        Copying a Public or Group View
        Exiting the Public Views or Group Views Window
      Customizing Dashboard
        Before You Begin Customizing Dashboard
        Opening the View Builder
        Selecting a Template
        Selecting Custom Colors
        Positioning the Domain Tree, Role Tree, and Banner
        Inserting a Logo
        Customizing the Banner
        Creating a Custom Toolbar
        Adding a Message of the Day
        Customizing the Logoff Window
        Changing the ReportCaster Scheduling Tool
        Changing the ReportCaster Interface
        Resetting the View Builder
        Globally Enabling Reporting Tools in Dashboard
        Saving Selections and Exiting a Customization
        Exiting the View Builder
      Creating a Role Tree
        What Is a Role Tree?
        Adding a Role Tree
        Editing a Role Tree
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Creating Filters For Standard Reports
        Executing a Domain Profile in Dashboard
        Selecting Content Layout
      Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Running the Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility Output Files
        Master Files and Sample Procedure
        Reporting From Extract Files
        Property Flags
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Change Management Load Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      Additional Administration Topics
        Selecting the Tool Type for ReportCaster
        Debugging
        Setting Up Traces for Managed Reporting User Requests
        Repository File Name Processing
        Obtaining a List of Available Master Files
      Application Integration Topics
        Invoking the Deferred Report Status Interface Directly
        Managed Reporting Browser Window Feature
        Using Launch Pages Outside the Default Repository
      Managing Deferred Tickets
        Managing Deferred Workload
        Managing the Deferred Ticket Cleanup Utility
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Developer for Windows
        Using Managed Reporting
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Working With Domains
        Using Domains in Managed Reporting
        Guidelines for Copy or Cut and Paste in Domains
        Setting Domain Properties
        Customizing Managed Reporting
      Working With Standard Reports
        Working With Standard Reports
        Creating and Editing Standard Reports
        Applying Predefined Style Sheets to a Report
        Adding a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
        Importing Procedures and Other Files Into Managed Reporting
        Ignoring Code in a Procedure (FOCEXEC)
        Coding Considerations for Saved Parameter Reports
        Execution of a Managed Reporting Procedure Using –INCLUDE or EX
        Execution of a Server Procedure
        Drilling Down From a MR Procedure to a Procedure on the Server
        Incorporating Images Into Managed Reporting Requests
        Launching a Self-Service Application of Report Assistant
      Creating Reporting Objects
        Reporting Objects
        Running a Reporting Object From Domain Builder
        Components of a Reporting Object
        Other Component
        Creating and Customizing a Join in Developer Studio
        Creating and Customizing a Join in the Browser
        Virtual Fields (DEFINE Statements)
        Filters
        Selection Criteria (WHERE Statements)
        Creating an Application Object
        Report Component
        Graph Component
      Creating Launch Pages and Publishing Reports
        Working With Launch Pages
        Creating Launch Pages With the Publish Utility
        Working With Amper Auto-Prompting
        Working With the HTML Composer
      Data Servers Feature
        Working With Data Servers
        Working With Server Applications
        Working With Application Files
        Create Synonym Behavior
        Searching Domains for Master Files and Fields With the Impact Analysis Tool
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      ReportCaster Alerts
        Alert Reporting Overview
        Components of an Alert
        Creating an Alert
        Creating Joins and Defines With the Text Editor
        Checking Alerts
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Features
        Managed Reporting Interface
      Using Dashboard
        Opening Dashboard
        Required Browser Settings
        Recommended Browser Settings
        Personalizing Your Dashboard
        Dashboard Layout
        Selecting a Domain
        Using Domain Tree Items
        Creating Reports in Dashboard
        Stopping Requests in Dashboard
        PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard
        Running Deferred Reports
        Using Role Trees
        Viewing Content Blocks
        Using Banner Hyperlinks
        Searching Domains
        Creating a Favorites List
        Mobile Favorites
        Viewing Reports in the Report Library
        Viewing Recently Run Reports
        Setting User Options
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Selecting Content Layout
      Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Deferred Report Status Interface Features
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Using the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Using the Viewer Control Panel
        Creating On-Demand Paging Reports
      Using Java Applet Managed Reporting
        Accessing Managed Reporting
        Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting
        Running a Report
        Sharing a Report
        Creating a Report or Graph
        Creating Procedures With the Text Editor
        Editing a My Report
        Editing a Custom Report and its Properties
        Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE
        Filtering Data
        Searching a Domain
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Administration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Component Pack and Third-Party Applications
        Benefits of Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
      Using WebFOCUS Portal Components
        WebFOCUS Components Overview
        JVM Support Information
        Optional Portal Parameters
        Disabling WebFOCUS Tools
        WebFOCUS Component URLs
        Portlet Parameters
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Report Components
      Configuring JSR 168 Portal Environments
        Understanding the JSR 168 Portlet Specification
        Installing and Deploying WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Gateway
        Configuring JSR 168 Portlet Parameters
        Using the Output Portlet
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Vignette Application Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Sun ONE Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the JBoss Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA AquaLogic Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Apache Jetspeed Portal
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2007
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2010
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the IBM WebSphere Portal Server Version 6.1
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Oracle Portal Server (Oracle 10g)
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Defining a WebFOCUS Application Under the Oracle Application Server
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Registering the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Testing the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Computer Associates CleverPath Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA WebLogic Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing WebFOCUS Portlets
        Adding WebFOCUS Portlets to the BEA WebLogic Portal
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Pagelets for the PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Adding the URLContentRetriever.jar File to PeopleSoft
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Pagelets
        Using WebFOCUS Pagelets
      Installing Certified NetWeaver iViews for the SAP Enterprise Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing the WebFOCUS Open Portal Gateway on the SAP Application Server
        Configuring User Mapping
        Importing .PAR Files
        Configuring WebFOCUS iViews
        Importing the WEBFOCUSOPS.EPA File
        Removing Applications Using the Archive Remover
        Using the Output Portlet
        Using WebFOCUS iViews
      Installing WebFOCUS Categories for the TIBCO PortalBuilder
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Categories
        Configuring the Report Category
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Developer Studio
    Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        Additional WebFOCUS Products
        WebFOCUS Architecture
        Developer Studio Architecture
        Developer Studio Directory Structure
        Developer Studio Explorer Layout
        Project-Based and Remote Development Environments
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Logging Off Areas in WebFOCUS Environments
        Developer Studio Data Access and Descriptions
      Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Development Environment
        Development Tools
      Setting Preferences
        General Tab
        Reporting Tab
        Explorer Tab
        Source Control Tab
        External Tools Tab
        Title Format Tab
      Tutorial: Creating an OLAP-enabled Report in Developer Studio
        OLAP Tutorial Overview
        Before You Begin
        Creating the OLAP Project
        Creating the OLAP Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With a Procedural Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With the CENTORD Data Source
        Manipulating Report Output
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reporting Applications With Developer Studio
      Creating a Reporting Application
        What Is a Reporting Application?
        Project-based and Remote Development Environments
        Creating a Project
        Organizing a Project
        Using Workspace Files
        Adding a Master File to a Project
        Uploading Data Files
        Viewing and Modifying Project Properties
        Managing a Project With Source Control
        Securing a Project
        Removing a Project
      Partitioning and Deploying Project Files
        Deployment Basics
        Summary of Steps
        Step 1: Identify the Target Servers
        Step 2: Create a Deployment Scenario
        Step 3: Partition the Project Files
        Step 4: Deploy the Project Files
        Configuring the Target Servers (Optional)
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
      Joining and Merging Data Sources
        What Is a Join?
        Types of Joins
        Joining Different Kinds of Data Sources
        Creating a Join With Graphical Tools
        Creating Multi-Field Joins
        Using Conditional Joins
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Customizing a Join
        Working With Joins
        Reporting With a Join
        Saving a Join
        Merging Data Sources Using the Match Wizard
      Hierarchical Reporting
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Manipulating Aggregated Data in an Essbase or SAP BW Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
        Showing Hierarchies in the HTML Composer
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
      Creating a Reporting Procedure
        Selecting a Creation Tool
        Incorporating a Procedure Into an Application
        Copying a Procedure
        Creating a Procedure Component
        Working With a Component
        Using the SQL Report Wizard
        Assigning a Logical Name With the Allocation Wizard
        Calling a Procedure From the Current One
        Using the Engine Tool
        Managing Flow of Control
        Working With a Full Procedure
        Running a Procedure
        Canceling a Running Procedure
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs
        Viewing Reports in Your Browser
        Drilling Down for Details
        Navigating Through Multi-Page Web Reports
        Controlling Viewer Display Options
        Using the Clipboard
        Printing Report and Graph Output
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
        Troubleshooting OLAP Reports
      Saving and Reusing Report Output
        Types of Output Files
        Creating Output Files
        Output File Formats
        Save Report Output as a Native Temporary Table In Report Painter
        Saving Reports as HTML Output
        Saving Reports as Print Display Output: PDF, PS
        Saving Reports Using Excel Formats
      Creating an Update Application With Update Assist
        Update Assist (Step 1 of 6): Selecting Segments to Update
        Update Assist (Step 2 of 6): Selecting Fields to Update
        Update Assist (Step 3 of 6): Selecting Navigation Options
        Update Assist (Step 4 of 6): Selecting a Color Scheme
        Update Assist (Step 5 of 6): Selecting Output File Options
        Update Assist (Step 6 of 6): Confirming Selections
        About Your Update Assist Application
        Editing Your Update Assist Application
        Calling an Update Assist Procedure From a WebFOCUS Report
        Usage Notes
      Editing Application Components as Text in Developer Studio
        Text Editor
        The Other Component
        The Comment Component
        Creating a Text File or a Procedure Component as Text
        Opening Application Components as Text
        Finding and Replacing Text
        Changing Text Color and Case Size
        Adding Headings and Footings
        Using Bookmarks to Move Within a File
        Running a Procedure From the Editor
        Opening a Graphical Tool From the Text Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With Graphical Tools
      Describing and Accessing Data Overview
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        How Applications Interpret Data
        Obtaining a Synonym
        What You Can Do With a Synonym
        Ways to Enhance a Synonym
        How an Application Uses a Synonym
        Alternative Tools on the Reporting Server Console
      Accessing Data and Creating Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters and Remote Servers in Developer Studio
        Creating Synonyms in Developer Studio
        Defining a Remote Server in the WebFOCUS Client Communication File
      Using the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Setting Up Multilingual Titles and Descriptions
        Enhancing Synonyms Using the Modeling View
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Defining Dimensions for OLAP Analysis
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
        Creating Business Views
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Creating Filters in a Synonym
        Adding Computed Fields (COMPUTE) in a Synonym
        Storing the Number of Repetitions of a Repeating Field in a Virtual Field
        Defining Attributes and Creating Expressions for Custom Fields
        Adding Group Fields in a Synonym
        Applying Database Administrator Security
      Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Analyzing Procedures With the Impact Analysis Tool
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Adding Data and Rebuilding FOCUS Data Sources
        Creating a FOCUS Data Source
        Rebuilding a Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Financial Reports
      Financial Reporting and Analysis for the Enterprise
        WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Benefits
        Enterprise Financial Reporting: A Critical Cornerstone of Business
        Financial Reporting Within and Beyond an Organization
        Financial Reporting and Government Regulations
        The WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Platform
        WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
        Learning More About the WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
      Creating Reports With Financial Report Painter
        Financial Report Painter Overview
        Starting a Financial Report
        Designing Your Financial Report
        Running a Financial Report
        Retrieving FOR Field Values From a Data Source
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Supplying Data Directly
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Text
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Formatting Financial Reports
        Adding, Inserting, and Deleting Rows
        Editing Row Types and Properties
        Adding and Deleting Columns
      Creating a Financial Report Using the Financial Report Painter
        Create a Project
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Tutorial: Creating an Income Statement Using Unconsolidated Data
        Tutorial Overview
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Join the Data Sources
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Describing Data for an FML Hierarchy
        Data Requirements for FML Hierarchies
        Coding an FML Hierarchy in a Text Editor
        Defining an FML Hierarchy in the Synonym Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Magnify
    Magnify End User Manual
      Introducing Magnify
        About Magnify
        Accessing Magnify
      Conducting a Search With Magnify
        Conducting a Search with Magnify
        Navigating Magnify Search Results
        Viewing Content Through Additional Links
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Developer's Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Overview of Implementing Magnify
        Planning for Enterprise Search
        About Configuring Magnify
        Magnify Search Configuration Example
      Configuring an iWay Channel
        Configuring An iWay Channel
        Configure a Listener
        Create an Inlet
        Create the Emitter
        Create an Outlet
        Create a Channel
        Deploy a Channel
        Verifying the Emitter Destination Directory
      Creating the Indexing Process Flow
        About the Transaction Indexing Process Flow
        Storing Metadata Values
        Creating the HTML Document
        Feed HTML Document to the Search Engine
        Completing the Process Flow
        Validating and Testing the Process Flow
        Publishing the Process Flow
        Process Flow Considerations
      Reconfiguring and Deploying the iWay Channel
        About Reconfiguring the iWay Channel
        Creating the New Route
        Modifying the Original Channel
        Building and Deploying the Modified Channel
        Backing Up and Importing iWay Workflows
      Customizing the Magnify User Interface
        Customization Overview
        Adding Date Information to Magnify Search Results
      Indexing Using FORMAT MAGNIFY Command
        FORMAT MAGNIFY
      Magnify Protocols
        Magnify Protocols for Indexing Documents
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Security and Administration
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Configuring the Search Engine
        Configuring the Search Engine
      Configuring Magnify Collections
        Defining Collections
      Using the Security Features
        About Magnify Security
        Enabling Security in Magnify With Lucene
        Enabling Security in Magnify for Managed Reporting
        Enabling Collection-Level Security
      Magnify Diagnostics
        Magnify Diagnostics Pages
        Indexing Large Files
        Magnify Request Parameters
        Verifying Documents in the Lucene Index
        Retrieving Index Library Properties
        Retrieving Field Values From the Lucene Index
        Online Lucene Resources
      Magnify Demo Search Application
        Century Electronics Sample Search Application
        Differences Between Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Installation
        Port 80, Port 8080, or Other
        Feeding Content to Magnify
        Additional Features
        Collection Security
        Multiple Categorizations
        Process Flow
        Deleting Extraneous Files When Creating Projects in Developer Studio
        Previous Versions
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Maintain
    Maintain Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS Maintain
        Road Map: Where Should You Go?
        What Is WebFOCUS Maintain?
        Overview of Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      WebFOCUS Maintain Basic Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating a Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Explorer
        Adding a Data Source to Your Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Project Explorer
        Designing a Form
        Saving Your Work
        Selecting a Starting Object
        Running Your Project Locally
        Using Radio Buttons
        Giving Your Form a New Title
        Writing Data to the Data Source
        Adding a Form to Display Data From a Data Source
        Using the HTML Overflow Property
        Adding Form Navigation Buttons
        Deploying Your Project to a Different WebFOCUS Server
        Adding Images to Your Project
        What's Next?
      WebFOCUS Maintain Advanced Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating an Update Form
        Updating a Record in a Data Source
        Using Scripts for User Feedback
        Updating a Data Source Using a Read/Write Grid
        Creating a Welcome Screen Using the Menu Control
        Adding a WebFOCUS Report to Your Application
        Using a JavaScript Function to Define an E-mail Link
        Adding a Pop-up Calendar
        Getting Help in the Maintain Development Environment
      WebFOCUS Maintain Concepts
        Set-based Processing
        Controlling a Procedure's Flow
        Executing Other Maintain Procedures
        Forms and Event-driven Processing
        Reading From a Data Source
        Writing to a Data Source
        Transaction Processing
        Classes and Objects
      WebFOCUS Maintain Sample Data Sources
        Fannames Data Source
        Users Data Source
        Contact Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project
        Opening WebFOCUS Maintain
        Applications and Projects
        What Are the Building Blocks of a WebFOCUS Maintain Project?
        Editing Projects in the Maintain Development Environment
        Viewing System Messages in the Output Window
        Searching for Text in Your Project
        Editing Project Components as Text
        Incorporating Data Sources Into Your Project
        Using the Resource Wizard
        Team Development
      Developing Procedures
        Overview
        Specifying Data Sources for Your Procedure
        Using Functions in Procedures
        Using Variables in Procedures
        Using Data Source Stacks in Procedures
        Using the Type Wizard
        Using Import Modules
        Testing Procedures With the Run Procedure Option
      Using the Form Editor
        Form Editor Overview
        Layout of the Form Editor
        Using the Controls Palette
        Using the Property Sheet
        Using Drawing Aids
        Selecting Multiple Controls
        Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Duplicating Controls
        Resizing Controls
        Aligning Controls
        Spacing Controls
        Grouping Controls
        Changing the Order of Controls
        Undoing and Redoing Actions
        Layering Controls
      Developing and Using Forms
        Before You Begin Designing Forms
        Creating and Managing Forms
        Copying a Form Within a Procedure
        Changing Form Properties
        Using Cascading Style Sheets
        Dynamically Manipulating Forms at Run Time
        How WebFOCUS Maintain Saves Your Forms
        Using a Driver Procedure
      Defining Events and Event Handlers
        Using the Event Handler Editor
        Events
        Using a Maintain Function as an Event Handler
        Using Script Functions as Event Handlers
        Using Web Links as Event Handlers
      Developing and Using Controls
        Which Control Should You Use?
        Using Buttons
        Using Check Boxes
        Using Combo Boxes and List Boxes
        Using Edit Boxes and Multi-Edit Boxes
        Using Frames
        Using Grids and HTML Tables
        Using Group Boxes
        Using HTML Objects
        Using Images
        Using Java Applets
        Using Lines
        Using Menus
        Using Radio Buttons
        Using Text
        Using ActiveX Controls
        Dynamically Manipulating Controls at Run Time
        Defining Colors for Your Form and Controls
        Assigning Help to Your Forms and Controls
        Assigning Tab Order to Controls
      Form and Control Properties Reference
        (GroupCode) Property
        (Name) Property
        Alignment Property
        Alt Property
        AlternateRowColor Property
        BackColor Property
        BackColorOver Property
        BackgroundImage Property
        Border Property
        BorderColor Property
        BorderText Property
        BorderWidth Property
        Bottom Property
        Calendar Property
        CaseStyle Property
        Checked Property
        Columns Property
        Content Property
        CSSName Property
        CursorPointer Property
        DefaultButton Property
        Enabled Property
        FixedColumns Property
        Font Property
        ForeColor Property
        ForeColorOver Property
        GridLines Property
        HeaderBackColor Property
        HeaderFont Property
        HeaderForeColor Property
        Headers Property
        Height Property
        Help Property
        Hyperlink Property
        IBIValidation Property
        Image Property
        ImageDown Property
        ImageOver Property
        ItemBorder Property
        Layer Property
        Left Property
        ListItems Property
        Map Property
        MaximizeBox and MinimizeBox Properties
        MultiSelection Property
        OnLoad Property
        Orientation Property
        Overflow Property
        Password Property
        PenWidth Property
        ReadOnly Property
        Right Property
        Rows Property
        ScrollBars Property
        ScrollHeight and ScrollWidth Properties
        Scrolling Property
        SelectedItem/SelectedItems Property
        Sizeable Property
        Source Property
        Stretched Property
        Tabstop Property
        Text Property
        TextOnLeft Property
        Title Property
        ToolTipText Property
        Top Property
        Visible Property
        Width Property
        ZIndex Property
      Executing Other Procedures
        The Advantages of Modularizing Source Code
        Using the CALL and EXEC Commands
        Executing a Procedure on Another Server: AT Server
        Keeping or Terminating the Server Session: KEEP/DROP
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain Procedures: FROM...INTO
        Passing Parameters Between a Maintain Procedure and a WebFOCUS Procedure: FROM ... INTO
        Optimizing Performance: Data Continuity and Memory Management
      Using WebFOCUS Procedures in Your Application
        What Can WebFOCUS Procedures Do?
        Incorporating WebFOCUS Procedures Into Your Project
        Executing WebFOCUS Procedures From Maintain Procedures
        Using WebFOCUS Report Output in Maintain
        Executing Maintain Procedures From WebFOCUS Report Procedures
        Using Variable Binding From WebFOCUS Reports
      Developing Classes and Objects
        What Are Classes and Objects?
        Defining Classes
        Reusing Classes: Class Libraries
        Declaring Objects
      Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Compiling WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures
        Executing WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures From Outside the Maintain Development Environment
        Security and Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Customizing Key Functions and JavaScript for WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Closing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Developing an Application for a Shared Application Server
      Designing Applications for Scalability and Performance
        Application Partitioning
        Presentation Logic
        Database Logic
        Miscellaneous Business Logic
        EXEC Command, CALL Command, and System Resources
        Use When Appropriate
        Using the Best Parts
        Persistence Management
        Development Standards
        Tips for Designing Applications
      Ensuring Transaction Integrity
        Transaction Integrity Overview
        Why Is Transaction Integrity Important?
        Defining a Transaction
        Evaluating Whether a Transaction Was Successful
        Concurrent Transaction Processing
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for DB2 Data Sources
      Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        WebFOCUS Maintain Application Debugger
        Type on EDAPRINT
        Maintain Statement Trace
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        Additional Trace Settings
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Deploying Legacy Applications to the Web
        What Are the Differences Between Windows-Deployed and Web-Deployed Applications?
        Legacy Form Properties and Behavior
        Upgrading Legacy Windows Applications
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Maintain Language Reference
      Language Rules Reference
        Case Sensitivity
        Specifying Names
        Reserved Words
        What Can You Include in a Procedure?
        Multi-line Commands
        Terminating a Command's Syntax
        Adding Comments
      Expressions Reference
        Types of Expressions You Can Write
        Writing Numeric Expressions
        Writing Date Expressions
        Writing Date-Time Expressions
        Writing Character Expressions
        Writing Logical Expressions
        Writing Conditional Expressions
        Handling Null Values in Expressions
      Command Reference
        Language Summary
        BEGIN
        CALL
        CASE
        COMMIT
        COMPUTE
        COPY
        DECLARE
        DECRYPT
        DELETE
        DESCRIBE
        ENCRYPT / DECRYPT
        END
        EXEC
        FocCount
        FocCurrent
        FocError
        FocErrorRow
        FocFetch
        FocIndex
        FocMsg
        GOTO
        IF
        INCLUDE
        INFER
        MAINTAIN
        MATCH
        MNTCON CDN_FEXINPUT
        MNTCON COMPILE
        MNTCON EX
        MNTCON EXIT_WARNING
        MNTCON LOADIMAGE
        MNTCON MATCH_CASE
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        MNTCON RADIO_BUTTON_EMIT_TEXT
        MNTCON REMOTESTYLE
        MNTCON RUN
        MNTCON RUNIMAGE
        MODULE
        NEXT
        ON MATCH
        ON NEXT
        ON NOMATCH
        ON NONEXT
        PERFORM
        REPEAT
        REPOSITION
        REVISE
        ROLLBACK
        SAY
        SET
        STACK CLEAR
        STACK SORT
        SYS_MGR
        SYS_MGR.DBMS_ERRORCODE
        SYS_MGR.ENGINE
        SYS_MGR.FOCSET
        SYS_MGR.GET_INPUTPARAMS_COUNT
        SYS_MGR.GET_NAMEPARM
        SYS_MGR.GET_POSITIONPARM
        SYS_MGR.PRE_MATCH
        TYPE
        UPDATE
        Winform
      WebFOCUS Maintain Error Messages
        Error Message Listings
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster Development and Administration
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Processing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Features
      Enabling User Capabilities
        Accessing the ReportCaster User Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Library Management
      ReportCaster Security
        ReportCaster Credentials
        ReportCaster Security Settings
        Additional User IDs for Use With ReportCaster
        Configuring ReportCaster With External Authentication
        ReportCaster Remote Authentication
        Include Windows Domain Name With User ID for IWA
        File System Permissions
        Optional Encryption Providers for ReportCaster
      Configuring ReportCaster
        About Configuring ReportCaster
        Distribution Servers Settings
        Repository Settings
        Security Settings
        General Preferences Settings
        Email Settings
        FTP/SFTP Settings
        Zip Settings
        Other Schedule Defaults
        Log Settings
        Traces Settings
        Code Page Settings
        LDAP Settings
        Data Servers Settings
        Two Way Email Settings
        Report Library Settings
        Managed Reporting Settings
        Library Search Settings
        Customizing ReportCaster Plug-ins
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling ReportCaster Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        ReportCaster Repository Creation Tracing
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Tracing for ReportCaster
        Using the Java Console
      ReportCaster Administrative Tasks
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Globally Updating Repository Field Values
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      ReportCaster Repository Tables and Reports
        About Repository Reports
        ReportCaster Repository Tables
      Loading User IDs Into the ReportCaster Repository
        Using the Synchronize External Users Utility
        Using SQL Statements to Load ReportCaster User IDs and Groups
      Accessing ReportCaster and Enabling User Capabilities in the Applet
        Security Warning
        Accessing the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Creating a Schedule Using the ReportCaster Applet
        Overview
        Schedule Tab
        Creating a Task
        Specifying Distribution Options
        Specifying Optional and Notification Settings
      Maintaining Schedules in the ReportCaster Applet Interface
        Maintaining a Schedule
        Schedule Blackout Dates
      Tracking a Schedule in the Applet Interface
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Troubleshooting ReportCaster Log Reports
      Working With Distribution Lists in the ReportCaster Applet
        Distribution List Overview
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      ReportCaster Console Applet
        Accessing the ReportCaster Console
        ReportCaster Console Options
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        Viewing, Running, and Deleting a Scheduled Job
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Using the Log Option to View Information About a Distributed Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
        Globally Replacing Field Values in the ReportCaster Repository
        Logging Off the ReportCaster Console
        Accessing the Online Help File
      Using the Report Library From the Applet
        Using the Report Library
        Managing Users and Groups Using the Library Access List Interface
        Accessing Library Content
        Viewing Library Reports
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill-Through Support
        Library Management
      Using Change Management in the HTML Interface
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Using the Change Management Interface
      Configuring ReportCaster Using the Applet Tool
        About the ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool
        General Configuration Settings in the Applet
        LDAP Settings
        Data Server Settings in the Applet
        Two-Way Email Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Settings in the Applet
        Managed Reporting Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Integration With the Google Search Engine
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster End User's Manual
      Introducing ReportCaster
        Overview of ReportCaster
        The ReportCaster Development Interface
        Considerations When Using ReportCaster
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Using the Scheduling Wizard
        Overview
        Schedule Options
        Report Information
        Report Parameters
        Distribution Options in the Scheduling Wizard
        Priority, Notification, and Zip File Options
        Running a Schedule Without Saving It
      Working With Distribution Lists in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Distribution or Address Book List Interface
        Creating a Distribution or Address Book List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      Maintaining a Schedule Using the HTML User Interface
        About the Schedules Interface
        Editing a Schedule in the HTML User Interface
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Schedule Blackout Dates
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Using the Report Library from the HTML Interface
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Report Library
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill Through Support
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
      ReportCaster API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Troubleshooting API Samples
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        User Samples
        Credential Authentication
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Tables Accessed by the Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        ReportCaster Repository Tables Accessed by the Servlets
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Enable
    WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex User's Guide
      Introduction
        RIA Technologies
        About WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex
      Prerequisites and Download Instructions
        Software Prerequisites
        Downloading WebFOCUS Enable From Information Builders
        Compatibility Features
        Component Chart Licensing
        IBI NameSpace: Prefix for WebFOCUS Enable Components
      Custom Components and Properties
        About Components and Properties
        Component/Property Tables
        Customizing Component Properties
      Developing a WebFOCUS Enable Application
        Sample Application
        Application Basics
        Creating a Flex Project
        Creating an Input File in WebFOCUS Developer Studio
        Creating an Application Canvas
        Creating a Title for the Dashboard
        Adding Custom Animation
        Logically Organizing Content With the TabNavigator
        Binding a Procedure to the ibiDataGrid Using Custom Components
        Creating an Aggregated Grid Using Existing ibiDataGrid Data
        Creating a Filter
        Using the ibiDataGrid to Filter Other Components
        Creating a Pie Chart and Column Chart
        Adding a Tree Control, Combo Box, and Slider
        Compiling SWF Files
      Creating Other Charts
        Preparing the Layout and Adding the Charts
        Understanding Additional Chart Types
      Deploying an Application
        Deploying an Application in Managed Reporting Business Intelligence Dashboard
      Customizing WebFOCUS Enable Applications
        ibiDataGrid Customization Options
        Using Filters
        Customizing ibiChart Components
        Using IBI Custom Event Listeners and Functions
      Developing a Custom Logon Page and Managed Reporting View
        Building a Logon Page and Displaying the Domain Tree and Reports
        Developing a Custom Logon Page
      Using the WebFOCUS Enable API
        Initializing an Application
        Creating an Aggregated DataGrid
        Saggregate
        Filtering Details of the DataGrid From the List Box
        Filtering an Aggregated DataGrid From the List Box
        Creating a Pie Chart
      IBI Component for Google™ Maps API for Flash®
        ibiMap001 Features
      Building a Basic Dashboard
        Building the Dashboard
      Adding Styles to a Dashboard
        Creating Flex Style Codes
        Applying Styles to the ibiDataGrid
        Applying Styles to ibiColumnChart and ibiPieChart
        Creating Flex Functions
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Release Notes 2.0.0
  Visual Discovery
    Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components With Developer Studio
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Key Features
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server (Thin Client)
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Developing an Analytic Dashboard
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Distributing a Visual Discovery File With ReportCaster
        Working With Visual Discovery Components on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
      Tutorial: Building a Visual Discovery Analytic Dashboard
        Before You Begin
        Building an Analytic Dashboard With Visual Discovery Components
      Deploying Visual Discovery Applications
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for Server (Thin Client)
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Visualization Components: Descriptions and Usage
        What Is a Glyph?
        Bar Charts
        Line Charts
        Pie Charts
        Histograms
        Counts
        Data Constellations
        Data Constellation Maps
        Data Sheets
        Multiscapes
        Paraboxes
        Scatter Plots
        Summary Sheets
        Time Tables
        Perspectives
      Inserting Chart Controls Into a Visual Discovery Dashboard
        Building an Application With Advanced Chart Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Graphics
    WebFOCUS Graphics
      Graphing Basics
        What Is Scalable Vector Graphics?
        Viewing Scalable Vector Graphics
        Portable Network Graphics
        Virtual Coordinate System
        Implementing API Calls
      Using WebFOCUS Graphics
        How Properties and Methods Work
        The GraphType Property
        How Graphs Are Imaged
        Chart Layout Manager
        Graph-Wide Parameters
        Graph Frame Attributes
        Axis Attributes
        Grid Lines
        Curve Fit Lines
        Java 2D Line Objects
        Risers and Markers
        Legends
        Labels and Titles
        Data Text
        Customizing Data Text
        Formatting Numbers
        Formatting Text Objects
        Java 2D Text Objects
        Autofitting
        Graph-Specific Properties and Methods
        Colors and Shading
        Textures and Gradients
        Panning, Rotating, and Scaling
        Graph Editing Characteristics
        Annotations
        Drill-Down and URLs
        Multiple Drill-Down From Graph
        Alternate Formatting
        Beveled Borders
        Reference Lines
      Using Data in a Graph
        Graph Titles and Labels
        Data Scrolling and Zooming
        How Missing Data Is Handled
        Data Requirements for Different Graph Types
      Properties
        Properties for Graphs
        AdjustAutoScaleForRefLines
        AlignMultiYBars
        AltFmtFrameSeparator
        AltFmtFrameNumColors
        Autoshading
        AutoshadingWalls
        AxisTextAutofitMax
        AxisTextAutofitMin
        AxisTextAutofitMode
        AxisTextAutofitPercent
        BiDirectional
        BoxPlotType
        Cascade
        ColorMode
        ConnectLineMarkers
        ConnectParetoBars
        ConnectScatterMarkers
        CubeFocusFactor
        CubeIsometricProjection
        CubeLightSourceX
        CubeLightSourceY
        CubeLightSourceZ
        CubePanX
        CubePanY
        CubeProportional
        CubeRiserInterpolation
        CubeSizeX
        CubeSizeY
        CubeSizeZ
        CubeSquareRisers
        CubeTranslationX
        CubeTranslationY
        CubeTranslationZ
        CubeViewerX
        CubeViewerY
        CubeViewerZ
        CubeWallThickX
        CubeWallThickY
        CubeWallThickZ
        CubeZoomFactor
        CurveFitEquationDisplay
        CurveFitHighOrderFirst
        CurveFitNumSegments
        DataItemsAlongSeries
        DataLineThickness
        DataScrollerPresenceGroups
        DataScrollerPresenceSeries
        DataSortType
        DataTextAngleDefault
        DataTextDisplay
        DataTextFormat
        DataTextFormatPattern
        DataTextPosition
        DataTextRadiusDefault
        DataTextStackedTotalOnTop()
        DataTextTemplateBubble
        DataTextTemplateHiLo
        DataTextTemplateScatter
        DepthAngle
        DepthRadius
        Display3DFloor
        Display3DLeftWall
        Display3DRightWall
        DisplayBarAsPictograph
        DisplayFunnelGroup
        DisplayParetoSeries
        DocumentHeightInTwips
        DocumentWidthInTwips
        DrawAreaMarkers
        DrawCompleteAreaRiser
        DualAxisLineDisplay
        DualAxisSplitPosition
        ExactColorByHeight
        ExtendToFrameEdge
        FillMissingData
        FootnoteAutofit
        FootnoteDisplay
        FootnoteString
        ForceSeriesAbsolute
        FrameAutoShade
        FrameDisplay
        FunnelLabelValueLocation
        GaugeBackgroundStyle
        GaugeDescending
        GaugeIgnoreBackgroundStyle
        GaugeMajorAutoStep
        GaugeMajorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeMinorAutoStep
        GaugeMinorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeNeedleStyle
        GaugeRelativeInnerRadius
        GaugeRelativeThickness
        GaugeSizeMode
        GaugeStartAngle
        GaugeStopAngle
        GraphType
        Grid3DFloorDisplayX
        Grid3DFloorDisplayZ
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayY
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayZ
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayX
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayX
        Grid3DRiserDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayZ
        HiliteBarResize
        IgnoreGridSkip
        IgnoreTickSkip
        InterpretAsHLOC
        LegendAutomatic
        LegendDisplay
        LegendMarkerPosition
        LegendMarkersPerRow
        LegendOrient
        LegendReverse
        LegendScroll
        LegendSeriesCount
        LegendSeriesStart
        LegendTextAutofit
        MajorGridDrawEveryCount
        MajorGridTickInterval
        MinorGridTickInterval
        MarkerDisplay
        MarkerSizeDefault
        MoveAxisTitles
        NestedLabels
        NullLegendMarkerShapesAsSquares
        NumMissingDataSegments
        NumPieArcSegmentsPerPixel
        OtherPercentage
        OtherSeries
        OutputSVG
        OverDrawSkip
        O1AxisLineDisplay
        O1AxisSide
        O1ExcludeMaxLabel
        O1ExcludeMinLabel
        O1LabelAutoAngle
        O1LabelAutofit
        O1LabelAutoSkip
        O1LabelDisplay
        O1LabelMargin
        O1LabelRotate
        O1LabelSkipBegin
        O1LabelSkipCount
        O1LabelStagger
        O1LabelWrap
        O1MajorGridDisplay
        O1MajorGridStyle
        O1MajorTickDisplay
        O1MajorTickStyle
        O1MinorGridCount
        O1MinorGridDisplay
        O1MinorGridStyle
        O1MinorTickCount
        O1MinorTickDisplay
        O1MinorTickStyle
        O1TitleAutofit
        O1TitleDisplay
        O1TitleString
        O2ExcludeMaxLabel
        O2ExcludeMinLabel
        O2LabelAutofit
        O2LabelAutoSkip
        O2LabelDisplay
        O2LabelRotate
        O2LabelSkipBegin
        O2LabelSkipCount
        O2LabelWrap
        O2TitleAutofit
        O2TitleDisplay
        O2TitleString
        ParetoDisplayThreshold
        ParetoY2MajorGridStep
        ParetoY2MajorTickStep
        PieBarLabelDisplay
        PieBarLabelString
        PieBarSeries
        PieDepth
        PieFeelerTextDisplay
        PieFeelerTextFormat
        PieFeelerTextFormatPattern
        PieLabelDisplay
        PieRingSize
        PieRingTotalDisplay
        PieRingTotalFormat
        PieRingTotalFormatPattern
        PieRotate
        PieSorting
        PiesPerRow
        PieTilt
        Place
        PrimitiveAntialiasing
        QuadrantLineCountX
        QuadrantLineCountY
        ReferencePercentageMode
        ReferenceTextPosition
        RemoveDuplicateDataText
        RepositionDataTextCollision
        RepositionStackedDataTextCollision
        ReshapeEnable
        ResizeBarMode
        ReverseGroups
        ReverseSeries
        Riser3DThicknessY
        RiserBarGroupSpacing
        RiserBorderMode
        RiserWidth
        ScaleFromZero
        ScrollOffsetGroup
        ScrollOffsetSeries
        SelectionEnable
        SelectionEnableMove
        SeriesAreRows
        SeriesDefaultBorderColor
        SeriesDefaultTransparentBorderColor
        SeriesLineWidthDefault
        SeriesLooping
        ShadowXOffsetDefault
        ShadowYOffsetDefault
        SizeToContainer
        SmoothLines
        SquareMarkers
        StackedDataValueSum
        Stock52WeekHighDisplay
        Stock52WeekHighValue
        Stock52WeekLowDisplay
        Stock52WeekLowValue
        StockCandleForVolumeColor
        StockCloseSplitDisplay
        StockCloseTicksDisplay
        StockMovingAverageDisplay
        StockOpenTicksDisplay
        StockTickLength
        SubtitleAutofit
        SubtitleDisplay
        SubtitleString
        TextAntialiasing
        TextAutofitMax
        TextAutofitMin
        TitleAutofit
        TitleDisplay
        TitleString
        ToolTipDelay
        ToolTipDisplay
        ToolTipMode
        ToolTipTimeoutEnabled
        TransparentMarkers
        TransparentMarkerSize
        UseDefaultBubbleMarker
        UseOffScreen
        UseSeriesBorderDefaults
        UseSeriesShapes
        UseTimeScaleAxis
        ValidGroupsMin
        ValidSeriesMin
        ViewableGroups
        ViewableGroupsStock
        ViewableSeries
        ViewableSeriesStock
        Viewing3DAnglePreset
        WaterfallLastGroupTotal
        WaterfallStackColorMode
        X1AxisDescending
        X1AxisLineDisplay
        X1AxisSide
        X1ExcludeMaxLabel
        X1ExcludeMinLabel
        X1LabelAutofit
        X1LabelDisplay
        X1LabelFormat
        X1LabelFormatPattern
        X1LabelRotate
        X1LabelStagger
        X1LogScale
        X1MajorGridDisplay
        X1MajorGridStep
        X1MajorGridStepAuto
        X1MajorGridStyle
        X1MajorTickDisplay
        X1MajorTickStyle
        X1MinorGridDisplay
        X1MinorGridStep
        X1MinorGridStepAuto
        X1MinorGridStyle
        X1MinorTickDisplay
        X1MinorTickStyle
        X1MustIncludeZero
        X1OffScaleDisplay
        X1ScaleMax
        X1ScaleMaxAuto
        X1ScaleMin
        X1ScaleMinAuto
        X1TitleAutofit
        X1TitleDisplay
        X1TitleString
        X1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y1AxisDescending
        Y1AxisLineDisplay
        Y1AxisSide
        Y1ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y1ExcludeMinLabel
        Y1LabelAutofit
        Y1LabelDisplay
        Y1LabelFormat
        Y1LabelFormatPattern
        Y1LabelRotate
        Y1LabelStagger
        Y1LogScale
        Y1MajorGridDisplay
        Y1MajorGridStep
        Y1MajorGridStepAuto
        Y1MajorGridStyle
        Y1MajorTickDisplay
        Y1MajorTickStyle
        Y1MinorGridDisplay
        Y1MinorGridStepAuto
        Y1MinorGridStyle
        Y1MinorTickDisplay
        Y1MinorTickStepAuto
        Y1MinorTickStyle
        Y1MustIncludeZero
        Y1OffScaleDisplay
        Y1ScaleMax
        Y1ScaleMaxAuto
        Y1ScaleMin
        Y1ScaleMinAuto
        Y1TitleAutofit
        Y1TitleDisplay
        Y1TitleString
        Y1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y2AxisDescending
        Y2AxisLineDisplay
        Y2AxisSide
        Y2ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y2ExcludeMinLabel
        Y2LabelAutofit
        Y2LabelDisplay
        Y2LabelFormat
        Y2LabelFormatPattern
        Y2LabelRotate
        Y2LabelStagger
        Y2LogScale
        Y2MajorGridDisplay
        Y2MajorGridStep
        Y2MajorGridStepAuto
        Y2MajorGridStyle
        Y2MinorGridDisplay
        Y2MinorGridStep
        Y2MinorGridStepAuto
        Y2MinorGridStyle
        Y2MustIncludeZero
        Y2OffScaleDisplay
        Y2ScaleMax
        Y2ScaleMaxAuto
        Y2ScaleMin
        Y2ScaleMinAuto
        Y2TitleAutofit
        Y2TitleDisplay
        Y2TitleString
        Y2ZeroLineDisplay
        Y3AxisDescending
        Y3LogScale
        Y3ZeroLineDisplay
        Y4AxisDescending
        Y4LogScale
        Y4ZeroLineDisplay
        Y5AxisDescending
        Y5LogScale
        Y5ZeroLineDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextStackedTotalOnTopDisplay
        ZoomDirection
        ZoomPercentage
      Methods
        get Methods
        restore Methods
        save()
        send Methods
        set Methods
      Methods That Return an Object ID
        Object ID Methods
        getAllSeries()
        getAnnotation()
        getAnnotationBox()
        getAnnotationLabel()
        getAnnotationLine()
        getAreaRiser()
        getAreaRiserBottom()
        getAreaRiserTop()
        getBarRiser()
        getBarRiserBottom()
        getBarRiserSide()
        getChartBackground()
        getColorByHeight()
        getCubeFloor()
        getCubeFloorGridX()
        getCubeFloorGridZ()
        getCubeLeftWall()
        getCubeLeftWallGridY()
        getCubeLeftWallGridZ()
        getCubeRightWall()
        getCubeRightWallGridX()
        getCubeRightWallGridZ()
        getCubeRiserFace()
        getCubeRiserGridX()
        getCubeRiserGridY()
        getCubeRiserGridZ()
        getCurveFitCorrelationText()
        getCurveFitCorrelationTextbox()
        getCurveFitEquationText()
        getCurveFitEquationTextbox()
        getCurveFitLineRiser()
        getDataText()
        getExceptionalRiser()
        getFootnote()
        getFootnoteBox()
        getFrame()
        getFrameBottom()
        getFrameSeparator()
        getFrameSide()
        getFunnelCrust()
        getFunnelFeeler()
        getFunnelLabel()
        getFunnelValueLabel()
        getGaugeArea()
        getGaugeBackground()
        getGaugeBand1...5()
        getGaugeBand1...5Label()
        getGaugeLabel()
        getGaugeMajorTick()
        getGaugeMinorTick()
        getGaugeNeedle()
        getGaugeScaleArea()
        getGaugeTitle()
        getGlobal()
        getGroup()
        getGroupScroller()
        getGroupScrollerEditBox()
        getGroupScrollerEditLeft()
        getGroupScrollerEditRight()
        getGroupScrollerEditThumb()
        getGroupScrollerThumb()
        getHistogramRiser()
        getLegendArea()
        getLegendMarker()
        getLegendScroller()
        getLegendScrollerThumb()
        getLegendText()
        getLegendTextBox()
        getLineMarker()
        getLineRiser()
        getLineRiserSide()
        getLineRiserTop()
        getNestedO1Label0...8()
        getNestedO1Label0...8Box()
        getNestedO1LabelLine()
        getNonZeroBaseLineZeroLine()
        getO1Axis()
        getO1AxisLine()
        getO1Label()
        getO1MajorGrid()
        getO1MajorTick()
        getO1MinorGrid()
        getO1MinorTick()
        getO1Title()
        getO1TitleBox()
        getO2Axis()
        getO2Label()
        getO2MajorGrid()
        getO2MinorGrid()
        getO2Title()
        getO2TitleBox()
        getParetoLineMarker()
        getParetoLineRiser()
        getParetoLineRiserSide()
        getParetoLineRiserSide1()
        getParetoLineRiserSide2()
        getParetoLineRiserTop()
        getParetoLineRiserTop1()
        getParetoLineRiserTop2()
        getPieBarConnectLineBottom()
        getPieBarConnectLines()
        getPieBarLabel()
        getPieBarRiserTop()
        getPieBarSlice()
        getPieBarSliceCrust()
        getPieFeelerLine()
        getPieFrame()
        getPieLabel()
        getPieRingLabel()
        getPieSliceFeelerPercent()
        getPieSliceFeelerValue()
        getPieSliceLabel()
        getPlaceHorzO1LabelsTitle()
        getPlaceVertO1LabelsTitle()
        getQuadrantLine()
        getReferenceLine()
        getReferenceLineLegendText()
        getReferenceLineO1()
        getReferenceLineO2()
        getReferenceLineX1()
        getReferenceLineY1()
        getReferenceLineY2()
        getReferenceLineTextO1()
        getReferenceLineTextO2()
        getReferenceLineTextX1()
        getReferenceLineTextY1()
        getReferenceLineTextY2()
        getScatterQuadrantLine()
        getSeries()
        getSeriesGroup()
        getSeriesScroller()
        getSeriesScrollerEditBox()
        getSeriesScrollerEditLeft()
        getSeriesScrollerEditRight()
        getSeriesScrollerEditThumb()
        getSeriesScrollerThumb()
        getSlice()
        getSliceCrust()
        getSliceRing()
        getSpectralLegendMarker()
        getSpectralMarker()
        getStackConnectLine()
        getStock52WeekHighLine()
        getStock52WeekLowLine()
        getStockCloseTick()
        getStockFallingRiser()
        getStockHighLine()
        getStockLowerRiser()
        getStockLowLine()
        getStockMALine()
        getStockOpenTick()
        getStockRiser()
        getStockRisingRiser()
        getStockVolumeRiser()
        getSubTitle()
        getSubTitleBox()
        getThermGaugeArea()
        getThermGaugeBackground()
        getThermGaugeNeedle()
        getTimeScaleLevel()
        getTitle()
        getTitleBox()
        getWaterFallLine()
        getX1Axis()
        getX1AxisLine()
        getX1Label()
        getX1MajorGrid()
        getX1MajorTick()
        getX1MinorGrid()
        getX1MinorTick()
        getX1Title()
        getX1TitleBox()
        getX1ZeroLine()
        getY1Axis()
        getY1AxisLine()
        getY1FrontZeroLine()
        getY1Label()
        getY1MajorGrid()
        getY1MajorTick()
        getY1MinorGrid()
        getY1MinorTick()
        getY1Title()
        getY1TitleBox()
        getY1ZeroLine()
        getY2Axis()
        getY2AxisLine()
        getY2FrontZeroLine()
        getY2Label()
        getY2MajorGrid()
        getY2MajorTick()
        getY2MinorGrid()
        getY2MinorTick()
        getY2Title()
        getY2TitleBox()
        getY2ZeroLine()
        getY3Axis()
        getY3AxisLine()
        getY3FrontZeroLine()
        getY3Label()
        getY3MajorGrid()
        getY3MajorTick()
        getY3MinorGrid()
        getY3MinorTick()
        getY3Title()
        getY3TitleBox()
        getY3ZeroLine()
        getY4Axis()
        getY4AxisLine()
        getY4Label()
        getY4MajorGrid()
        getY4MajorTick()
        getY4MinorGrid()
        getY4MinorTick()
        getY4Title()
        getY4TitleBox()
        getY4ZeroLine()
        getY5Axis()
        getY5AxisLine()
        getY5Label()
        getY5MajorGrid()
        getY5MajorTick()
        getY5MinorGrid()
        getY5MinorTick()
        getY5Title()
        getY5TitleBox()
        getY5ZeroLine()
      Graph Types and 3D Preset Viewing Angles
        Graph Types
        3D Preset Viewing Angles
      Graph Properties Index
        Current Graph Properties
        Graph Properties Reserved For Future Use
        Graph Properties Reserved for Internal Use
      Graph Methods Index
        Current Graph Methods
        Reserved for Future Use
        Reserved for Internal Use
      IdentObj Methods Index
        Current IndentObj Methods
        IndentObj Methods Reserved for Future Use
      Static Variables
        Current Static Variables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems: ESRI ArcGIS Server and ArcGIS Flex API
      Introducing Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Geographic Information Systems
        Defining the Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
        GBIS Components
        New Features
      WebFOCUS GIS Adapter Architecture
        XML-based Configuration Blocks
        Orientation Modes
      Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        Creating a Map Service
      Using the WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer Components
        WebFOCUS Map Component
        WebFOCUS Report Component
        Synthetic Layer Component
        WebFOCUS Data View Component
        JavaScript Functions Available From Flexmapviewer.jsp
      Creating WebFOCUS GIS Procedures
        Incorporating the GIS Filter
        Creating a Report Procedure
        Creating an Identify Procedure
        Creating a Map Procedure
      Useful Techniques and Examples
        Creating Drill-Downs From a Report to a Map
        Drawing Multiple Map Layers
        Transitioning Between Map Images
        Including Custom Libraries
        Embedding Custom JavaScript Functions in the ESRIINFO.XML File
        Directing Alternate Report Output to Different Windows
        Specifying Custom Colors in Your FOCEXEC
        Automatically Zooming On Selected Portions of the Map
        Automatically Zooming On Features of the Map That Were Drawn
        Controlling the Visible Map Viewing Area
        Controlling Layers That Are Visible
        Increasing the Maximum Number of Selectable Map Features
        Improving Map and Report Response Time
        Specifying Default Drawing Methods for Additional Features on the Map
        Describing and Working With a Synthetic Layer
        Defining a Tiled Map Service
        Loading the Flex Map Viewer
        Using Symbols Defined in Your Configuration File
        Controlling Layers That are Visible
        Enabling a Buffer Using Selected Features From the Layer
      Glossary of Related Terms
        A-E
        F-H
        I-L
        M-Q
        R-T
        U-X
      XML Schema Reference
        Root Element <mapfexs>
        Class Definitions
        Constants
      Symbol Class Settings and Parameters
        SimpleLineSymbol
        SimplePolygonSymbol
        SimpleMarkerSymbol
        RasterMarkerSymbol
        TrueTypeMarkerSymbol
        CallOutMarkerSymbol
        TextMarkerSymbol
      HTML Color Values
        Color Value Table
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Web Services
    WebFOCUS Web Services
      WebFOCUS Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using WebFOCUS Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
        WebFOCUS Web Services Architecture
      Using the WebFOCUS WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating WSDL Files With the WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating a Generic WSDL File for an Application
        Creating a WebFOCUS Report as a Web Service Function
        Creating a Managed Reporting Report as a Web Service Function
        Choosing Functions for a WSDL File
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service With Apache Axis
      WebFOCUS Web Service Structures
        Structures
      WebFOCUS Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Managed Reporting Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
        Debugging WebFOCUS Web Services Adapter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Web Services
      ReportCaster Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using ReportCaster Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
      Using the ReportCaster WSDL Creation Utility
        WSDL Creation Utility Overview
        Creating a WSDL File for a ReportCaster Web Service
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service in Java
      ReportCaster Web Service Structures
        Structures
      ReportCaster Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Address Book Service Functions
        Logon Function
        Library Access Service Functions
        Library Content Service Functions
        Console Service Functions
        Log Service Functions
        User Service Functions
        Schedule Service Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting ReportCaster Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  WebFOCUS API
    WebFOCUS API Developer's Reference
      Introduction to WebFOCUS API
        Introducing WebFOCUS API
        Installation Requirements for the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API at a Glance
        Components of the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API Packages and Classes
        WebFOCUS Request Processing
      WebFOCUS API Functionality
        Managed Reporting Authentication
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Authentication
        Running a WebFOCUS Server Procedure
        Running a Managed Reporting Standard Report
        Running a Managed Reporting My Report
        Getting a List of Domains
        Getting a List of Domains for a Particular User
        Getting a List of Users
        User Flags
      WebFOCUS API Samples
        Elements of the WebFOCUS API Sample Application
        WebFOCUS API Sample Web Application Structure
        Sample Java Files
      Troubleshooting
        Debugging a WebFOCUS API Application
        WebFOCUS Error Codes
        Managed Reporting Error Codes
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Installation and Configuration
    Server Installation WebFOCUS Reporting Server DataMigrator Server
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for IBM i
    Developer Studio Installation and Configuration
  Reporting Server Administration
    Server Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, i5/OS, and z/OS
      Introduction
        Using the Web Console
        My Console Options
        Configuration Overview
        Running and Configuring the FOCUS Database Server (z/OS Only)
        Server Profiles
        Profile Commands
      Server Security
        Server Security Overview
        Configuring Authentication
        Configuring Privileges and Other Authorizations
        Configuring Server Encryption
        Access to Connection Information in WebFOCUS Procedures
      Configuring Adapters
        Configuring an Adapter
        Changing the Adapter Configuration
      Configuring a Remote Server
      Creating and Working With Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Allocation for UNIX and z/OS UNIX System Services
        Temporary File Directory Structure for Non-PDS Deployment
      Managing Metadata
        Creating Synonyms
        Testing Synonyms
        Managing Synonyms
      Creating and Working With Procedures
        Creating a Stored Procedure
        Editing a Stored Procedure
        Running a Stored Procedure
        Scheduling a Procedure
        Sending an Email Notification for a Procedure
        Stress Testing a Procedure
        Running Impact Analysis Reports
      Running and Monitoring Your Server
        Configuring Workspace Manager
        Workspace Configuration Settings
        Editing Configuration Files
        Fine-Tuning the Server
        Monitoring Server Activity
      Managing Listeners and Special Services
        Using the Listeners and Special Services Configuration Panes
      Troubleshooting
        Viewing Version Information
        Analyzing Server Activity
        Analyzing FOCUS Database Server Activity
        Tracing Server Activity
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for the Unified Server
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for USS/HFS Deployment
        Retrieving IBISNAP Output
        Recording and Reproducing User Actions
        Troubleshooting the Console
        Workspace Manager Safe Mode
        Server Processes
        Gathering Diagnostic Information for Customer Support
      Unicode Support
        Unicode and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Accessing Unicode Data
        Selecting, Reformatting, and Manipulating Characters
        Sort Order Under Unicode
        Added Unicode Support for Master Files, Data Files, and Application Directory Names
        Unicode PDF Output
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Adapter Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, i5/OS, and z/OS
      Introduction to Adapters
        Processing Requests
        Functions of an Adapter
        Data Management
        Metadata Services With SQLENGINE SET
        Additional Master File Attributes
      Using the Adapter for 1010data
        Configuring the Adapter for 1010data
        Managing 1010data Metadata
        Customizing the 1010data Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Adabas
        Preparing the Adabas Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas
        Adabas Overview
        Managing Adabas Metadata
        Overview of Master and Access Files
        Master Files for Adabas
        Access Files for Adabas
        Mapping Adabas Descriptors
        Mapping Adabas Files With Variable-Length Records and Repeating Fields
        Using the GROUP Attribute to Cross-Reference Files
        Platform-Specific Functionality
        Customizing the Adabas Environment
        Adabas Reporting Considerations
        Adabas Writing Considerations
        Adapter Navigation
        Entry Segment Retrieval of Adabas Records
        Descendant Periodic Groups and Multi-Value Fields
        Descendant Adabas Records
      Using the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Preparing the Adabas Stored Procedures Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Managing Adabas Stored Procedure Metadata
        Invoking an Adabas Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Caché
        Preparing the Caché Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Caché
        Managing Caché Metadata
        Customizing the Caché Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Managing CICS Transaction Metadata
        Invoking a CICS Transaction
        Running a TPG/SPG/AAS Transaction
      Using the Adapters for C-ISAM and ISAM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter
        Managing C-ISAM Metadata
        Maintaining C-ISAM Data Sources Using SQL Commands
        Using a Secondary Index in C-ISAM and ISAM Files
      Using the Adapter for DATACOM
        Preparing the DATACOM Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DATACOM
        DATACOM Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing DATACOM Metadata
        Master Files for DATACOM
        Access Files for DATACOM
        Describing Multi-File Structures for DATACOM
        Data Retrieval Logic for DATACOM
      Using the Adapter for DB2
        Preparing the DB2 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB2
        Managing DB2 Metadata
        Reporting Against a DB2 Stored Procedure
        Customizing the DB2 Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Using DB2 Cube Views
        Calling a DB2 Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Preparing the DB Heritage Files Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Managing DB Heritage Files Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Multi-Format Logical Files
        DB Heritage Files Record Selection Efficiencies
      Using the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Preparing the Web Application Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Managing Enterprise Java Beans Metadata
      Using the Adapter for ERwin
        Preparation Steps for ERwin
        Configuring the Adapter for ERwin
        Enhancing Synonyms With ERwin Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Essbase
        Preparing the Essbase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Essbase
        Managing Essbase Metadata
        Customizing the Essbase Environment
        Essbase Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Modifying Essbase Data
      Using the Adapter for Excel
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel
        Managing Excel Metadata
        Customizing the Excel Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Managing Metadata for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
      Using the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Preparing the HP Neoview Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Managing HP Neoview Metadata
        Customizing the HP Neoview Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/DB
        Preparing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing IDMS/DB Metadata
        Master Files for IDMS/DB
        Access Files for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Sample File Descriptions
        File Retrieval
        Record Retrieval
        Customizing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Tracing the Adapter for IDMS/DB
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/SQL
        Preparing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/SQL
        Managing IDMS/SQL Metadata
        Customizing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for IMS
        IMS Environments: Overview
        Preparing the IMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS
        Managing IMS Metadata
        Master File Attributes
        Access File Attributes (DBCTL)
        Migrating From an Existing MVS Server (DBCTL)
        WebFOCUS Reporting With IMS
        Maintaining IMS Data Sources (DBCTL)
      Using the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Preparing the IMS Transactions Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Managing IMS Transactions Metadata
        Invoking an IMS Transaction
        Invoking an IMS Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Information Manager
        IBM Information/Management
        How the Server Works With Information/Management
        InfoMan Hardware and Software Requirements
        Configuring the Adapter for InfoMan
        Defining the Adapter for InfoMan User ID and Session ID
        InfoMan Access Control
        Server Security in InfoMan
        IBM Information/Management Database Security
        AUTOIMAN Configuration File
        Describing InfoMan Data Sources
        Executing AUTOIMAN
        Working With AUTOIMAN
        Master File Generation Facility in InfoMan
        PIDT Selection Panel in InfoMan
        Retrieval PIDT Name Confirmation in InfoMan
      Using the Adapter for Informix
        Preparing the Informix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Informix
        Managing Informix Metadata
        Customizing the Informix Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Informix Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Ingres
        Preparing the Ingres Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Ingres
        Managing Ingres Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Interplex
        Preparing the Interplex Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Interplex
        Managing Interplex Metadata
        Customizing the Interplex Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for iWay Adapter Framework (IWAF)
        Preparing the IWAF Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IWAF
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for JDBC
        Preparing the JDBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JDBC
        Managing JDBC Metadata
        Customizing the JDBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Preparing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Environment
        Overview of the Setup Process
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Creating Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Refreshing the Metadata Repository
        Refresh Security Extracts
        Converting Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Setting the UDCDIC Environment Variable (Windows only)
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Installation Prerequisites
        Overview of the Set Up Process
        Enabling JD Edwards World Security
        Enabling Tracing
        Frequently Asked Questions
      Using the Adapter for Lawson
        Adapter for Lawson: Overview
        Configuring the Adapter for Lawson
        Preparing the Lawson Environment
        Managing Lawson Metadata
        Updating Lawson Security Information
      Using the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Preparing the Lotus Notes Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Managing Lotus Notes Metadata
      Using the Adapter for LDAP
        Preparing the LDAP Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for LDAP
        Managing LDAP Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Preparing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Managing Microsoft Access Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Preparing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Managing MetaMatrix Metadata
        Customizing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
        Microsoft SQL Server Compatibility With ODBC
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
      Using the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Server Environment for Millennium
        Configuring the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Millennium Environment
        Managing Millennium Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Millennium Data Source
      Using the Adapter for Model 204
        Preparing the Model 204 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Model 204
        Model 204 Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Model 204 Metadata
        Master Files for Model 204
        Access Files for Model 204
        Customizing the Model 204 Environment
        Using Customized Security Exits
        Adapter Tracing for Model 204
      Using the Adapter for MQSeries
        Preparing the MQSeries Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MQSeries
        Managing MQSeries Metadata
        Customizing the MQSeries Environment
      Using the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Preparing the Mumps Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Managing Mumps Metadata
        Including Records in a Mumps Data Source
      Using the Adapter for MySQL
        Preparing the MySQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MySQL
        Managing MySQL Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the MySQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL
        Preparing the NATURAL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL
        Managing Metadata for NATURAL
        Invoking a NATURAL Program
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Installing NATURAL Support Programs
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Managing NATURAL CICS Transactions Metadata
        NATURAL Data Buffer Processing API
        Invoking a NATURAL CICS Transaction
      Using the Adapter for Netezza
        Preparing the Netezza Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Netezza
        Managing Netezza Metadata
        Customizing the Netezza Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Nucleus
        Preparing the Nucleus Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Nucleus
        Managing Nucleus Metadata
        Customizing the Nucleus Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for ODBC
        Preparing the ODBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for ODBC
        Managing ODBC Metadata
        Customizing the ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Oracle
        Preparing the Oracle Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle
        Managing Oracle Metadata
        Reporting Against an Oracle Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Oracle Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Oracle Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Preparing the Oracle E-Business Suite Environment
        Data Access and Security
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Maintaining Security Rules
      Using the Adapter for parAccel
        Configuring the Adapter for parAccel
        Managing parAccel Metadata
      Using the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Managing PeopleSoft Metadata
        Managing PeopleSoft Secured Data Access
        Managing Connections to PeopleSoft
        Using Administrative Utilities
        Migrating from 7.1x and 7.6.x to 7.7
        Advanced Administrative Topics
      Using the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Preparing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Managing PostgreSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Progress
        Preparing the Progress Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Progress
        Managing Progress Metadata
        Customizing the Progress Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for PSQL
        Preparing the PSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PSQL
        Managing PSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Query/400
        Preparing the Adapter for Query/400 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Query/400
        Managing Query/400 Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Rdb
        Preparing the Rdb Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Rdb
        Managing Rdb Metadata
        Using Multiple Rdb DBMS Files
        Using Multischema Rdb DBMS Files
        Rdb Database Driver Performance
      Using the Adapter for Red Brick
        Preparing the Red Brick Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Red Brick
        Managing Red Brick Metadata
        Customizing the Red Brick Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Remote Servers
        Configuring Remote Servers
        Managing Metadata for Remote Servers
        Executing Stored Procedures
      Using the Adapter for RMS
        Preparing the RMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for RMS
        Managing RMS Metadata
        Manually Describing RMS Files
        Describing Complex RMS Keyed
        Associating an RMS Data Source to a Master File
        Retrieving Data From RMS Files
        Syntax for RMS Master File Attributes
        RMS Attribute Summary
        Read/Write Usage Limitations of the Adapter for RMS
      Using the Adapter for SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (BW)
        Preparing the SAP BW Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP BW
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Creating BEx Queries
        SAP BW Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Managing SAP BW Metadata
        Customization Settings
        Support for BEx Structures
        Producing SAP BW Requests Using SQL
      Using the Adapter for SAP
        Preparing the SAP Environment
        Accessing Multiple SAP Systems
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP
        Post-Configuration Tasks in an SAP Environment
        Managing SAP Metadata
        SAP Table Class Support for an Individual Table
        SAP Support for a Function Module
        SAP Data Type Support
        SAP Open/SQL Support
        Advanced SAP Features
        Setting Up the Report Processing Mode
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Producing SAP Requests
      Using the Adapter for Siebel
        Software Requirements for the Adapter for Siebel
        Preparing the Siebel Environment
        Preparing the Server Environment for Adapter Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for Siebel
        Managing Siebel Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQLBase
        Preparing the SQLBase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQLBase
        Managing SQLBase Metadata
        Customizing the SQLBase Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
        Preparing the SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services
        Managing SQL Server Analysis Services Metadata
        Customizing the SQL Server Analysis Services Environment
        SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Supra
        Preparing the Supra Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Supra
        Supra Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Supra Metadata
        Supra Modules
        Adapter Tracing
      Using the Adapter for Sybase
        Preparing the Sybase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Sybase
        Managing Sybase Metadata
        Reporting Against a Sybase Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Sybase Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Sybase Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Teradata
        Preparing the Teradata Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Teradata
        Managing Teradata Metadata
        Reporting Against a Teradata Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Teradata Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Teradata Macro or Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Transoft
        Preparing the Transoft Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Transoft
        Managing Transoft Metadata
        Customizing the Transoft Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniData
        Preparing the UniData Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniData
        Managing UniData Metadata
        Customizing the UniData Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniVerse
        Preparing the UniVerse Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniVerse
        Managing UniVerse Metadata
        Customizing the UniVerse Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for VSAM
        Preparing the Environment for VSAM
        Configuring the Adapter for VSAM
        Managing VSAM Metadata
        Associating a VSAM Data Source With a Master File
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a VSAM Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
        Maintaining VSAM KSDS Data Sources
        Using VSAM Relative Record Data Set (RRDS) Files
        Reviewing SQL Updates to VSAM Data Sources
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Using the Adapter for XBRL
        What Is XBRL?
        Configuring the Adapter for XBRL
        Reporting Against XBRL Instance Documents
        Reporting on Dimensions
      Using the Adapter for XML
        Preparing the XML Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for XML
        Managing XML Metadata
      XA Support
        XA Transaction Management
        Supported Interfaces
        Implementation
        Vendor Specifics
      Aggregate Awareness Support
        Relational Adapters and Aggregated SQL Queries
        Aggregate Awareness in an RDBMS
      Cluster Join
        Embedded Joins
        Embedded Join Master Files
      Translating COBOL File Descriptions
        Creating Synonyms From COBOL File Descriptions
        Controlling the Translation of a COBOL File Description
      Data Set Compression Exit: ZCOMP
        Invoking the ZCOMP Exit
        What Happens When ZCOMP is LOADED?
      Dynamic Private User Exit
        FOCSAM and the GETPRV User Exit
        Physical Implementation of the GETPRV Exit
        Master File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Access File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Calling Parameters and Work Areas
      Validation for Special Characters and Reserved Words
        Validation for Special Characters
        Validation for Reserved Words
      Launch PDF
  DataMigrator
    iWay DataMigrator User's Guide
      Introduction to DataMigrator
        Data Management and Migration Overview
        What Is DataMigrator?
        DataMigrator Architecture
        DataMigrator Server
        DataMigrator Data Management Console
        Server Web Console
        Designing Data Flows and Process Flows
        Revised Functionality
        Getting Help
        iWay Software on the Web
      Setting Up DataMigrator
        DataMigrator Setup At a Glance
        Remote Server Setup At a Glance
        DataMigrator Setup
        Initiating Server Administration Tasks
        Authorizing DataMigrator Server Usage and Administration
        Managing Application Directories and Configuring the Application Path
        Configuring Data Adapters
        Creating Metadata
        Testing Sample Data and Process Flows
        Performing Server Administration Tasks
        Upgrading DataMigrator From Release 4.3 or 5.1
        Upgrading DataMigrator from Release 5.2, 5.3, 7.1, or 7.6
      Planning a DataMigrator Application
        Designing Your Application
        Using Synonyms for Data Sources and Data Targets
        Reviewing Your Data Sources
        Reviewing Your Data Targets
        Establishing Security for DataMigrator
      Working in the Data Management Console
        Data Management Console Interface
        Navigation Pane
        DataMigrator Workspace
        Text Editor
        Main Menu
        Toolbars
        Text Editor Toolbar
        Console Log
        Setting Flow Properties
        Viewing Properties
        Setting User Preferences
        User Privileges
        License Code
        Configuring National Language Support
        Ending a Data Management Console Session
      Designing a Data Flow
        The Data Flow Interface
        Simple Data Flow at a Glance
        Complex Data Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Data Flow
        Specifying Data Sources
        Creating a Source Transformation in a Data Source Object
        Joining Data Sources
        Adding a SELECT to a Data Flow
        Adding a UNION to a Data Flow
        Selecting Columns
        Testing the SQL Statement
        Specifying Filters in a Data Flow
        Specifying Sorts
        Selecting a Data Target
        Specifying Data Target Options
        Mapping Transformations
        Using Variables in a Flow
        Using Functions
        Column Formats and Mapping
        Setting Properties of a Flow
        Running a Data Flow
        Creating a Direct Load Flow
        Creating a DBMS SQL Flow
      Designing a Process Flow
        Process Flow Methodology
        Process Flow Interface
        Simple Process Flow At a Glance
        Complex Process Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Process Flow
        Adding a Saved Procedure to a Process Flow
        Assigning and Using Variables in a Process Flow
        Maintaining Continuous Processing in a Single Agent
        Executing a Process Flow That Contains Only Stored Procedures
        Adding E-Mail Messages to a Process Flow
        Setting Connection Logic
        Grouping and Controlling Simultaneous Execution of Flows
        Running a Process Flow
        Scheduling a Process Flow
      Tutorial: Creating Data and Process Flows With DataMigrator
        What You Are Going To Do
        Startup and Setup Tasks
        Exercise 1: Creating the Data Flow
        Selecting and Joining Data Sources
        Selecting and Managing Columns
        Adding Data Targets
        Submitting the Data Flow
        Data Flow Review
        Exercise 2: Creating the Process Flow
        Starting the Process Flow
        Adding a Data Flow Object to the Process Flow
        Branching in the Process Flow
        Submitting the Process Flow
      Generating Reports, Viewing the Log File, and Printing Flows
        DataMigrator Log, Statistics, and Summary Flow Reports
        Scheduler Reports
        Impact Analysis Reports on Synonyms, Procedures and Columns
        Working With a Report
        Viewing a Detailed Flow Report and Log File
        Printing a Graphical Representation of a Data or Process Flow
      Optimizing Performance
        Improving Data Extraction Performance
        Using Automatic Passthru
        Improving Data Loading Performance
        Improving Lookup Performance
      Working With Synonyms
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Using Variables in a Synonym
        Variables Attribute Summary
        Use a Variable in a Synonym
        Creating, Enhancing, and Editing Synonyms Using Modeling View
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Viewing Data Lineage for a Column
      Advanced DataMigrator Tips and Techniques
        Overview of Examples
        Creating Sample Data and Metadata
        Horizontal Partitioning with Multi-Table Load
        Using the Decode Function
        Generating a Surrogate Key
        Generating a Surrogate Key Using Slowly Changing Dimensions
        Mapping to a Sequential File of a Specific Format
        Creating and Using Reusable Transformations
        Creating a Target File With Multiple RECTYPEs
        Combining Multiple Sources Rows in a Single Target Row
        Using Lookups to Create Multi-Table Flows Without Joins
        Record Logging
        Using Variables in Data Flows
        Creating a Data Flow Using a Target Based on a Predefined XML Schema
        Loading a Target Table Using the File Listener
        Loading a Star Schema
        Iterating Through Multiple Tables
      Change Data Capture
        Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture
      DataMigrator Log Statistics and Tables
        Log and Statistics Tables
      Event-Based Scheduling
        Starting Flows With CMRUN
        Starting Flows With CMASAP
        Starting Flows With Your Own API Program
        Starting Flows From FOCUS
        Determining the Status of an Event-Based Flow
      Problems, Errors, and Troubleshooting
        DataMigrator Status Codes and Server Messages
        Server Run-Time Error Codes
        DataMigrator Management Problem Resolution
        Including Run-Time Messages in the ETL Log
        Performing a Trace to Diagnose Server Problems
      Customizing Your Environment
        DataMigrator Parameters
      Source Management
        Overview of Source Management
        Source Control Security Server and Client Setup
        Configuring Source Management and Setting Up Source Control
        Using a Source Control System to Manage Procedures and Synonyms
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Functions Reference
      Functions Overview
        Function Arguments
        Function Categories
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Character Functions
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a Character String
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as a Binary Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to a Decimal Value
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a Character String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
        LCWORD: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-justifying a Character String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing a Character String
        RJUST: Right-justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in an Indexed Field
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date and Date-Time Functions
        Overview
        Date and Time Components For Date and Date-Time Functions
        Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Obtaining the Financial Year and Quarter
        Date-Time Functions
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Timestamp Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date to a Timestamp
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time as a Timestamp
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Timestamp
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Timestamp to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Timestamp Date or Time Component as Alphanumeric Value
        HPART: Retrieving a Timestamp Date or Time Component as Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-time Value
        Legacy Date Functions
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months To or From a Date
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days To or From a Date
        CHGDAT: Changing the Format of a Date
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Value to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Number from Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising 'e' to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Close All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        PUTDDREC: Write a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
      SQL Character Functions
        CHAR_LENGTH: Finding the Length of a Character String
        CONCAT: Concatenating Two Character Strings
        DIGITS: Converting a Numeric Value to a Character String
        EDIT: Editing a Value According to a Format (SQL)
        LCASE: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        LTRIM: Removing Leading Spaces
        POSITION: Finding the Position of a Substring
        RTRIM: Removing Trailing Spaces
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring From a String Value (SQL)
        TRIM: Removing Leading or Trailing Characters (SQL)
        UCASE: Converting a Character String to Uppercase
        VARGRAPHIC: Converting to Double-byte Character Data
      SQL Date and Time Functions
        CURRENT_DATE: Obtaining the Date
        CURRENT_TIME: Obtaining the Time
        CURRENT_TIMESTAMP: Obtaining the Timestamp (Date/Time)
        DAY: Obtaining the Day of the Month From a Date/Timestamp
        DAYS: Obtaining the Number of Days Since January 1, 1900
        EXTRACT: Obtaining a Datetime Field From Date/Time/Timestamp
        HOUR: Obtaining the Hour From Time/Timestamp
        MICROSECOND: Obtaining Microseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MILLISECOND: Obtaining Milliseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MINUTE: Obtaining the Minute From Time/Timestamp
        MONTH: Obtaining the Month From Date/Timestamp
        SECOND: Obtaining the Second Field From Time/Timestamp
        YEAR: Obtaining the Year From Date/Timestamp
      SQL Data Type Conversion Functions
        CAST: Converting to a Specific Data Type
        CHAR: Converting to a Character String
        DATE: Converting to a Date
        DECIMAL: Converting to Decimal Format
        FLOAT: Converting to Floating Point Format
        INT: Converting to an Integer
        SMALLINT: Converting to a Small Integer
        TIME: Converting to a Time
        TIMESTAMP: Converting to a Timestamp
      SQL Numeric Functions
        ABS: Returning an Absolute Value (SQL)
        LOG: Returning a Logarithm (SQL)
        SQRT Returning a Square Root (SQL)
      SQL Miscellaneous Functions
        COUNTBY: Incrementing Column Values Row by Row
        HEX: Converting to Hexadecimal
        IF: Testing a Condition
        LENGTH: Obtaining the Physical Length of a Data Item
        VALUE: Coalescing Data Values
      SQL Operators
        CASE: SQL Case Operator
        COALESCE: Coalescing Data Values
        NULLIF: NULLIF Operator
      Launch PDF
  Resource Management
    Resource Analyzer Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Analyzer?
        Resource Analyzer Overview
        Resource Analyzer for Decision Support Analysis
        Uses for Resource Analyzer: Performance Analysis
        Introduction to Data Access and Performance Analysis With Resource Analyzer
        Sample Data Access Questions
        How Resource Analyzer Works
        Software Prerequisites
        Overview of the Web Console
        Overview of Reporting With Resource Analyzer
        Integrating Resource Analyzer With WebFOCUS, Managed Reporting, and ReportCaster
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Resource Analyzer Report Options
        Reports Overview
        Resource Analyzer Reporting
        Resource Analyzer Report Options
        General Reports
        Usage Analysis Reports
        Domain Analysis Report
        Impact Analysis Report
        Performance Analysis Reports
        Network Analysis Reports
        Graph Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables in Oracle, DB2, or MS SQL
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Resource Governor Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Governor?
        Resource Governor Overview
        Resource Governor Features
        Resource Governor Operations
        How Resource Governor Works
        Resource Governor Usage Monitoring
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Creating Custom Rules
        Creating Custom Rules
      Resource Governor Administration
        The Resource Governor Administrator on the Web Console
        Usage Monitoring
        Rule Parameters
        Building Rules
        Governing
      Resource Governor Reports
        Resource Governor Reporting
        Resource Governor Report Options
        General Reports
        Resource Governor Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables in Oracle, DB2, or MS SQL
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Business Rule Language (BRL)
        Using Business Rule Language (BRL)
        BRL Factual Information
        BRL Keywords
        Pre-defined Variables
        Internal Functions
        Customized Rule Examples
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Stop Light
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Visual Discovery - Outlier Finder
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Working with Dashboards
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring a PMF Application
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing the Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Adding and Editing Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Functional Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With Access Roles
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations For Loading Dimensions
        Designing Dimension and Measure Loads
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Designing a Custom Time Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Directly Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Designing a Simple Measure Load
        Excluding a Measure Series From Row-Level Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Running a Measure Load
        Managing Content
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Turning a WebFOCUS Report Into a Gadget
        Exporting a Gadget
        Registering a Gadget
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Creating Measures With the New Measure Wizard
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Combining Security Modes
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration Guide
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        pmf/Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Snapshot and Restore
        Manually Creating a BID Portal View for PMF
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing Manage Reporting Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  References
    Stored Procedure Reference
      Introducing Stored Procedures
        Calling a Stored Procedure
        Stored Procedure Libraries
        Setting the Execution Order
      Calling a Program as a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Compiled Program
        Calling a Program With EDARPC
        Calling a Program With CALLPGM or EXEC
        Calling a Program With SQL EX
        Passing Parameters
        Program Communication
      Calling a JAVA Class as a Stored Procedure
        Execute Using CALLJAVA
        Execute Using EX
        Execute Using SQL EX and SQL CPJAVA EX
        Passing Parameters
        Writing a JAVA Class
        JAVA Class Communication
        Compiling and Running a JAVA Program
      Writing a 3GL Compiled Stored Procedure Program
        Program Requirements
        Setting Up the Control Block
        Storing Program Values
        Error Handling
        Issuing the CREATE TABLE Command
      Writing a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Commands Included in a Procedure
        Commands and Processing
        Commenting a Procedure
        Sending a Message to a Client Application
        Controlling Execution
        Using Variables
        Supplying Values for Variables
        Branching
        Looping
        Calling Another Procedure
        The -REMOTE Commands
        Reading From and Writing to an External File
        .EVAL Operator
        Creating Expressions
        Using Functions
        Using Commands Specific to an Operating System
        ON TABLE HOLD
        ON TABLE PCHOLD
      Platform-Specific Commands and Features
        DYNAM Command (MVS)
        Comparison of TSO Commands, JCL, and DYNAM
        DDNAME Translation in User-Written Subroutines: MSODDX
        FILEDEF Command Under VM
        FILEDEF Command Under UNIX, Windows, i5/OS, z/OS, and OpenVMS
      Dialogue Manager Quick Reference
        Dialogue Manager Commands
      GENCPGM Usage
        Using GENCPGM
        Subroutine Source Examples and Runtime Testing
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    iWay API Reference V7.1
      Introducing the API
        Introduction to the API
        API Call-Level interface
        Overview of the Data Reference Model
        Introduction to Messaging and Queuing
      API Data Structures
        Data Type Summary
        Data Structures
        Column Information Block
      Interface Overview
        Administrative Method Calls
        Communications Method Calls
        Data Access Method Calls
        Control Flow
      Method Reference
        Using API Methods
        API Method Calls
      Environment Variables
        Assigning and Inspecting Variables
        Global and Local Variables
        Valid Setting Codes and Variables
      Usage Considerations
        SQL Translation
        Using Prepared Statements
        Large Object Support
        National Language Support
        Transaction Processing
        Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs)
        Security Considerations
      Advanced Usage Considerations
        Multithreading
        Multiplexing (Deprecated)
        Semiplexing (User Multiplexing)
        Result Set Management
        Passivating Connection Option
      Platform-Specific Considerations
        Using the API in the OS/400 Environment
        Using the API in the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Using the API in the OS/390 and z/OS Environment
        Using the API in the MVS Environment
        Using the API in the OpenVMS Environment
        Using the API in the UNIX Environment
        Using the API in the VM Environment
      Tracing
        Tracing Within the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Alternative Tracing Methods
        Tracing Within the MVS Environment
        Tracing Within the UNIX, OS/390, z/OS, OpenVMS and OS/400 Environments
        Configuring Tracing
        Activation of Tracing
      Messaging and Queuing
        Asynchronous Database Processing With the API
        API Messaging and Queuing Model
        Transaction Processing Considerations
        Method Calls
        Processing Answer Set Large Objects
      Sample Include, Copybook and Global Files
        C and C++ Header File: EDA.H
        Cobol Copybook: EDACPY
        Visual Basic Globals:EDAGLOB.BAS
      Programming Examples
        Sample Files
        API Programming in C
        API Programming in C++
        API Programming in Visual Basic
        API Programming in Cobol
        API Programming in RPG
      Status Codes
        API Status Codes
        API Status Code Descriptions
      Launch PDF
    iWay Messages and Codes Manual V7.1
      Application Agent Messages
        Messages 001 - 2000
      Supra Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2001 - 2200
      Infoman Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2201 - 2300
      NOMAD Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2401 - 2500
      General SQL Messages
        Messages 2501 - 2700
      DSM Mumps Messages
        Messages 2701 - 2900
      Adabas Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 3001 - 3100
        Messages 4451 - 4600
      General Table Service Messages
        Messages 3201 - 4000
        Messages 36201 - 36600
      IMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4201 - 4300
        Messages 42001 - 42200
      CA/IDMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4301 - 4450
      TOTAL Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4601 - 4800
      MODEL 204 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4801 - 5000
      System 2000 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 11001 - 11400
        Messages 12001 - 12301
        Messages 13501 - 14001
        Messages 50001 - 50101
      XA Transaction Manager Messages
        Messages 11501 - 11600
      CA-DATACOM Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 12001 - 12300
        Messages 13001 - 13100
        Messages 14001 - 14902
        Messages 21101 - 21200
        Messages 50001 - 50100
      General Server Messages
        Messages 13001 - 13400
      SQL Translator Messages
        Messages 14001 - 14200
      DataMigrator (ETL Manager) Messages
        Messages 18001 - 18800
      Fusion Database Messages
        Messages 20001 - 20600
      Server Messages
        Messages 32001 - 32600
      Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 35801 - 36000
      Resource Analyzer/Resource Governor Messages
        Messages 36001 - 36200
      XML Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 42201 - 42456
      WebFOCUS Messages
        Messages 43001 - 43039
      Essbase Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43201 - 43280
      FOCUS Bull Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43501 - 43583
      Application Adapter Server Messages
        Messages 43701 - 43905
      General Parser Messages
        Messages 44001 - 44619
      Connector Error Messages
        Messages 0 - 10 and -1 to -39
      Common User Abend Codes
        Codes 401 - 4091
      XMI/Datacom and Miscellaneous Error Messages
        XMI/Datacom Error Messages
        Messages 1714 - 1850
      COBOL FD Translator Messages
        COBOL FD Translator Messages
      The EDA198 Error Message
        EDA198 Error Message Overview
        Diagnosing EDA198 on VM
        Diagnosing EDA198 on OS/390 and z/OS
      Launch PDF
    iWay SQL Reference V7.1
      Introduction
        SQL Translation Services
        Language Dialect
      SQL Services
        SQL Passthru Services
        Using SQL Passthru
        Enabling SQL Passthru
        Catalog Requirements
        Valid Database Engine Settings
        SQL Translation Services
        SQL Translation Operations
        Dialect Translation
        Data Manipulation Language (DML) Generation
        Join Optimization in DML Generation
      Language Elements
        BNF Conventions
        Characters
        Tokens
        Qualifiers
      SQL Reference
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        SELECT Statement
        Scalar Functions
        Column Functions
        Predicates
        Data Manipulation Commands
        Commit and Rollback
      Tables and Views
        Creating Tables
        Creating Views
      Preparing and Executing SQL Requests
        Preparing SQL Requests
        Executing SQL Requests
      SQL Translate Keywords
        Keywords
      BNF Summary
        Condensed SQL Language Syntax Definition
      Launch PDF
  Technical Memos
    Technical Memo 4505: WebFOCUS HTML Report Accessibility Support
    Technical Memo 4647: Configuring Single Sign-on to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server Using Kerberos
    Technical Memo 4690: Saving Report Output in Excel 2007 Format
    Technical Memo 4693: Using the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In
    Technical Memo 4695: Using the Magnify Prototype Wizard
    Technical Memo 4697: Nested Applications
    Technical Memo 4698: Using the Active Technologies API
    Technical Memo 4699: Using Magnify With The Google Search Engine
    Technical Memo 4700: Accessing an HTML Composer Application on the iPad
    Technical Memo 4711: PDF Remediation
    Technical Memo 4719: Hiding Report Options (Buttons) in the Managed Reporting Deferred Status Interface
  Best Practices
    Considerations When Using ReportCaster
  Security and Administration
    WebFOCUS Security and Administration
      WebFOCUS Components and Deployment Options
        WebFOCUS Components
        WebFOCUS Deployment Options
      WebFOCUS Processing Concepts
        Security Planning
        WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script and Configuration Files
        WebFOCUS Profiles
        Java Application Server Files
        Customizing WebFOCUS Request Processing
        WebFOCUS Encryption Techniques
        WebFOCUS User Authentication Options
      WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Accessing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        WebFOCUS Administration Console Functionality
        Securing the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        ReportCaster Settings
        Magnify Settings
        WebFOCUS Utilities
        Quick Links
        WebFOCUS Client Upgrade Configuration
      WebFOCUS Client Core Processing Details
        Core Processing of WebFOCUS Requests
        WebFOCUS Client Security
        WebFOCUS Client Administration
        Setting Authentication Credentials
      WebFOCUS Reporting Server Core Processing Details
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Settings
      Managed Reporting Processing Details
        Managed Reporting Architecture
        Managed Reporting Sign-on Processing
        Dashboard Sign-On Processing
        Managed Reporting Configuration Files
        Managed Reporting Internal Variables
        Managed Reporting Settings in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Deferred Receipt Processing
        Accessing Reports From Outside Managed Reporting
      Configuring Managed Reporting for Trusted or External Authentication
        Benefits of Trusted and External Authentication
        Preparing for Trusted or External Authentication
        Configuring Trusted Authentication
        Configuring External Authentication
        Propagating the Managed Reporting ID to the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Configuring Managed Reporting for External Authorization
        Benefits of External Authorization
        Preparing for External Authorization
        Configuring Managed Reporting Administered RDBMS Authorization
        Configuring Externally Administered Authorization
        Advanced Topics
      WebFOCUS Encryption Features
        Configuring WebFOCUS in an SSL Environment
        WebFOCUS Encryption
        Encryption Using the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Encrypting WFS Files Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Encrypting WebFOCUS Data, Procedures, and Data Restriction Rules
      Manipulating WebFOCUS Variables
        WebFOCUS Script Commands
        Copying WebFOCUS Variables Using the WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in
        HTTP Header Variables Available for Script Processing
      WebFOCUS Diagnostics
        Using Diagnostic Tools in the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        HTTP Request Headers and JVM Property Information
        Monitoring WebFOCUS Sessions
        Stopping a WebFOCUS Request
        Using WebFOCUS Verification Tools
        Tracing WebFOCUS Processing
        Viewing Security and Header Variables in Use
      Filtering Data
        WebFOCUS Data Security
        WebFOCUS Data Filters
        Filtering Metadata in the WebFOCUS Development Tools
      Localizing WebFOCUS
        Configuring National Language Support
        Customizing the Dynamic Language Switch
        Manually Customizing WebFOCUS Client Messages
      Protecting Your WebFOCUS Installation
        File System Permissions for Windows and UNIX
        Protecting WebFOCUS Variables
        Protecting the WebFOCUS Administration Console
        Protecting Managed Reporting Applications
        Protecting WebFOCUS Reporting Server Data Sources
        Disabling Operating System Commands
      Developing Your Own WebFOCUS Plug-in
        Overview of Plug-in Processing
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFEXT Setting
        Developing a WebFOCUS Servlet Plug-in Activated by the WFTRANSINOUT Setting
      Developing a Managed Reporting Realm Driver Extension
        Introduction
        Where to Go for Information
      Developing a Reporting Server Authentication Exit
        Pre-Verify User ID Exit
      Developing a Dynamic DBA Rule
        WebFOCUS DBA Exit
      Developer Studio Custom Logon Templates
        How Logon Templates Work
        Creating a Template File
      Launch PDF
  7.7.02 New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      WebFOCUS InfoAssist Enhancements
        Using InfoMini
        Creating Slicers
        Adding Active Form Controls to a Compound Document
        Using the Size & Arrange Group
      Active Technologies Enhancements
        Active Technologies Form Controls
        Text Formatting Markup Tags
        Display Syntax for Global Filter Icon and Dashboard Bar
      Developer Studio Enhancements
        Hiding a Sort Field
        Setting the Default Report Format
        Propagating Mixed-Case Column Titles to a HOLD File
        Ignoring ON Phrases for Absent Fields
        Creating Accordion Reports That Expand by Row
      HTML Composer Enhancements
        Using Templates in the HTML Composer
        Using Guided Report Mode in the HTML Composer
        Adding a Compound Document to an HTML Page
        Adding Flash Content to the Layout
        Multi-Select Form Controls
        Converting a Double List Control to Another Control Type
      Document Composer Enhancements
        Adding Active Technologies Report Controls to a Layout
        Outputting in User-Defined Format
        Adding Vertical Sort Fields in a Table of Contents
        Using PDF Drill Through
      Report Painter Enhancements
        Guided Reports
        Auto Drill Enhancements
        Database Format for XFOCUS Data Sources
        Database Format for HP Neoview Tables
        Using User-Defined Functions
      Power Painter Enhancements
        Adding a Simple Prompt to the Auto Prompting Facility
      Managed Reporting Enhancements
        Restricting My Reports Content Within a Domain
        Enhancement When Saving A Deferred Report as a My Report
        Using the Publish Option in Dashboard
        Accessing View Builder From Business Intelligence Dashboard
        Quick Data Support With 64-Bit Excel 2010
      WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Enhancements
        Support for Sharepoint Portal 2010
      WebFOCUS Client Enhancements
        Authenticating WebFOCUS Administration Console Access With Managed Reporting Credentials
        Using an Advanced Standard Encryption Cipher in Reporting Server Communication
      Reporting Language Enhancements
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Propagating Mixed-Case Column Titles to a HOLD File
        Column Titles for FML and BY ROWS OVER Requests
        Passing WebFOCUS Dates to Excel 2000
        Hiding Null Columns in ACROSS Groups
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        WebFOCUS Amper Autoprompt Facility Field Selection Enhancement
        Supporting Multiple DST Operators in the Same Request
        Creating Accordion By Row Reports
        Controlling Non-Printed Fields Propagated to a Hold File With SET HOLDLIST=EXPLICIT
        Excel 2007 Support
      WebFOCUS Graphics Enhancements
        Controlling Data Text Values That Are the Same for Two or More Series
        Repositioning a Data Text Value If Multiple Values Are Colliding
        Making the Last Riser in a Waterfall Chart Into a Total That Touches the X-Axis
        Setting Color Mode to Distinguish Positive and Negative Numbers in Waterfall Charts
        Controlling the Zero Data Value When the Cumulative Stack Total Is Zero
        Returning the Object ID of a Connected Line in a Stacked Chart
        Specifying HEX Values for RGB Colors in STY Files
      ReportCaster Enhancements
        Scheduling Tool Custom Template Option
        Using the View Option in the ReportCaster Interfaces
      National Language Support Enhancements
        Unicode Enhancements
        Support for Simplified Chinese Installation
        Support for Russian as a Localized Version
      Adapter for Geographic Information Systems Enhancements
        WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex Components
      Magnify Enhancements
        Indexing Using FORMAT MAGNIFY Command (CFR)
        Magnify Security
        Magnify Search-Based Application
        Magnify Administration
      Server Enhancements
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Performance
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        SQL Adapters
        XML-Based Adapters
        ERP Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
        All Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Primary Key Analysis Report
        Function Assist
        Scheduled Events Report
        New XML Target
        Where Condition With Sub-Select
        DBCS Character Functions
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Domain Analysis Report
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
    Server Release Notes
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: Excel 2000, Excel 97, Excel
        Using PowerPoint Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding an HTML TOC to a Report
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Support for Repeated Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Long and Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        Identifying a Data Source Overview
        Specifying a Data Source Name: FILENAME
        Identifying a Data Source Type: SUFFIX
        Providing Descriptive Information for a Data Source: REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        The Field Name: FIELDNAME
        The Field Synonym: ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        Defining a Dimension: WITHIN
        Validating Data: ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        Alternative Report Column Titles: TITLE
        Documenting the Field: DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        Describing a Virtual Field: DEFINE
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX Attribute
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        Specifying an Access Type: The ACCESS Attribute
        Limiting Data Source Access: The RESTRICT Attribute
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Placing Security Information in a Central Master File
        Summary of Security Attributes
        Hiding Restriction Rules: The ENCRYPT Command
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        Creating a New Data Source: The CREATE Command
        Rebuilding a Data Source: The REBUILD Command
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        Changing Data Source Structure: The REORG Subcommand
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned Project
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Creating and Working With Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Managing Applications and Paths in the Web Console
        Managing Applications and Paths in the Data Management Console
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using ISAPI
        Using CGI
        Using a Dynamic Multi-Select Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
        Amper Auto-Prompting
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Web Page With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameter Values Categorized by Functional Area
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
        Character Functions for AnV Fields
        Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Lookup Data Source
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date and Time Functions
        Date and Time Function Notes
        Date and Time Function Terminology
        Using Standard Date and Time Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date Field
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Numeric Format
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
        TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months to or From Dates
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days to or From a Date
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between a Blank and a Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST and NORMSINV: Calculating Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
      Input/Output Functions
        PUTDDREC and CLSDDREC: Opening, Closing, and Writing Files
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Reporting Tools
    Creating Reports With Report Assistant
      Introducing Report Assistant
        About Report Assistant
        Accessing Report Assistant
        Layout of Report Assistant
      Designing a Report
        Building Your Report With Report Assistant
        Selecting Report Fields
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Defining Field Characteristics
        Applying Predefined and Cascading StyleSheets
        Customizing Headings and Footings
      Working With Data and Data Sources
        Selecting Records for a Report
        Limiting Data With Filters
        Working With Joins
      Controlling Report Output
        Applying Report Output Options
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running a Report
        Saving a Report
        Editing a Report
      Report Assistant Field Reference
        Report Assistant Field References
        Field Selection Tab
        Report Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab
        Join Options Tab
        Report Options Tab
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reports With Report Painter
      Report Painter Basics
        Report Painter Layout and Toolbars
        Using the Object Inspector
        Viewing Options
        Business Intelligence Features
        Report Painter Limitations
        Field Properties and Report Options Dialog Boxes
      Creating Reports With Report Painter
        Adding a Field as a Report Column
        Displaying Data
        Sorting Data
        Selecting Data
        Universal Concatenation in Report Painter
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Including a Total or Subtotal
        Adding a Page Heading or Footing
        Formatting a Column
        Choosing an Output Format
        Creating a Drill Down Procedure
        Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running and Saving a Report
        Creating Precision Reports
        Using User Defined Functions
      Creating Guided Reports
        Creating a Guided Report
      Styling Reports With Report Painter
        Styling With Fonts, Colors, and Grids
        Styling or Aligning an Individual Item in a Text String
        Aligning Fields and Text in Headings and Footings
        Defining a Conditional Report Style
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Adding an Image
        Using the StyleSheet File Selector
        Generating Format-Specific Style Blocks
        Using Excel Templates
        Using Excel Named Ranges in WebFOCUS Applications
        Generating Overflow Sheets for an Excel 2000 Report
        Using PowerPoint Output Format and PowerPoint Templates
        Setting Up the Report Page
        Creating Mailing Labels
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Temporary Fields With Report Painter
        Creating a Calculated Value With Report Painter
        Creating Expressions for Temporary Fields
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Charts With Graph Tools
      Introduction to Creating Charts
        Graph Overview
        Determining Graphing Objectives
        Creating Custom Graph Templates
        Accessing the Graph Tools from WebFOCUS Environments
      Creating Graphs With Graph Assistant
        Accessing the Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Graph Type and Style
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Working With Joins in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing Your Graph
        Graph Types Tab
        Field Selection Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Field Selection Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Headings Tab
        Selection Criteria Tab in the Developer Studio Environment
        Selection Criteria Tab in Graph Assistant of the Managed Reporting Environment
        Join Options Tab in the Managed Reporting Environment
        Properties Tab
      Creating Graphs With Advanced Graph Assistant
        Accessing Advanced Graph Assistant
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Selecting Data for a Graph
        Data Display Options
        Filtering Data for a Graph
        Creating Multiple Graphs With Advanced Merge
        Creating Temporary Fields
        Working With Joins
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding and Editing Labels in a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Running, Saving, and Printing a Graph
        Modifying Graph Properties With Chart Editing Forms
      Customizing Graphs With the Graph Editor
        Choosing a Graph Type
        Applying Color and Line Options in Graphs
        Applying Font Options in Graphs
        Adding Chart Titles
        Creating and Loading GIF Files
        Applying Gradient Fill (All Graph Types)
        Applying Texture Fill (All Graph Types)
        Zooming and Panning in Bar Graphs
        3D Chart Options
        3D Custom Viewing Options
        3D Preset Viewing Options
        Bar, Line, and Area Charts
        Dual Y Options
        Group Axis Options
        Pie Chart Options
        Stock Chart Options
        X1 Axis Options
        Y1 Axis Options
        Y2 Axis Options
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Composer
      Using the HTML Composer
        Uses for the HTML Composer
        Getting Started With the HTML Composer
        Creating a Report Page Layout
      Creating and Using Parameters in the HTML Composer
        Creating Parameter Values
        Using Form Controls to Supply Incoming Parameter Values
        Using Input Controls to Supply Parameter Values
        Supplying Parameter Values to External Reports
        Styling Your Layout
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Laying Out Objects With the HTML Composer
        Controlling the HTML Composer Environment
        Adding ReportCaster Schedule Capability to the HTML Composer
        Running a Managed Reporting Report Deferred From the HTML Composer
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Composer Pages
        Specifying an HTML File as a Load Screen
      Using Templates in the HTML Composer
        Understanding and Using Templates
        Manipulating the Objects of Templates
      Creating Guided Report Forms
        Getting Started With Guided Reports
      Chaining Controls for Dependencies in the HTML Composer
        Automatically Chaining Parameters From the New Parameters Dialog Box
        Chaining Controls on the Parameters Tab
        Applying Conditions to a Chain
        Populating Controls One at a Time
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Report Library Integration in the HTML Composer
        Integrating the Report Library
      Creating a Rich Internet Application (RIA) With the HTML Composer
        RIA Overview
        Creating a RIA With the HTML Composer
        Usage Notes and RIA Example
      Using Google Maps in the HTML Composer
        Configuring WebFOCUS for Google Maps
        Creating WebFOCUS Procedures for Google Maps
        Adding a Google Map
        Customizing the Google Map Properties
        Integrating WebFOCUS With Google Maps
        Using the Google Maps Functionality
        JavaScript Functions
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Active Technologies User's Guide
      Active Technologies
        Active Technologies Report Overview
        Available Output Formats for Using Active Technologies
        Product Requirements for Using Active Technologies
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Painter
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With the Report Assistant
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
      Using an Active Technologies Report
        Navigating Between Pages
        Filtering and Highlighting Data
        Calculating Data
        Sorting Data
        Using Tab Window Navigation
        Controlling Report Display
        Using Data Visualization
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Using the Grid Tool
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool
        Using the Pivot Tool
        Saving, Exporting, and E-mailing Active Technologies Reports
      Working With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Active Technologies Report Integration With Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Pivot Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Formatting Legend Options for an Active Technologies Chart for Adobe Flash Player
        Customizing Containers and the Dashboard Bar for Active Technologies Reports and Dashboards
        Using Active Technologies for PDF
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Active Technologies Dashboard Overview
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Using Advanced Design Features for Active Technologies Dashboards
        Overview
        Changing the Color of the Border of Charts
        Changing the Background Color of an Individual Tab
        Controlling Active Technologies With Custom JavaScript Code
        Working With the Global Filter Feature
        Managing Active Technologies Form Controls
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With the HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Form Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
      Creating Active Technologies Components With WebFOCUS Syntax
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Document Composer
      Document Composer Overview
        Uses for the Document Composer
        Getting Started With the Document Composer
      Creating Compound Reports
        Creating a Compound Layout Report
        Output Formats for Compound Reports
        Adding a Reporting Object to a Compound Report
      Viewing Pages in the Document Composer
        On Demand Viewing in the Document Composer
        Viewing Simulated or Live Data in the Document Composer
        Moving Pages With the Thumbnails Tab
        Positioning Objects and Keyboard Shortcuts
      Using Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Creating, Saving, and Editing Page Masters in the Document Composer
        Using an Existing Page Master in Another Document
      Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects
        Setting Overflow Options in the Document Composer
        Using Fixed Overflow in the Document Composer
        Using Flowing Overflow in the Document Composer
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in the Document Composer
        Adding Different Headers and Footers on an Overflow Page
      Applying a Table of Contents and Bookmarks
        Adding a Table of Contents Page
        Using Bookmarks in the Document Composer
      Using Drill Through in the Document Composer
        Using Drill Through
      Using Page Layouts in the Document Composer
        Using Page Layouts
      Formatting Text in the Document Composer
        Formatting Text Elements
      Adding Page Numbers to Your Document With the Document Composer
        Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Using Active Technologies Reports to Create Active Dashboards
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Compound Reports With Power Painter
      Introducing Power Painter
        About Power Painter
        Configuring the Power Painter License Code
        Accessing Power Painter
        Introducing Power Painter Options and Palettes
        Selecting and Adding a Data Source
        Customizing the Power Painter Environment
      Working With Power Painter Objects
        About Power Painter Objects
        Inserting a Report Object
        Inserting a Graph Object
        Inserting an Image Object
        Inserting a Text Object
        Inserting a Line Object
        Displaying Summary Values Using Prefix Operators
      Using Standard Reporting Functions
        Incorporating Standard Reporting Functions Into a Report
        Importing Values From External Files for WHERE Statements
        Creating Parameters for Use in the Auto Prompting Facility
      Controlling Report Overflow and Position of Objects
        About Report Overflow and Object Positioning
        Setting Overflow Options in Power Painter
        Using Fixed Overflow in Power Painter
        Using Flowing Overflow in Power Painter
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Power Painter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Using Two-Way Email
      Using Two-Way Email
        Two-Way Email User Steps
        Subscribing for the First Time
        Replying to the Confirmation Message
        Receiving Your Templates for the First Time
        Requesting a Report
        Updating Your Subscription Information
        Responding to an Alert
      Two-Way Email Administration
        Accessing the Administrator Console
        Adding or Deleting a Subscriber
        Maintaining an E-mail Address
        Refreshing User Templates
        Using the Job Log
        Using the Event Log
        Checking the Status of a Job or Canceling a Job
      Developing a Two-Way Email Template
        How Two-Way Email Works
        Creating a Template
        Maintaining a Template
        Sending a Template to Users
        Attaching a Two-Way Email Template to an Alert
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  InfoAssist
    WebFOCUS InfoAssist User's Manual
      Introducing and Launching InfoAssist
        Introducing InfoAssist
        Introducing Personal InfoAssist
        Accessing InfoAssist
        Launching InfoAssist
      Setting InfoAssist User Preferences
        Changing User Preferences
      Using the InfoAssist Application Window
        Components of the InfoAssist Application Window
        Selecting From the Application Main Menu
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Accessing Properties Using the Control Panel
        Understanding the Resources Panel
        Understanding the Results Panel
        Using the Navigation Taskbar
        Using the Status Bar
      Building InfoMini Applications
        Understanding InfoMini Applications
        Creating an InfoMini Application
      Using Slicers
        Creating Slicers
        Filtering With Slicers
      Customizing and Styling Reports
        Excel Output for Reports
        Styling Reports
        Using Custom Reporting Features
        Creating Customized Report Outputs
      Hierarchical Reporting in InfoAssist
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
      Creating and Customizing Charts
        Selecting a Chart Type
        Using Custom Chart Features
        Adding a Page Heading and Page Footing to a Chart
        Designing a Chart in Active Preview
      Using Document View and Building Compound Documents
        Accessing Document View
        Building a Compound Document
        Adding Active Technologies Form Controls to a Compound Document
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Managed Reporting
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Administrator's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Deployment Process
        Using Managed Reporting
        Accessing Dashboard
        Customizing Dashboard
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Creating Domains, Groups, Roles, and Users
        Using the Managed Reporting Administration Interface
        Creating Domains
        Creating Groups
        Creating Users
        Creating Roles
        Customizing the Interface
      User Management
        User Management Tree Object
        Managing User Reports
        Promoting a Custom Report to a Standard Report
        Considerations When Copying and Moving Reports
        Managing Standard Report References
        Managing Reporting Object References
      Managing Dashboard
        Managing Public Views
        Managing Group Views
        Managing Library Only Views
        Managing Private Views
        Logging On to Dashboard and View Inheritance
        Managing Users
        Controlling the Idle Limit for Authenticated and Public Users
        Handling Messages
        Hiding Report Types in the Domain Tree
        Hiding the Share Report Option for Finished My Reports
        Displaying Optional Properties in Dashboard
        Creating Standard Reports, Reporting Objects, and Other File in Dashboard
      Creating Public and Group Views
        What Is a Public View?
        What Is a Group View?
        What Is a Library Only Group View?
        Adding a Group or Public View
        Directing Users to a Group View Upon Login
        Adding a Library Only View
        Removing a Public or Group View
        Editing a Public or Group View
        Customizing Dashboard Pages for a Public or Group View
        Copying a Public or Group View
        Exiting the Public Views or Group Views Window
      Customizing Dashboard
        Before You Begin Customizing Dashboard
        Opening the View Builder
        Selecting a Template
        Selecting Custom Colors
        Positioning the Domain Tree, Role Tree, and Banner
        Inserting a Logo
        Customizing the Banner
        Creating a Custom Toolbar
        Adding a Message of the Day
        Customizing the Logoff Window
        Changing the ReportCaster Scheduling Tool
        Changing the ReportCaster Interface
        Resetting the View Builder
        Globally Enabling Reporting Tools in Dashboard
        Saving Selections and Exiting a Customization
        Exiting the View Builder
      Creating a Role Tree
        What Is a Role Tree?
        Adding a Role Tree
        Editing a Role Tree
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Creating Filters For Standard Reports
        Executing a Domain Profile in Dashboard
        Selecting Content Layout
      Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Running the Managed Reporting Extract Utility
        Managed Reporting Extract Utility Output Files
        Master Files and Sample Procedure
        Reporting From Extract Files
        Property Flags
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Change Management Load Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      Additional Administration Topics
        Selecting the Tool Type for ReportCaster
        Debugging
        Setting Up Traces for Managed Reporting User Requests
        Repository File Name Processing
        Obtaining a List of Available Master Files
      Application Integration Topics
        Invoking the Deferred Report Status Interface Directly
        Managed Reporting Browser Window Feature
        Using Launch Pages Outside the Default Repository
      Managing Deferred Tickets
        Managing Deferred Workload
        Managing the Deferred Ticket Cleanup Utility
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting Developer's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        WebFOCUS Products
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Developer for Windows
        Using Managed Reporting
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
      Working With Domains
        Using Domains in Managed Reporting
        Guidelines for Copy or Cut and Paste in Domains
        Setting Domain Properties
        Customizing Managed Reporting
      Working With Standard Reports
        Working With Standard Reports
        Creating and Editing Standard Reports
        Applying Predefined Style Sheets to a Report
        Adding a Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
        Importing Procedures and Other Files Into Managed Reporting
        Ignoring Code in a Procedure (FOCEXEC)
        Coding Considerations for Saved Parameter Reports
        Execution of a Managed Reporting Procedure Using –INCLUDE or EX
        Execution of a Server Procedure
        Drilling Down From a MR Procedure to a Procedure on the Server
        Incorporating Images Into Managed Reporting Requests
        Launching a Self-Service Application of Report Assistant
      Creating Reporting Objects
        Reporting Objects
        Running a Reporting Object From Domain Builder
        Components of a Reporting Object
        Other Component
        Creating and Customizing a Join in Developer Studio
        Creating and Customizing a Join in the Browser
        Virtual Fields (DEFINE Statements)
        Filters
        Selection Criteria (WHERE Statements)
        Creating an Application Object
        Report Component
        Graph Component
      Creating Launch Pages and Publishing Reports
        Working With Launch Pages
        Creating Launch Pages With the Publish Utility
        Working With Amper Auto-Prompting
        Working With the HTML Composer
      Data Servers Feature
        Working With Data Servers
        Working With Server Applications
        Working With Application Files
        Create Synonym Behavior
        Searching Domains for Master Files and Fields With the Impact Analysis Tool
      Change Management
        Understanding the Change Management Process
        Managed Reporting Development Environment
        Understanding Internal Managed Reporting References
        Managed Reporting Change Management Features
        Change Management Extract Utility
        Dashboard Change Management
      ReportCaster Alerts
        Alert Reporting Overview
        Components of an Alert
        Creating an Alert
        Creating Joins and Defines With the Text Editor
        Checking Alerts
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting End User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        WebFOCUS and Managed Reporting Overview
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Features
        Managed Reporting Interface
      Using Dashboard
        Opening Dashboard
        Required Browser Settings
        Recommended Browser Settings
        Personalizing Your Dashboard
        Dashboard Layout
        Selecting a Domain
        Using Domain Tree Items
        Creating Reports in Dashboard
        Stopping Requests in Dashboard
        PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard
        Running Deferred Reports
        Using Role Trees
        Viewing Content Blocks
        Using Banner Hyperlinks
        Searching Domains
        Creating a Favorites List
        Mobile Favorites
        Viewing Reports in the Report Library
        Viewing Recently Run Reports
        Setting User Options
      Creating Dashboard Content
        Creating Dashboard Content Overview
        Content Window
        Creating Content Pages
        Adding a Content Block
        Editing a Content Block
        Selecting Content Layout
      Using the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Introducing the Deferred Report Status Interface
        Deferred Report Status Interface Features
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Using the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Navigating a Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Using the Viewer Control Panel
        Creating On-Demand Paging Reports
      Using Java Applet Managed Reporting
        Accessing Managed Reporting
        Using Domains in Java-based Managed Reporting
        Running a Report
        Sharing a Report
        Creating a Report or Graph
        Creating Procedures With the Text Editor
        Editing a My Report
        Editing a Custom Report and its Properties
        Execution of a Custom Report Using -INCLUDE
        Filtering Data
        Searching a Domain
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Administration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Component Pack and Third-Party Applications
        Benefits of Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
      Using WebFOCUS Portal Components
        WebFOCUS Components Overview
        JVM Support Information
        Optional Portal Parameters
        Disabling WebFOCUS Tools
        WebFOCUS Component URLs
        Portlet Parameters
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Report Components
      Configuring JSR 168 Portal Environments
        Understanding the JSR 168 Portlet Specification
        Installing and Deploying WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Gateway
        Configuring JSR 168 Portlet Parameters
        Using the Output Portlet
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Vignette Application Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Sun ONE Portal Server
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the JBoss Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA AquaLogic Portal
        Configuring WebFOCUS Portlets for the Apache Jetspeed Portal
        Configuring the GN Parameter
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2007
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for the Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2010
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Web Parts
        Configuring the WebFOCUS Report Web Part
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the IBM WebSphere Portal Server Version 6.1
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Oracle Portal Server (Oracle 10g)
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Defining a WebFOCUS Application Under the Oracle Application Server
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Registering the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Testing the WebFOCUS Components Provider
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the Computer Associates CleverPath Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Portlets
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Portlets for the BEA WebLogic Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Deploying a WebFOCUS Application
        Installing WebFOCUS Portlets
        Adding WebFOCUS Portlets to the BEA WebLogic Portal
        Using WebFOCUS Portlets
      Installing WebFOCUS Pagelets for the PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Adding the URLContentRetriever.jar File to PeopleSoft
        Installing and Registering the WebFOCUS Pagelets
        Using WebFOCUS Pagelets
      Installing Certified NetWeaver iViews for the SAP Enterprise Portal Server
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Installing the WebFOCUS Open Portal Gateway on the SAP Application Server
        Configuring User Mapping
        Importing .PAR Files
        Configuring WebFOCUS iViews
        Importing the WEBFOCUSOPS.EPA File
        Removing Applications Using the Archive Remover
        Using the Output Portlet
        Using WebFOCUS iViews
      Installing WebFOCUS Categories for the TIBCO PortalBuilder
        WebFOCUS Components
        Installation Requirements
        Publishing WebFOCUS Categories
        Configuring the Report Category
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Developer Studio
    Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        Additional WebFOCUS Products
        WebFOCUS Architecture
        Developer Studio Architecture
        Developer Studio Directory Structure
        Developer Studio Explorer Layout
        Project-Based and Remote Development Environments
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
        Logging Off Areas in WebFOCUS Environments
        Developer Studio Data Access and Descriptions
      Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Development Environment
        Development Tools
      Setting Preferences
        General Tab
        Reporting Tab
        Explorer Tab
        Source Control Tab
        External Tools Tab
        Title Format Tab
      Tutorial: Creating an OLAP-enabled Report in Developer Studio
        OLAP Tutorial Overview
        Before You Begin
        Creating the OLAP Project
        Creating the OLAP Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With a Procedural Hierarchy
        Creating the OLAP Report With the CENTORD Data Source
        Manipulating Report Output
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using the HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Reporting Applications With Developer Studio
      Creating a Reporting Application
        What Is a Reporting Application?
        Project-based and Remote Development Environments
        Creating a Project
        Organizing a Project
        Using Workspace Files
        Adding a Master File to a Project
        Uploading Data Files
        Viewing and Modifying Project Properties
        Managing a Project With Source Control
        Securing a Project
        Removing a Project
      Partitioning and Deploying Project Files
        Deployment Basics
        Summary of Steps
        Step 1: Identify the Target Servers
        Step 2: Create a Deployment Scenario
        Step 3: Partition the Project Files
        Step 4: Deploy the Project Files
        Configuring the Target Servers (Optional)
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
      Joining and Merging Data Sources
        What Is a Join?
        Types of Joins
        Joining Different Kinds of Data Sources
        Creating a Join With Graphical Tools
        Creating Multi-Field Joins
        Using Conditional Joins
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Customizing a Join
        Working With Joins
        Reporting With a Join
        Saving a Join
        Merging Data Sources Using the Match Wizard
      Hierarchical Reporting
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Manipulating Aggregated Data in an Essbase or SAP BW Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
        Showing Hierarchies in the HTML Composer
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
      Creating a Reporting Procedure
        Selecting a Creation Tool
        Incorporating a Procedure Into an Application
        Copying a Procedure
        Creating a Procedure Component
        Working With a Component
        Using the SQL Report Wizard
        Assigning a Logical Name With the Allocation Wizard
        Calling a Procedure From the Current One
        Using the Engine Tool
        Managing Flow of Control
        Working With a Full Procedure
        Running a Procedure
        Canceling a Running Procedure
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs
        Viewing Reports in Your Browser
        Drilling Down for Details
        Navigating Through Multi-Page Web Reports
        Controlling Viewer Display Options
        Using the Clipboard
        Printing Report and Graph Output
      Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Applying Bar Graphs
        Associating Bar Graphs With Measures
      Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
        We Do It Every Day: Typical Web Query
        OLAP Reporting Requirements
        Characteristics of an OLAP Report
        Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
        Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
        Sorting Data
        Performing a Calculation on a Measure
        Limiting Data
        Visualizing Trends
        Displaying Graphs and Reports
        Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
        Adding and Removing Dimensions
        Saving OLAP Reports
        Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
        Troubleshooting OLAP Reports
      Saving and Reusing Report Output
        Types of Output Files
        Creating Output Files
        Output File Formats
        Save Report Output as a Native Temporary Table In Report Painter
        Saving Reports as HTML Output
        Saving Reports as Print Display Output: PDF, PS
        Saving Reports Using Excel Formats
      Creating an Update Application With Update Assist
        Update Assist (Step 1 of 6): Selecting Segments to Update
        Update Assist (Step 2 of 6): Selecting Fields to Update
        Update Assist (Step 3 of 6): Selecting Navigation Options
        Update Assist (Step 4 of 6): Selecting a Color Scheme
        Update Assist (Step 5 of 6): Selecting Output File Options
        Update Assist (Step 6 of 6): Confirming Selections
        About Your Update Assist Application
        Editing Your Update Assist Application
        Calling an Update Assist Procedure From a WebFOCUS Report
        Usage Notes
      Editing Application Components as Text in Developer Studio
        Text Editor
        The Other Component
        The Comment Component
        Creating a Text File or a Procedure Component as Text
        Opening Application Components as Text
        Finding and Replacing Text
        Changing Text Color and Case Size
        Adding Headings and Footings
        Using Bookmarks to Move Within a File
        Running a Procedure From the Editor
        Opening a Graphical Tool From the Text Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Describing Data With Graphical Tools
      Describing and Accessing Data Overview
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        How Applications Interpret Data
        Obtaining a Synonym
        What You Can Do With a Synonym
        Ways to Enhance a Synonym
        How an Application Uses a Synonym
        Alternative Tools on the Reporting Server Console
      Accessing Data and Creating Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters and Remote Servers in Developer Studio
        Creating Synonyms in Developer Studio
        Defining a Remote Server in the WebFOCUS Client Communication File
      Using the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Setting Up Multilingual Titles and Descriptions
        Enhancing Synonyms Using the Modeling View
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Defining Dimensions for OLAP Analysis
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
        Creating Business Views
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Creating Filters in a Synonym
        Adding Computed Fields (COMPUTE) in a Synonym
        Storing the Number of Repetitions of a Repeating Field in a Virtual Field
        Defining Attributes and Creating Expressions for Custom Fields
        Adding Group Fields in a Synonym
        Applying Database Administrator Security
      Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Analyzing Procedures With the Impact Analysis Tool
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Adding Data and Rebuilding FOCUS Data Sources
        Creating a FOCUS Data Source
        Rebuilding a Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Creating Financial Reports
      Financial Reporting and Analysis for the Enterprise
        WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Benefits
        Enterprise Financial Reporting: A Critical Cornerstone of Business
        Financial Reporting Within and Beyond an Organization
        Financial Reporting and Government Regulations
        The WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Platform
        WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
        Learning More About the WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
      Creating Reports With Financial Report Painter
        Financial Report Painter Overview
        Starting a Financial Report
        Designing Your Financial Report
        Running a Financial Report
        Retrieving FOR Field Values From a Data Source
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Supplying Data Directly
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Text
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Formatting Financial Reports
        Adding, Inserting, and Deleting Rows
        Editing Row Types and Properties
        Adding and Deleting Columns
      Creating a Financial Report Using the Financial Report Painter
        Create a Project
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Tutorial: Creating an Income Statement Using Unconsolidated Data
        Tutorial Overview
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Join the Data Sources
        Create the Base Report in the Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Describing Data for an FML Hierarchy
        Data Requirements for FML Hierarchies
        Coding an FML Hierarchy in a Text Editor
        Defining an FML Hierarchy in the Synonym Editor
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Magnify
    Magnify End User Manual
      Introducing Magnify
        About Magnify
        Accessing Magnify
      Conducting a Search With Magnify
        Conducting a Search with Magnify
        Navigating Magnify Search Results
        Viewing Content Through Additional Links
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Developer's Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Overview of Implementing Magnify
        Planning for Enterprise Search
        About Configuring Magnify
        Magnify Search Configuration Example
      Configuring an iWay Channel
        Configuring An iWay Channel
        Configure a Listener
        Create an Inlet
        Create the Emitter
        Create an Outlet
        Create a Channel
        Deploy a Channel
        Verifying the Emitter Destination Directory
      Creating the Indexing Process Flow
        About the Transaction Indexing Process Flow
        Storing Metadata Values
        Creating the HTML Document
        Feed HTML Document to the Search Engine
        Completing the Process Flow
        Validating and Testing the Process Flow
        Publishing the Process Flow
        Process Flow Considerations
      Reconfiguring and Deploying the iWay Channel
        About Reconfiguring the iWay Channel
        Creating the New Route
        Modifying the Original Channel
        Building and Deploying the Modified Channel
        Backing Up and Importing iWay Workflows
      Customizing the Magnify User Interface
        Customization Overview
        Adding Date Information to Magnify Search Results
      Indexing Using FORMAT MAGNIFY Command
        FORMAT MAGNIFY
      Magnify Protocols
        Magnify Protocols for Indexing Documents
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Magnify Security and Administration
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Configuring the Search Engine
        Configuring the Search Engine
      Configuring Magnify Collections
        Defining Collections
      Using the Security Features
        About Magnify Security
        Enabling Security in Magnify With Lucene
        Enabling Security in Magnify for Managed Reporting
        Enabling Collection-Level Security
      Magnify Diagnostics
        Magnify Diagnostics Pages
        Indexing Large Files
        Magnify Request Parameters
        Verifying Documents in the Lucene Index
        Retrieving Index Library Properties
        Retrieving Field Values From the Lucene Index
        Online Lucene Resources
      Magnify Demo Search Application
        Century Electronics Sample Search Application
        Differences Between Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Installation
        Port 80, Port 8080, or Other
        Feeding Content to Magnify
        Additional Features
        Collection Security
        Multiple Categorizations
        Process Flow
        Deleting Extraneous Files When Creating Projects in Developer Studio
        Previous Versions
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Maintain
    Maintain Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS Maintain
        Road Map: Where Should You Go?
        What Is WebFOCUS Maintain?
        Overview of Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      WebFOCUS Maintain Basic Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating a Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Explorer
        Adding a Data Source to Your Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Project Explorer
        Designing a Form
        Saving Your Work
        Selecting a Starting Object
        Running Your Project Locally
        Using Radio Buttons
        Giving Your Form a New Title
        Writing Data to the Data Source
        Adding a Form to Display Data From a Data Source
        Using the HTML Overflow Property
        Adding Form Navigation Buttons
        Deploying Your Project to a Different WebFOCUS Server
        Adding Images to Your Project
        What's Next?
      WebFOCUS Maintain Advanced Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating an Update Form
        Updating a Record in a Data Source
        Using Scripts for User Feedback
        Updating a Data Source Using a Read/Write Grid
        Creating a Welcome Screen Using the Menu Control
        Adding a WebFOCUS Report to Your Application
        Using a JavaScript Function to Define an E-mail Link
        Adding a Pop-up Calendar
        Getting Help in the Maintain Development Environment
      WebFOCUS Maintain Concepts
        Set-based Processing
        Controlling a Procedure's Flow
        Executing Other Maintain Procedures
        Forms and Event-driven Processing
        Reading From a Data Source
        Writing to a Data Source
        Transaction Processing
        Classes and Objects
      WebFOCUS Maintain Sample Data Sources
        Fannames Data Source
        Users Data Source
        Contact Data Source
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project
        Opening WebFOCUS Maintain
        Applications and Projects
        What Are the Building Blocks of a WebFOCUS Maintain Project?
        Editing Projects in the Maintain Development Environment
        Viewing System Messages in the Output Window
        Searching for Text in Your Project
        Editing Project Components as Text
        Incorporating Data Sources Into Your Project
        Using the Resource Wizard
        Team Development
      Developing Procedures
        Overview
        Specifying Data Sources for Your Procedure
        Using Functions in Procedures
        Using Variables in Procedures
        Using Data Source Stacks in Procedures
        Using the Type Wizard
        Using Import Modules
        Testing Procedures With the Run Procedure Option
      Using the Form Editor
        Form Editor Overview
        Layout of the Form Editor
        Using the Controls Palette
        Using the Property Sheet
        Using Drawing Aids
        Selecting Multiple Controls
        Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Duplicating Controls
        Resizing Controls
        Aligning Controls
        Spacing Controls
        Grouping Controls
        Changing the Order of Controls
        Undoing and Redoing Actions
        Layering Controls
      Developing and Using Forms
        Before You Begin Designing Forms
        Creating and Managing Forms
        Copying a Form Within a Procedure
        Changing Form Properties
        Using Cascading Style Sheets
        Dynamically Manipulating Forms at Run Time
        How WebFOCUS Maintain Saves Your Forms
        Using a Driver Procedure
      Defining Events and Event Handlers
        Using the Event Handler Editor
        Events
        Using a Maintain Function as an Event Handler
        Using Script Functions as Event Handlers
        Using Web Links as Event Handlers
      Developing and Using Controls
        Which Control Should You Use?
        Using Buttons
        Using Check Boxes
        Using Combo Boxes and List Boxes
        Using Edit Boxes and Multi-Edit Boxes
        Using Frames
        Using Grids and HTML Tables
        Using Group Boxes
        Using HTML Objects
        Using Images
        Using Java Applets
        Using Lines
        Using Menus
        Using Radio Buttons
        Using Text
        Using ActiveX Controls
        Dynamically Manipulating Controls at Run Time
        Defining Colors for Your Form and Controls
        Assigning Help to Your Forms and Controls
        Assigning Tab Order to Controls
      Form and Control Properties Reference
        (GroupCode) Property
        (Name) Property
        Alignment Property
        Alt Property
        AlternateRowColor Property
        BackColor Property
        BackColorOver Property
        BackgroundImage Property
        Border Property
        BorderColor Property
        BorderText Property
        BorderWidth Property
        Bottom Property
        Calendar Property
        CaseStyle Property
        Checked Property
        Columns Property
        Content Property
        CSSName Property
        CursorPointer Property
        DefaultButton Property
        Enabled Property
        FixedColumns Property
        Font Property
        ForeColor Property
        ForeColorOver Property
        GridLines Property
        HeaderBackColor Property
        HeaderFont Property
        HeaderForeColor Property
        Headers Property
        Height Property
        Help Property
        Hyperlink Property
        IBIValidation Property
        Image Property
        ImageDown Property
        ImageOver Property
        ItemBorder Property
        Layer Property
        Left Property
        ListItems Property
        Map Property
        MaximizeBox and MinimizeBox Properties
        MultiSelection Property
        OnLoad Property
        Orientation Property
        Overflow Property
        Password Property
        PenWidth Property
        ReadOnly Property
        Right Property
        Rows Property
        ScrollBars Property
        ScrollHeight and ScrollWidth Properties
        Scrolling Property
        SelectedItem/SelectedItems Property
        Sizeable Property
        Source Property
        Stretched Property
        Tabstop Property
        Text Property
        TextOnLeft Property
        Title Property
        ToolTipText Property
        Top Property
        Visible Property
        Width Property
        ZIndex Property
      Executing Other Procedures
        The Advantages of Modularizing Source Code
        Using the CALL and EXEC Commands
        Executing a Procedure on Another Server: AT Server
        Keeping or Terminating the Server Session: KEEP/DROP
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain Procedures: FROM...INTO
        Passing Parameters Between a Maintain Procedure and a WebFOCUS Procedure: FROM ... INTO
        Optimizing Performance: Data Continuity and Memory Management
      Using WebFOCUS Procedures in Your Application
        What Can WebFOCUS Procedures Do?
        Incorporating WebFOCUS Procedures Into Your Project
        Executing WebFOCUS Procedures From Maintain Procedures
        Using WebFOCUS Report Output in Maintain
        Executing Maintain Procedures From WebFOCUS Report Procedures
        Using Variable Binding From WebFOCUS Reports
      Developing Classes and Objects
        What Are Classes and Objects?
        Defining Classes
        Reusing Classes: Class Libraries
        Declaring Objects
      Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Compiling WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures
        Executing WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures From Outside the Maintain Development Environment
        Security and Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Customizing Key Functions and JavaScript for WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Closing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Developing an Application for a Shared Application Server
      Designing Applications for Scalability and Performance
        Application Partitioning
        Presentation Logic
        Database Logic
        Miscellaneous Business Logic
        EXEC Command, CALL Command, and System Resources
        Use When Appropriate
        Using the Best Parts
        Persistence Management
        Development Standards
        Tips for Designing Applications
      Ensuring Transaction Integrity
        Transaction Integrity Overview
        Why Is Transaction Integrity Important?
        Defining a Transaction
        Evaluating Whether a Transaction Was Successful
        Concurrent Transaction Processing
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for DB2 Data Sources
      Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        WebFOCUS Maintain Application Debugger
        Type on EDAPRINT
        Maintain Statement Trace
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        Additional Trace Settings
      Migrating Applications to Version 7
        Before You Begin Migrating
        The Migration Process
        After the Migration Process
      Deploying Legacy Applications to the Web
        What Are the Differences Between Windows-Deployed and Web-Deployed Applications?
        Legacy Form Properties and Behavior
        Upgrading Legacy Windows Applications
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Maintain Language Reference
      Language Rules Reference
        Case Sensitivity
        Specifying Names
        Reserved Words
        What Can You Include in a Procedure?
        Multi-line Commands
        Terminating a Command's Syntax
        Adding Comments
      Expressions Reference
        Types of Expressions You Can Write
        Writing Numeric Expressions
        Writing Date Expressions
        Writing Date-Time Expressions
        Writing Character Expressions
        Writing Logical Expressions
        Writing Conditional Expressions
        Handling Null Values in Expressions
      Command Reference
        Language Summary
        BEGIN
        CALL
        CASE
        COMMIT
        COMPUTE
        COPY
        DECLARE
        DECRYPT
        DELETE
        DESCRIBE
        ENCRYPT / DECRYPT
        END
        EXEC
        FocCount
        FocCurrent
        FocError
        FocErrorRow
        FocFetch
        FocIndex
        FocMsg
        GOTO
        IF
        INCLUDE
        INFER
        MAINTAIN
        MATCH
        MNTCON CDN_FEXINPUT
        MNTCON COMPILE
        MNTCON EX
        MNTCON EXIT_WARNING
        MNTCON LOADIMAGE
        MNTCON MATCH_CASE
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        MNTCON RADIO_BUTTON_EMIT_TEXT
        MNTCON REMOTESTYLE
        MNTCON RUN
        MNTCON RUNIMAGE
        MODULE
        NEXT
        ON MATCH
        ON NEXT
        ON NOMATCH
        ON NONEXT
        PERFORM
        REPEAT
        REPOSITION
        REVISE
        ROLLBACK
        SAY
        SET
        STACK CLEAR
        STACK SORT
        SYS_MGR
        SYS_MGR.DBMS_ERRORCODE
        SYS_MGR.ENGINE
        SYS_MGR.FOCSET
        SYS_MGR.GET_INPUTPARAMS_COUNT
        SYS_MGR.GET_NAMEPARM
        SYS_MGR.GET_POSITIONPARM
        SYS_MGR.PRE_MATCH
        TYPE
        UPDATE
        Winform
      WebFOCUS Maintain Error Messages
        Error Message Listings
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster Development and Administration
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Processing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Features
      Enabling User Capabilities
        Accessing the ReportCaster User Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Library Management
      ReportCaster Security
        ReportCaster Credentials
        ReportCaster Security Settings
        Additional User IDs for Use With ReportCaster
        Configuring ReportCaster With External Authentication
        ReportCaster Remote Authentication
        Include Windows Domain Name With User ID for IWA
        File System Permissions
        Optional Encryption Providers for ReportCaster
      Configuring ReportCaster
        About Configuring ReportCaster
        Distribution Servers Settings
        Repository Settings
        Security Settings
        General Preferences Settings
        Email Settings
        FTP/SFTP Settings
        Zip Settings
        Other Schedule Defaults
        Log Settings
        Traces Settings
        Code Page Settings
        LDAP Settings
        Data Servers Settings
        Two Way Email Settings
        Report Library Settings
        Managed Reporting Settings
        Library Search Settings
        Customizing ReportCaster Plug-ins
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling ReportCaster Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        ReportCaster Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        ReportCaster Repository Creation Tracing
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Tracing for ReportCaster
        Using the Java Console
      ReportCaster Administrative Tasks
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Globally Updating Repository Field Values
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      ReportCaster Repository Tables and Reports
        About Repository Reports
        ReportCaster Repository Tables
      Loading User IDs Into the ReportCaster Repository
        Using the Synchronize External Users Utility
        Using SQL Statements to Load ReportCaster User IDs and Groups
      Accessing ReportCaster and Enabling User Capabilities in the Applet
        Security Warning
        Accessing the ReportCaster Development and Administration Interface
        Enabling ReportCaster Privileges for Managed Reporting Users
        Enabling ReportCaster Capabilities for Non-Managed Reporting Users
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Creating a Schedule Using the ReportCaster Applet
        Overview
        Schedule Tab
        Creating a Task
        Specifying Distribution Options
        Specifying Optional and Notification Settings
      Maintaining Schedules in the ReportCaster Applet Interface
        Maintaining a Schedule
        Schedule Blackout Dates
      Tracking a Schedule in the Applet Interface
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Troubleshooting ReportCaster Log Reports
      Working With Distribution Lists in the ReportCaster Applet
        Distribution List Overview
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      ReportCaster Console Applet
        Accessing the ReportCaster Console
        ReportCaster Console Options
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        Viewing, Running, and Deleting a Scheduled Job
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Using the Log Option to View Information About a Distributed Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
        Globally Replacing Field Values in the ReportCaster Repository
        Logging Off the ReportCaster Console
        Accessing the Online Help File
      Using the Report Library From the Applet
        Using the Report Library
        Managing Users and Groups Using the Library Access List Interface
        Accessing Library Content
        Viewing Library Reports
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill-Through Support
        Library Management
      Using Change Management in the HTML Interface
        About ReportCaster Change Management
        Using the Change Management Interface
      Configuring ReportCaster Using the Applet Tool
        About the ReportCaster Server Configuration Tool
        General Configuration Settings in the Applet
        LDAP Settings
        Data Server Settings in the Applet
        Two-Way Email Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Settings in the Applet
        Managed Reporting Settings in the Applet
        Report Library Integration With the Google Search Engine
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster End User's Manual
      Introducing ReportCaster
        Overview of ReportCaster
        The ReportCaster Development Interface
        Considerations When Using ReportCaster
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        About Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple E-mail Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule
        About the Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule
        Frequency Options
        About Tasks
        Distribution Options
        Notification Options
      Maintaining a Schedule
        About Maintaining a Schedule
        Editing a Schedule
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Setting Schedule Blackout Dates
        Creating, Changing, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Tracking ReportCaster Schedules
        Using Schedule Logs
        Checking the Schedule Status
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        Flash
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB
        TABT
        VISDIS
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a TOC Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      Using the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        About the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule Using the Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Frequency Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
        Report Options
        Notification Options in the Single Page Scheduling Tool
      Using the Scheduling Wizard
        Overview
        Schedule Options
        Report Information
        Report Parameters
        Distribution Options in the Scheduling Wizard
        Priority, Notification, and Zip File Options
        Running a Schedule Without Saving It
      Working With Distribution Lists in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Distribution or Address Book List Interface
        Creating a Distribution or Address Book List
        Editing a Distribution List
        Deleting a Distribution List
      Maintaining a Schedule Using the HTML User Interface
        About the Schedules Interface
        Editing a Schedule in the HTML User Interface
        Cloning a Schedule
        Deleting a Schedule
        Viewing a Log Report
        Purging the Log File
        Schedule Blackout Dates
        Checking the Status of a Scheduled Job
        Creating, Updating, and Deleting an Execution ID
      Using the Report Library from the HTML Interface
        About the Report Library
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List
        Creating and Maintaining a Library Access List in the HTML User Interface
        Accessing the Report Library
        Viewing Library Content
        Using the Library Watch List
        Deleting Content From the Library
        Searching for Library Content
        PDF Drill Through Support
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
      ReportCaster API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Troubleshooting API Samples
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        User Samples
        Credential Authentication
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Tables Accessed by the Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        ReportCaster Repository Tables Accessed by the Servlets
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Enable
    WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex User's Guide
      Introduction
        RIA Technologies
        About WebFOCUS Enable for Adobe Flex
      Prerequisites and Download Instructions
        Software Prerequisites
        Downloading WebFOCUS Enable From Information Builders
        Compatibility Features
        Component Chart Licensing
        IBI NameSpace: Prefix for WebFOCUS Enable Components
      Custom Components and Properties
        About Components and Properties
        Component/Property Tables
        Customizing Component Properties
      Developing a WebFOCUS Enable Application
        Sample Application
        Application Basics
        Creating a Flex Project
        Creating an Input File in WebFOCUS Developer Studio
        Creating an Application Canvas
        Creating a Title for the Dashboard
        Adding Custom Animation
        Logically Organizing Content With the TabNavigator
        Binding a Procedure to the ibiDataGrid Using Custom Components
        Creating an Aggregated Grid Using Existing ibiDataGrid Data
        Creating a Filter
        Using the ibiDataGrid to Filter Other Components
        Creating a Pie Chart and Column Chart
        Adding a Tree Control, Combo Box, and Slider
        Compiling SWF Files
      Creating Other Charts
        Preparing the Layout and Adding the Charts
        Understanding Additional Chart Types
      Deploying an Application
        Deploying an Application in Managed Reporting Business Intelligence Dashboard
      Customizing WebFOCUS Enable Applications
        ibiDataGrid Customization Options
        Using Filters
        Customizing ibiChart Components
        Using IBI Custom Event Listeners and Functions
      Developing a Custom Logon Page and Managed Reporting View
        Building a Logon Page and Displaying the Domain Tree and Reports
        Developing a Custom Logon Page
      Using the WebFOCUS Enable API
        Initializing an Application
        Creating an Aggregated DataGrid
        Saggregate
        Filtering Details of the DataGrid From the List Box
        Filtering an Aggregated DataGrid From the List Box
        Creating a Pie Chart
      IBI Component for Google™ Maps API for Flash®
        ibiMap001 Features
      Building a Basic Dashboard
        Building the Dashboard
      Adding Styles to a Dashboard
        Creating Flex Style Codes
        Applying Styles to the ibiDataGrid
        Applying Styles to ibiColumnChart and ibiPieChart
        Creating Flex Functions
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Release Notes 2.0.0
  Visual Discovery
    Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components With Developer Studio
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Key Features
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server (Thin Client)
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Developing an Analytic Dashboard
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Distributing a Visual Discovery File With ReportCaster
        Working With Visual Discovery Components on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
      Tutorial: Building a Visual Discovery Analytic Dashboard
        Before You Begin
        Building an Analytic Dashboard With Visual Discovery Components
      Deploying Visual Discovery Applications
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for Server (Thin Client)
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Visualization Components: Descriptions and Usage
        What Is a Glyph?
        Bar Charts
        Line Charts
        Pie Charts
        Histograms
        Counts
        Data Constellations
        Data Constellation Maps
        Data Sheets
        Multiscapes
        Paraboxes
        Scatter Plots
        Summary Sheets
        Time Tables
        Perspectives
      Inserting Chart Controls Into a Visual Discovery Dashboard
        Building an Application With Advanced Chart Controls
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Graphics
    WebFOCUS Graphics
      Graphing Basics
        What Is Scalable Vector Graphics?
        Viewing Scalable Vector Graphics
        Portable Network Graphics
        Virtual Coordinate System
        Implementing API Calls
      Using WebFOCUS Graphics
        How Properties and Methods Work
        The GraphType Property
        How Graphs Are Imaged
        Chart Layout Manager
        Graph-Wide Parameters
        Graph Frame Attributes
        Axis Attributes
        Grid Lines
        Curve Fit Lines
        Java 2D Line Objects
        Risers and Markers
        Legends
        Labels and Titles
        Data Text
        Customizing Data Text
        Formatting Numbers
        Formatting Text Objects
        Java 2D Text Objects
        Autofitting
        Graph-Specific Properties and Methods
        Colors and Shading
        Textures and Gradients
        Panning, Rotating, and Scaling
        Graph Editing Characteristics
        Annotations
        Drill-Down and URLs
        Multiple Drill-Down From Graph
        Alternate Formatting
        Beveled Borders
        Reference Lines
      Using Data in a Graph
        Graph Titles and Labels
        Data Scrolling and Zooming
        How Missing Data Is Handled
        Data Requirements for Different Graph Types
      Properties
        Properties for Graphs
        AdjustAutoScaleForRefLines
        AlignMultiYBars
        AltFmtFrameSeparator
        AltFmtFrameNumColors
        Autoshading
        AutoshadingWalls
        AxisTextAutofitMax
        AxisTextAutofitMin
        AxisTextAutofitMode
        AxisTextAutofitPercent
        BiDirectional
        BoxPlotType
        Cascade
        ColorMode
        ConnectLineMarkers
        ConnectParetoBars
        ConnectScatterMarkers
        CubeFocusFactor
        CubeIsometricProjection
        CubeLightSourceX
        CubeLightSourceY
        CubeLightSourceZ
        CubePanX
        CubePanY
        CubeProportional
        CubeRiserInterpolation
        CubeSizeX
        CubeSizeY
        CubeSizeZ
        CubeSquareRisers
        CubeTranslationX
        CubeTranslationY
        CubeTranslationZ
        CubeViewerX
        CubeViewerY
        CubeViewerZ
        CubeWallThickX
        CubeWallThickY
        CubeWallThickZ
        CubeZoomFactor
        CurveFitEquationDisplay
        CurveFitHighOrderFirst
        CurveFitNumSegments
        DataItemsAlongSeries
        DataLineThickness
        DataScrollerPresenceGroups
        DataScrollerPresenceSeries
        DataSortType
        DataTextAngleDefault
        DataTextDisplay
        DataTextFormat
        DataTextFormatPattern
        DataTextPosition
        DataTextRadiusDefault
        DataTextStackedTotalOnTop()
        DataTextTemplateBubble
        DataTextTemplateHiLo
        DataTextTemplateScatter
        DepthAngle
        DepthRadius
        Display3DFloor
        Display3DLeftWall
        Display3DRightWall
        DisplayBarAsPictograph
        DisplayFunnelGroup
        DisplayParetoSeries
        DocumentHeightInTwips
        DocumentWidthInTwips
        DrawAreaMarkers
        DrawCompleteAreaRiser
        DualAxisLineDisplay
        DualAxisSplitPosition
        ExactColorByHeight
        ExtendToFrameEdge
        FillMissingData
        FootnoteAutofit
        FootnoteDisplay
        FootnoteString
        ForceSeriesAbsolute
        FrameAutoShade
        FrameDisplay
        FunnelLabelValueLocation
        GaugeBackgroundStyle
        GaugeDescending
        GaugeIgnoreBackgroundStyle
        GaugeMajorAutoStep
        GaugeMajorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeMinorAutoStep
        GaugeMinorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeNeedleStyle
        GaugeRelativeInnerRadius
        GaugeRelativeThickness
        GaugeSizeMode
        GaugeStartAngle
        GaugeStopAngle
        GraphType
        Grid3DFloorDisplayX
        Grid3DFloorDisplayZ
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayY
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayZ
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayX
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayX
        Grid3DRiserDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayZ
        HiliteBarResize
        IgnoreGridSkip
        IgnoreTickSkip
        InterpretAsHLOC
        LegendAutomatic
        LegendDisplay
        LegendMarkerPosition
        LegendMarkersPerRow
        LegendOrient
        LegendReverse
        LegendScroll
        LegendSeriesCount
        LegendSeriesStart
        LegendTextAutofit
        MajorGridDrawEveryCount
        MajorGridTickInterval
        MinorGridTickInterval
        MarkerDisplay
        MarkerSizeDefault
        MoveAxisTitles
        NestedLabels
        NullLegendMarkerShapesAsSquares
        NumMissingDataSegments
        NumPieArcSegmentsPerPixel
        OtherPercentage
        OtherSeries
        OutputSVG
        OverDrawSkip
        O1AxisLineDisplay
        O1AxisSide
        O1ExcludeMaxLabel
        O1ExcludeMinLabel
        O1LabelAutoAngle
        O1LabelAutofit
        O1LabelAutoSkip
        O1LabelDisplay
        O1LabelMargin
        O1LabelRotate
        O1LabelSkipBegin
        O1LabelSkipCount
        O1LabelStagger
        O1LabelWrap
        O1MajorGridDisplay
        O1MajorGridStyle
        O1MajorTickDisplay
        O1MajorTickStyle
        O1MinorGridCount
        O1MinorGridDisplay
        O1MinorGridStyle
        O1MinorTickCount
        O1MinorTickDisplay
        O1MinorTickStyle
        O1TitleAutofit
        O1TitleDisplay
        O1TitleString
        O2ExcludeMaxLabel
        O2ExcludeMinLabel
        O2LabelAutofit
        O2LabelAutoSkip
        O2LabelDisplay
        O2LabelRotate
        O2LabelSkipBegin
        O2LabelSkipCount
        O2LabelWrap
        O2TitleAutofit
        O2TitleDisplay
        O2TitleString
        ParetoDisplayThreshold
        ParetoY2MajorGridStep
        ParetoY2MajorTickStep
        PieBarLabelDisplay
        PieBarLabelString
        PieBarSeries
        PieDepth
        PieFeelerTextDisplay
        PieFeelerTextFormat
        PieFeelerTextFormatPattern
        PieLabelDisplay
        PieRingSize
        PieRingTotalDisplay
        PieRingTotalFormat
        PieRingTotalFormatPattern
        PieRotate
        PieSorting
        PiesPerRow
        PieTilt
        Place
        PrimitiveAntialiasing
        QuadrantLineCountX
        QuadrantLineCountY
        ReferencePercentageMode
        ReferenceTextPosition
        RemoveDuplicateDataText
        RepositionDataTextCollision
        RepositionStackedDataTextCollision
        ReshapeEnable
        ResizeBarMode
        ReverseGroups
        ReverseSeries
        Riser3DThicknessY
        RiserBarGroupSpacing
        RiserBorderMode
        RiserWidth
        ScaleFromZero
        ScrollOffsetGroup
        ScrollOffsetSeries
        SelectionEnable
        SelectionEnableMove
        SeriesAreRows
        SeriesDefaultBorderColor
        SeriesDefaultTransparentBorderColor
        SeriesLineWidthDefault
        SeriesLooping
        ShadowXOffsetDefault
        ShadowYOffsetDefault
        SizeToContainer
        SmoothLines
        SquareMarkers
        StackedDataValueSum
        Stock52WeekHighDisplay
        Stock52WeekHighValue
        Stock52WeekLowDisplay
        Stock52WeekLowValue
        StockCandleForVolumeColor
        StockCloseSplitDisplay
        StockCloseTicksDisplay
        StockMovingAverageDisplay
        StockOpenTicksDisplay
        StockTickLength
        SubtitleAutofit
        SubtitleDisplay
        SubtitleString
        TextAntialiasing
        TextAutofitMax
        TextAutofitMin
        TitleAutofit
        TitleDisplay
        TitleString
        ToolTipDelay
        ToolTipDisplay
        ToolTipMode
        ToolTipTimeoutEnabled
        TransparentMarkers
        TransparentMarkerSize
        UseDefaultBubbleMarker
        UseOffScreen
        UseSeriesBorderDefaults
        UseSeriesShapes
        UseTimeScaleAxis
        ValidGroupsMin
        ValidSeriesMin
        ViewableGroups
        ViewableGroupsStock
        ViewableSeries
        ViewableSeriesStock
        Viewing3DAnglePreset
        WaterfallLastGroupTotal
        WaterfallStackColorMode
        X1AxisDescending
        X1AxisLineDisplay
        X1AxisSide
        X1ExcludeMaxLabel
        X1ExcludeMinLabel
        X1LabelAutofit
        X1LabelDisplay
        X1LabelFormat
        X1LabelFormatPattern
        X1LabelRotate
        X1LabelStagger
        X1LogScale
        X1MajorGridDisplay
        X1MajorGridStep
        X1MajorGridStepAuto
        X1MajorGridStyle
        X1MajorTickDisplay
        X1MajorTickStyle
        X1MinorGridDisplay
        X1MinorGridStep
        X1MinorGridStepAuto
        X1MinorGridStyle
        X1MinorTickDisplay
        X1MinorTickStyle
        X1MustIncludeZero
        X1OffScaleDisplay
        X1ScaleMax
        X1ScaleMaxAuto
        X1ScaleMin
        X1ScaleMinAuto
        X1TitleAutofit
        X1TitleDisplay
        X1TitleString
        X1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y1AxisDescending
        Y1AxisLineDisplay
        Y1AxisSide
        Y1ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y1ExcludeMinLabel
        Y1LabelAutofit
        Y1LabelDisplay
        Y1LabelFormat
        Y1LabelFormatPattern
        Y1LabelRotate
        Y1LabelStagger
        Y1LogScale
        Y1MajorGridDisplay
        Y1MajorGridStep
        Y1MajorGridStepAuto
        Y1MajorGridStyle
        Y1MajorTickDisplay
        Y1MajorTickStyle
        Y1MinorGridDisplay
        Y1MinorGridStepAuto
        Y1MinorGridStyle
        Y1MinorTickDisplay
        Y1MinorTickStepAuto
        Y1MinorTickStyle
        Y1MustIncludeZero
        Y1OffScaleDisplay
        Y1ScaleMax
        Y1ScaleMaxAuto
        Y1ScaleMin
        Y1ScaleMinAuto
        Y1TitleAutofit
        Y1TitleDisplay
        Y1TitleString
        Y1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y2AxisDescending
        Y2AxisLineDisplay
        Y2AxisSide
        Y2ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y2ExcludeMinLabel
        Y2LabelAutofit
        Y2LabelDisplay
        Y2LabelFormat
        Y2LabelFormatPattern
        Y2LabelRotate
        Y2LabelStagger
        Y2LogScale
        Y2MajorGridDisplay
        Y2MajorGridStep
        Y2MajorGridStepAuto
        Y2MajorGridStyle
        Y2MinorGridDisplay
        Y2MinorGridStep
        Y2MinorGridStepAuto
        Y2MinorGridStyle
        Y2MustIncludeZero
        Y2OffScaleDisplay
        Y2ScaleMax
        Y2ScaleMaxAuto
        Y2ScaleMin
        Y2ScaleMinAuto
        Y2TitleAutofit
        Y2TitleDisplay
        Y2TitleString
        Y2ZeroLineDisplay
        Y3AxisDescending
        Y3LogScale
        Y3ZeroLineDisplay
        Y4AxisDescending
        Y4LogScale
        Y4ZeroLineDisplay
        Y5AxisDescending
        Y5LogScale
        Y5ZeroLineDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextStackedTotalOnTopDisplay
        ZoomDirection
        ZoomPercentage
      Methods
        get Methods
        restore Methods
        save()
        send Methods
        set Methods
      Methods That Return an Object ID
        Object ID Methods
        getAllSeries()
        getAnnotation()
        getAnnotationBox()
        getAnnotationLabel()
        getAnnotationLine()
        getAreaRiser()
        getAreaRiserBottom()
        getAreaRiserTop()
        getBarRiser()
        getBarRiserBottom()
        getBarRiserSide()
        getChartBackground()
        getColorByHeight()
        getCubeFloor()
        getCubeFloorGridX()
        getCubeFloorGridZ()
        getCubeLeftWall()
        getCubeLeftWallGridY()
        getCubeLeftWallGridZ()
        getCubeRightWall()
        getCubeRightWallGridX()
        getCubeRightWallGridZ()
        getCubeRiserFace()
        getCubeRiserGridX()
        getCubeRiserGridY()
        getCubeRiserGridZ()
        getCurveFitCorrelationText()
        getCurveFitCorrelationTextbox()
        getCurveFitEquationText()
        getCurveFitEquationTextbox()
        getCurveFitLineRiser()
        getDataText()
        getExceptionalRiser()
        getFootnote()
        getFootnoteBox()
        getFrame()
        getFrameBottom()
        getFrameSeparator()
        getFrameSide()
        getFunnelCrust()
        getFunnelFeeler()
        getFunnelLabel()
        getFunnelValueLabel()
        getGaugeArea()
        getGaugeBackground()
        getGaugeBand1...5()
        getGaugeBand1...5Label()
        getGaugeLabel()
        getGaugeMajorTick()
        getGaugeMinorTick()
        getGaugeNeedle()
        getGaugeScaleArea()
        getGaugeTitle()
        getGlobal()
        getGroup()
        getGroupScroller()
        getGroupScrollerEditBox()
        getGroupScrollerEditLeft()
        getGroupScrollerEditRight()
        getGroupScrollerEditThumb()
        getGroupScrollerThumb()
        getHistogramRiser()
        getLegendArea()
        getLegendMarker()
        getLegendScroller()
        getLegendScrollerThumb()
        getLegendText()
        getLegendTextBox()
        getLineMarker()
        getLineRiser()
        getLineRiserSide()
        getLineRiserTop()
        getNestedO1Label0...8()
        getNestedO1Label0...8Box()
        getNestedO1LabelLine()
        getNonZeroBaseLineZeroLine()
        getO1Axis()
        getO1AxisLine()
        getO1Label()
        getO1MajorGrid()
        getO1MajorTick()
        getO1MinorGrid()
        getO1MinorTick()
        getO1Title()
        getO1TitleBox()
        getO2Axis()
        getO2Label()
        getO2MajorGrid()
        getO2MinorGrid()
        getO2Title()
        getO2TitleBox()
        getParetoLineMarker()
        getParetoLineRiser()
        getParetoLineRiserSide()
        getParetoLineRiserSide1()
        getParetoLineRiserSide2()
        getParetoLineRiserTop()
        getParetoLineRiserTop1()
        getParetoLineRiserTop2()
        getPieBarConnectLineBottom()
        getPieBarConnectLines()
        getPieBarLabel()
        getPieBarRiserTop()
        getPieBarSlice()
        getPieBarSliceCrust()
        getPieFeelerLine()
        getPieFrame()
        getPieLabel()
        getPieRingLabel()
        getPieSliceFeelerPercent()
        getPieSliceFeelerValue()
        getPieSliceLabel()
        getPlaceHorzO1LabelsTitle()
        getPlaceVertO1LabelsTitle()
        getQuadrantLine()
        getReferenceLine()
        getReferenceLineLegendText()
        getReferenceLineO1()
        getReferenceLineO2()
        getReferenceLineX1()
        getReferenceLineY1()
        getReferenceLineY2()
        getReferenceLineTextO1()
        getReferenceLineTextO2()
        getReferenceLineTextX1()
        getReferenceLineTextY1()
        getReferenceLineTextY2()
        getScatterQuadrantLine()
        getSeries()
        getSeriesGroup()
        getSeriesScroller()
        getSeriesScrollerEditBox()
        getSeriesScrollerEditLeft()
        getSeriesScrollerEditRight()
        getSeriesScrollerEditThumb()
        getSeriesScrollerThumb()
        getSlice()
        getSliceCrust()
        getSliceRing()
        getSpectralLegendMarker()
        getSpectralMarker()
        getStackConnectLine()
        getStock52WeekHighLine()
        getStock52WeekLowLine()
        getStockCloseTick()
        getStockFallingRiser()
        getStockHighLine()
        getStockLowerRiser()
        getStockLowLine()
        getStockMALine()
        getStockOpenTick()
        getStockRiser()
        getStockRisingRiser()
        getStockVolumeRiser()
        getSubTitle()
        getSubTitleBox()
        getThermGaugeArea()
        getThermGaugeBackground()
        getThermGaugeNeedle()
        getTimeScaleLevel()
        getTitle()
        getTitleBox()
        getWaterFallLine()
        getX1Axis()
        getX1AxisLine()
        getX1Label()
        getX1MajorGrid()
        getX1MajorTick()
        getX1MinorGrid()
        getX1MinorTick()
        getX1Title()
        getX1TitleBox()
        getX1ZeroLine()
        getY1Axis()
        getY1AxisLine()
        getY1FrontZeroLine()
        getY1Label()
        getY1MajorGrid()
        getY1MajorTick()
        getY1MinorGrid()
        getY1MinorTick()
        getY1Title()
        getY1TitleBox()
        getY1ZeroLine()
        getY2Axis()
        getY2AxisLine()
        getY2FrontZeroLine()
        getY2Label()
        getY2MajorGrid()
        getY2MajorTick()
        getY2MinorGrid()
        getY2MinorTick()
        getY2Title()
        getY2TitleBox()
        getY2ZeroLine()
        getY3Axis()
        getY3AxisLine()
        getY3FrontZeroLine()
        getY3Label()
        getY3MajorGrid()
        getY3MajorTick()
        getY3MinorGrid()
        getY3MinorTick()
        getY3Title()
        getY3TitleBox()
        getY3ZeroLine()
        getY4Axis()
        getY4AxisLine()
        getY4Label()
        getY4MajorGrid()
        getY4MajorTick()
        getY4MinorGrid()
        getY4MinorTick()
        getY4Title()
        getY4TitleBox()
        getY4ZeroLine()
        getY5Axis()
        getY5AxisLine()
        getY5Label()
        getY5MajorGrid()
        getY5MajorTick()
        getY5MinorGrid()
        getY5MinorTick()
        getY5Title()
        getY5TitleBox()
        getY5ZeroLine()
      Graph Types and 3D Preset Viewing Angles
        Graph Types
        3D Preset Viewing Angles
      Graph Properties Index
        Current Graph Properties
        Graph Properties Reserved For Future Use
        Graph Properties Reserved for Internal Use
      Graph Methods Index
        Current Graph Methods
        Reserved for Future Use
        Reserved for Internal Use
      IdentObj Methods Index
        Current IndentObj Methods
        IndentObj Methods Reserved for Future Use
      Static Variables
        Current Static Variables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems: ESRI ArcGIS Server and ArcGIS Flex API
      Introducing Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Geographic Information Systems
        Defining the Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
        GBIS Components
        New Features
      WebFOCUS GIS Adapter Architecture
        XML-based Configuration Blocks
        Orientation Modes
      Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        Creating a Map Service
      Using the WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer
        Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Flex Viewer Components
        WebFOCUS Map Component
        WebFOCUS Report Component
        Synthetic Layer Component
        WebFOCUS Data View Component
        JavaScript Functions Available From Flexmapviewer.jsp
      Creating WebFOCUS GIS Procedures
        Incorporating the GIS Filter
        Creating a Report Procedure
        Creating an Identify Procedure
        Creating a Map Procedure
      Useful Techniques and Examples
        Creating Drill-Downs From a Report to a Map
        Drawing Multiple Map Layers
        Transitioning Between Map Images
        Including Custom Libraries
        Embedding Custom JavaScript Functions in the ESRIINFO.XML File
        Directing Alternate Report Output to Different Windows
        Specifying Custom Colors in Your FOCEXEC
        Automatically Zooming On Selected Portions of the Map
        Automatically Zooming On Features of the Map That Were Drawn
        Controlling the Visible Map Viewing Area
        Controlling Layers That Are Visible
        Increasing the Maximum Number of Selectable Map Features
        Improving Map and Report Response Time
        Specifying Default Drawing Methods for Additional Features on the Map
        Describing and Working With a Synthetic Layer
        Defining a Tiled Map Service
        Loading the Flex Map Viewer
        Using Symbols Defined in Your Configuration File
        Controlling Layers That are Visible
        Enabling a Buffer Using Selected Features From the Layer
      Glossary of Related Terms
        A-E
        F-H
        I-L
        M-Q
        R-T
        U-X
      XML Schema Reference
        Root Element <mapfexs>
        Class Definitions
        Constants
      Symbol Class Settings and Parameters
        SimpleLineSymbol
        SimplePolygonSymbol
        SimpleMarkerSymbol
        RasterMarkerSymbol
        TrueTypeMarkerSymbol
        CallOutMarkerSymbol
        TextMarkerSymbol
      HTML Color Values
        Color Value Table
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Web Services
    WebFOCUS Web Services
      WebFOCUS Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using WebFOCUS Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
        WebFOCUS Web Services Architecture
      Using the WebFOCUS WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating WSDL Files With the WSDL Creation Utility
        Creating a Generic WSDL File for an Application
        Creating a WebFOCUS Report as a Web Service Function
        Creating a Managed Reporting Report as a Web Service Function
        Choosing Functions for a WSDL File
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service With Apache Axis
      WebFOCUS Web Service Structures
        Structures
      WebFOCUS Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Managed Reporting Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
        Debugging WebFOCUS Web Services Adapter
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    ReportCaster Web Services
      ReportCaster Web Services
        What Is a Web Service?
        Components of a Web Service
        Using ReportCaster Web Services
        Example: Using a Web Service to Make an Online Reservation
      Using the ReportCaster WSDL Creation Utility
        WSDL Creation Utility Overview
        Creating a WSDL File for a ReportCaster Web Service
        Consuming a Web Service in .NET
        Consuming a Web Service in Java
      ReportCaster Web Service Structures
        Structures
      ReportCaster Web Services Functions
        Functions
        Address Book Service Functions
        Logon Function
        Library Access Service Functions
        Library Content Service Functions
        Console Service Functions
        Log Service Functions
        User Service Functions
        Schedule Service Functions
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Troubleshooting ReportCaster Web Services
        Troubleshooting Steps
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  WebFOCUS API
    WebFOCUS API Developer's Reference
      Introduction to WebFOCUS API
        Introducing WebFOCUS API
        Installation Requirements for the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API at a Glance
        Components of the WebFOCUS API
        WebFOCUS API Packages and Classes
        WebFOCUS Request Processing
      WebFOCUS API Functionality
        Managed Reporting Authentication
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Authentication
        Running a WebFOCUS Server Procedure
        Running a Managed Reporting Standard Report
        Running a Managed Reporting My Report
        Getting a List of Domains
        Getting a List of Domains for a Particular User
        Getting a List of Users
        User Flags
      WebFOCUS API Samples
        Elements of the WebFOCUS API Sample Application
        WebFOCUS API Sample Web Application Structure
        Sample Java Files
      Troubleshooting
        Debugging a WebFOCUS API Application
        WebFOCUS Error Codes
        Managed Reporting Error Codes
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Installation and Configuration
    Server Installation WebFOCUS Reporting Server DataMigrator Server
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for IBM i
    Developer Studio Installation and Configuration
  Reporting Server Administration
    Server Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, i5/OS, and z/OS
      Introduction
        Using the Web Console
        My Console Options
        Configuration Overview
        Running and Configuring the FOCUS Database Server (z/OS Only)
        Server Profiles
        Profile Commands
      Server Security
        Server Security Overview
        Configuring Authentication
        Configuring Privileges and Other Authorizations
        Configuring Server Encryption
        Access to Connection Information in WebFOCUS Procedures
      Configuring Adapters
        Configuring an Adapter
        Changing the Adapter Configuration
      Configuring a Remote Server
      Creating and Working With Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Reports and Help
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Allocation for UNIX and z/OS UNIX System Services
        Temporary File Directory Structure for Non-PDS Deployment
      Managing Metadata
        Creating Synonyms
        Testing Synonyms
        Managing Synonyms
      Creating and Working With Procedures
        Creating a Stored Procedure
        Editing a Stored Procedure
        Running a Stored Procedure
        Scheduling a Procedure
        Sending an Email Notification for a Procedure
        Stress Testing a Procedure
        Running Impact Analysis Reports
      Running and Monitoring Your Server
        Configuring Workspace Manager
        Workspace Configuration Settings
        Editing Configuration Files
        Fine-Tuning the Server
        Monitoring Server Activity
      Managing Listeners and Special Services
        Using the Listeners and Special Services Configuration Panes
      Troubleshooting
        Viewing Version Information
        Analyzing Server Activity
        Analyzing FOCUS Database Server Activity
        Tracing Server Activity
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for the Unified Server
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for USS/HFS Deployment
        Retrieving IBISNAP Output
        Recording and Reproducing User Actions
        Troubleshooting the Console
        Workspace Manager Safe Mode
        Server Processes
        Gathering Diagnostic Information for Customer Support
      Unicode Support
        Unicode and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Accessing Unicode Data
        Selecting, Reformatting, and Manipulating Characters
        Sort Order Under Unicode
        Added Unicode Support for Master Files, Data Files, and Application Directory Names
        Unicode PDF Output
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Adapter Administration for UNIX, Windows, OpenVMS, i5/OS, and z/OS
      Introduction to Adapters
        Processing Requests
        Functions of an Adapter
        Data Management
        Metadata Services With SQLENGINE SET
        Additional Master File Attributes
      Using the Adapter for 1010data
        Configuring the Adapter for 1010data
        Managing 1010data Metadata
        Customizing the 1010data Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Adabas
        Preparing the Adabas Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas
        Adabas Overview
        Managing Adabas Metadata
        Overview of Master and Access Files
        Master Files for Adabas
        Access Files for Adabas
        Mapping Adabas Descriptors
        Mapping Adabas Files With Variable-Length Records and Repeating Fields
        Using the GROUP Attribute to Cross-Reference Files
        Platform-Specific Functionality
        Customizing the Adabas Environment
        Adabas Reporting Considerations
        Adabas Writing Considerations
        Adapter Navigation
        Entry Segment Retrieval of Adabas Records
        Descendant Periodic Groups and Multi-Value Fields
        Descendant Adabas Records
      Using the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Preparing the Adabas Stored Procedures Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Managing Adabas Stored Procedure Metadata
        Invoking an Adabas Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Caché
        Preparing the Caché Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Caché
        Managing Caché Metadata
        Customizing the Caché Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Managing CICS Transaction Metadata
        Invoking a CICS Transaction
        Running a TPG/SPG/AAS Transaction
      Using the Adapters for C-ISAM and ISAM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter
        Managing C-ISAM Metadata
        Maintaining C-ISAM Data Sources Using SQL Commands
        Using a Secondary Index in C-ISAM and ISAM Files
      Using the Adapter for DATACOM
        Preparing the DATACOM Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DATACOM
        DATACOM Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing DATACOM Metadata
        Master Files for DATACOM
        Access Files for DATACOM
        Describing Multi-File Structures for DATACOM
        Data Retrieval Logic for DATACOM
      Using the Adapter for DB2
        Preparing the DB2 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB2
        Managing DB2 Metadata
        Reporting Against a DB2 Stored Procedure
        Customizing the DB2 Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Using DB2 Cube Views
        Calling a DB2 Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Preparing the DB Heritage Files Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Managing DB Heritage Files Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Multi-Format Logical Files
        DB Heritage Files Record Selection Efficiencies
      Using the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Preparing the Web Application Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Enterprise Java Beans
        Managing Enterprise Java Beans Metadata
      Using the Adapter for ERwin
        Preparation Steps for ERwin
        Configuring the Adapter for ERwin
        Enhancing Synonyms With ERwin Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Essbase
        Preparing the Essbase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Essbase
        Managing Essbase Metadata
        Customizing the Essbase Environment
        Essbase Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Modifying Essbase Data
      Using the Adapter for Excel
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel
        Managing Excel Metadata
        Customizing the Excel Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Managing Metadata for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
      Using the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Preparing the HP Neoview Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for HP Neoview
        Managing HP Neoview Metadata
        Customizing the HP Neoview Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/DB
        Preparing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing IDMS/DB Metadata
        Master Files for IDMS/DB
        Access Files for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Sample File Descriptions
        File Retrieval
        Record Retrieval
        Customizing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Tracing the Adapter for IDMS/DB
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/SQL
        Preparing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/SQL
        Managing IDMS/SQL Metadata
        Customizing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for IMS
        IMS Environments: Overview
        Preparing the IMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS
        Managing IMS Metadata
        Master File Attributes
        Access File Attributes (DBCTL)
        Migrating From an Existing MVS Server (DBCTL)
        WebFOCUS Reporting With IMS
        Maintaining IMS Data Sources (DBCTL)
      Using the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Preparing the IMS Transactions Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Managing IMS Transactions Metadata
        Invoking an IMS Transaction
        Invoking an IMS Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Information Manager
        IBM Information/Management
        How the Server Works With Information/Management
        InfoMan Hardware and Software Requirements
        Configuring the Adapter for InfoMan
        Defining the Adapter for InfoMan User ID and Session ID
        InfoMan Access Control
        Server Security in InfoMan
        IBM Information/Management Database Security
        AUTOIMAN Configuration File
        Describing InfoMan Data Sources
        Executing AUTOIMAN
        Working With AUTOIMAN
        Master File Generation Facility in InfoMan
        PIDT Selection Panel in InfoMan
        Retrieval PIDT Name Confirmation in InfoMan
      Using the Adapter for Informix
        Preparing the Informix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Informix
        Managing Informix Metadata
        Customizing the Informix Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Informix Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Ingres
        Preparing the Ingres Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Ingres
        Managing Ingres Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Interplex
        Preparing the Interplex Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Interplex
        Managing Interplex Metadata
        Customizing the Interplex Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for iWay Adapter Framework (IWAF)
        Preparing the IWAF Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IWAF
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for JDBC
        Preparing the JDBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JDBC
        Managing JDBC Metadata
        Customizing the JDBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Preparing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Environment
        Overview of the Setup Process
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Creating Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Refreshing the Metadata Repository
        Refresh Security Extracts
        Converting Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Setting the UDCDIC Environment Variable (Windows only)
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Installation Prerequisites
        Overview of the Set Up Process
        Enabling JD Edwards World Security
        Enabling Tracing
        Frequently Asked Questions
      Using the Adapter for Lawson
        Adapter for Lawson: Overview
        Configuring the Adapter for Lawson
        Preparing the Lawson Environment
        Managing Lawson Metadata
        Updating Lawson Security Information
      Using the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Preparing the Lotus Notes Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Managing Lotus Notes Metadata
      Using the Adapter for LDAP
        Preparing the LDAP Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for LDAP
        Managing LDAP Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Preparing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Managing Microsoft Access Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Preparing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MetaMatrix
        Managing MetaMatrix Metadata
        Customizing the MetaMatrix Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
        Microsoft SQL Server Compatibility With ODBC
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP)
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MS OLAP) Environment
      Using the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Server Environment for Millennium
        Configuring the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Millennium Environment
        Managing Millennium Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Millennium Data Source
      Using the Adapter for Model 204
        Preparing the Model 204 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Model 204
        Model 204 Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Model 204 Metadata
        Master Files for Model 204
        Access Files for Model 204
        Customizing the Model 204 Environment
        Using Customized Security Exits
        Adapter Tracing for Model 204
      Using the Adapter for MQSeries
        Preparing the MQSeries Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MQSeries
        Managing MQSeries Metadata
        Customizing the MQSeries Environment
      Using the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Preparing the Mumps Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Digital Standard Mumps
        Managing Mumps Metadata
        Including Records in a Mumps Data Source
      Using the Adapter for MySQL
        Preparing the MySQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MySQL
        Managing MySQL Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the MySQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL
        Preparing the NATURAL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL
        Managing Metadata for NATURAL
        Invoking a NATURAL Program
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Installing NATURAL Support Programs
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Managing NATURAL CICS Transactions Metadata
        NATURAL Data Buffer Processing API
        Invoking a NATURAL CICS Transaction
      Using the Adapter for Netezza
        Preparing the Netezza Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Netezza
        Managing Netezza Metadata
        Customizing the Netezza Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Nucleus
        Preparing the Nucleus Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Nucleus
        Managing Nucleus Metadata
        Customizing the Nucleus Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for ODBC
        Preparing the ODBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for ODBC
        Managing ODBC Metadata
        Customizing the ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Oracle
        Preparing the Oracle Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle
        Managing Oracle Metadata
        Reporting Against an Oracle Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Oracle Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Oracle Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Preparing the Oracle E-Business Suite Environment
        Data Access and Security
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Maintaining Security Rules
      Using the Adapter for parAccel
        Configuring the Adapter for parAccel
        Managing parAccel Metadata
      Using the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Managing PeopleSoft Metadata
        Managing PeopleSoft Secured Data Access
        Managing Connections to PeopleSoft
        Using Administrative Utilities
        Migrating from 7.1x and 7.6.x to 7.7
        Advanced Administrative Topics
      Using the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Preparing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Managing PostgreSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Progress
        Preparing the Progress Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Progress
        Managing Progress Metadata
        Customizing the Progress Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for PSQL
        Preparing the PSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PSQL
        Managing PSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Query/400
        Preparing the Adapter for Query/400 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Query/400
        Managing Query/400 Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Rdb
        Preparing the Rdb Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Rdb
        Managing Rdb Metadata
        Using Multiple Rdb DBMS Files
        Using Multischema Rdb DBMS Files
        Rdb Database Driver Performance
      Using the Adapter for Red Brick
        Preparing the Red Brick Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Red Brick
        Managing Red Brick Metadata
        Customizing the Red Brick Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Remote Servers
        Configuring Remote Servers
        Managing Metadata for Remote Servers
        Executing Stored Procedures
      Using the Adapter for RMS
        Preparing the RMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for RMS
        Managing RMS Metadata
        Manually Describing RMS Files
        Describing Complex RMS Keyed
        Associating an RMS Data Source to a Master File
        Retrieving Data From RMS Files
        Syntax for RMS Master File Attributes
        RMS Attribute Summary
        Read/Write Usage Limitations of the Adapter for RMS
      Using the Adapter for SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (BW)
        Preparing the SAP BW Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP BW
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Creating BEx Queries
        SAP BW Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Managing SAP BW Metadata
        Customization Settings
        Support for BEx Structures
        Producing SAP BW Requests Using SQL
      Using the Adapter for SAP
        Preparing the SAP Environment
        Accessing Multiple SAP Systems
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP
        Post-Configuration Tasks in an SAP Environment
        Managing SAP Metadata
        SAP Table Class Support for an Individual Table
        SAP Support for a Function Module
        SAP Data Type Support
        SAP Open/SQL Support
        Advanced SAP Features
        Setting Up the Report Processing Mode
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Producing SAP Requests
      Using the Adapter for Siebel
        Software Requirements for the Adapter for Siebel
        Preparing the Siebel Environment
        Preparing the Server Environment for Adapter Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for Siebel
        Managing Siebel Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQLBase
        Preparing the SQLBase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQLBase
        Managing SQLBase Metadata
        Customizing the SQLBase Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
        Preparing the SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services
        Managing SQL Server Analysis Services Metadata
        Customizing the SQL Server Analysis Services Environment
        SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Supra
        Preparing the Supra Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Supra
        Supra Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Supra Metadata
        Supra Modules
        Adapter Tracing
      Using the Adapter for Sybase
        Preparing the Sybase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Sybase
        Managing Sybase Metadata
        Reporting Against a Sybase Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Sybase Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Sybase Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Teradata
        Preparing the Teradata Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Teradata
        Managing Teradata Metadata
        Reporting Against a Teradata Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Teradata Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Teradata Macro or Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Transoft
        Preparing the Transoft Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Transoft
        Managing Transoft Metadata
        Customizing the Transoft Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniData
        Preparing the UniData Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniData
        Managing UniData Metadata
        Customizing the UniData Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniVerse
        Preparing the UniVerse Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniVerse
        Managing UniVerse Metadata
        Customizing the UniVerse Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for VSAM
        Preparing the Environment for VSAM
        Configuring the Adapter for VSAM
        Managing VSAM Metadata
        Associating a VSAM Data Source With a Master File
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a VSAM Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
        Maintaining VSAM KSDS Data Sources
        Using VSAM Relative Record Data Set (RRDS) Files
        Reviewing SQL Updates to VSAM Data Sources
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Using the Adapter for XBRL
        What Is XBRL?
        Configuring the Adapter for XBRL
        Reporting Against XBRL Instance Documents
        Reporting on Dimensions
      Using the Adapter for XML
        Preparing the XML Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for XML
        Managing XML Metadata
      XA Support
        XA Transaction Management
        Supported Interfaces
        Implementation
        Vendor Specifics
      Aggregate Awareness Support
        Relational Adapters and Aggregated SQL Queries
        Aggregate Awareness in an RDBMS
      Cluster Join
        Embedded Joins
        Embedded Join Master Files
      Translating COBOL File Descriptions
        Creating Synonyms From COBOL File Descriptions
        Controlling the Translation of a COBOL File Description
      Data Set Compression Exit: ZCOMP
        Invoking the ZCOMP Exit
        What Happens When ZCOMP is LOADED?
      Dynamic Private User Exit
        FOCSAM and the GETPRV User Exit
        Physical Implementation of the GETPRV Exit
        Master File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Access File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Calling Parameters and Work Areas
      Validation for Special Characters and Reserved Words
        Validation for Special Characters
        Validation for Reserved Words
      Launch PDF
  DataMigrator
    iWay DataMigrator User's Guide
      Introduction to DataMigrator
        Data Management and Migration Overview
        What Is DataMigrator?
        DataMigrator Architecture
        DataMigrator Server
        DataMigrator Data Management Console
        Server Web Console
        Designing Data Flows and Process Flows
        Revised Functionality
        Getting Help
        iWay Software on the Web
      Setting Up DataMigrator
        DataMigrator Setup At a Glance
        Remote Server Setup At a Glance
        DataMigrator Setup
        Initiating Server Administration Tasks
        Authorizing DataMigrator Server Usage and Administration
        Managing Application Directories and Configuring the Application Path
        Configuring Data Adapters
        Creating Metadata
        Testing Sample Data and Process Flows
        Performing Server Administration Tasks
        Upgrading DataMigrator From Release 4.3 or 5.1
        Upgrading DataMigrator from Release 5.2, 5.3, 7.1, or 7.6
      Planning a DataMigrator Application
        Designing Your Application
        Using Synonyms for Data Sources and Data Targets
        Reviewing Your Data Sources
        Reviewing Your Data Targets
        Establishing Security for DataMigrator
      Working in the Data Management Console
        Data Management Console Interface
        Navigation Pane
        DataMigrator Workspace
        Text Editor
        Main Menu
        Toolbars
        Text Editor Toolbar
        Console Log
        Setting Flow Properties
        Viewing Properties
        Setting User Preferences
        User Privileges
        License Code
        Configuring National Language Support
        Ending a Data Management Console Session
      Designing a Data Flow
        The Data Flow Interface
        Simple Data Flow at a Glance
        Complex Data Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Data Flow
        Specifying Data Sources
        Creating a Source Transformation in a Data Source Object
        Joining Data Sources
        Adding a SELECT to a Data Flow
        Adding a UNION to a Data Flow
        Selecting Columns
        Testing the SQL Statement
        Specifying Filters in a Data Flow
        Specifying Sorts
        Selecting a Data Target
        Specifying Data Target Options
        Mapping Transformations
        Using Variables in a Flow
        Using Functions
        Column Formats and Mapping
        Setting Properties of a Flow
        Running a Data Flow
        Creating a Direct Load Flow
        Creating a DBMS SQL Flow
      Designing a Process Flow
        Process Flow Methodology
        Process Flow Interface
        Simple Process Flow At a Glance
        Complex Process Flow at a Glance
        Creating a Process Flow
        Adding a Saved Procedure to a Process Flow
        Assigning and Using Variables in a Process Flow
        Maintaining Continuous Processing in a Single Agent
        Executing a Process Flow That Contains Only Stored Procedures
        Adding E-Mail Messages to a Process Flow
        Setting Connection Logic
        Grouping and Controlling Simultaneous Execution of Flows
        Running a Process Flow
        Scheduling a Process Flow
      Tutorial: Creating Data and Process Flows With DataMigrator
        What You Are Going To Do
        Startup and Setup Tasks
        Exercise 1: Creating the Data Flow
        Selecting and Joining Data Sources
        Selecting and Managing Columns
        Adding Data Targets
        Submitting the Data Flow
        Data Flow Review
        Exercise 2: Creating the Process Flow
        Starting the Process Flow
        Adding a Data Flow Object to the Process Flow
        Branching in the Process Flow
        Submitting the Process Flow
      Generating Reports, Viewing the Log File, and Printing Flows
        DataMigrator Log, Statistics, and Summary Flow Reports
        Scheduler Reports
        Impact Analysis Reports on Synonyms, Procedures and Columns
        Working With a Report
        Viewing a Detailed Flow Report and Log File
        Printing a Graphical Representation of a Data or Process Flow
      Optimizing Performance
        Improving Data Extraction Performance
        Using Automatic Passthru
        Improving Data Loading Performance
        Improving Lookup Performance
      Working With Synonyms
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Using Variables in a Synonym
        Variables Attribute Summary
        Use a Variable in a Synonym
        Creating, Enhancing, and Editing Synonyms Using Modeling View
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Viewing Data Lineage for a Column
      Advanced DataMigrator Tips and Techniques
        Overview of Examples
        Creating Sample Data and Metadata
        Horizontal Partitioning with Multi-Table Load
        Using the Decode Function
        Generating a Surrogate Key
        Generating a Surrogate Key Using Slowly Changing Dimensions
        Mapping to a Sequential File of a Specific Format
        Creating and Using Reusable Transformations
        Creating a Target File With Multiple RECTYPEs
        Combining Multiple Sources Rows in a Single Target Row
        Using Lookups to Create Multi-Table Flows Without Joins
        Record Logging
        Using Variables in Data Flows
        Creating a Data Flow Using a Target Based on a Predefined XML Schema
        Loading a Target Table Using the File Listener
        Loading a Star Schema
        Iterating Through Multiple Tables
      Change Data Capture
        Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture
      DataMigrator Log Statistics and Tables
        Log and Statistics Tables
      Event-Based Scheduling
        Starting Flows With CMRUN
        Starting Flows With CMASAP
        Starting Flows With Your Own API Program
        Starting Flows From FOCUS
        Determining the Status of an Event-Based Flow
      Problems, Errors, and Troubleshooting
        DataMigrator Status Codes and Server Messages
        Server Run-Time Error Codes
        DataMigrator Management Problem Resolution
        Including Run-Time Messages in the ETL Log
        Performing a Trace to Diagnose Server Problems
      Customizing Your Environment
        DataMigrator Parameters
      Source Management
        Overview of Source Management
        Source Control Security Server and Client Setup
        Configuring Source Management and Setting Up Source Control
        Using a Source Control System to Manage Procedures and Synonyms
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Functions Reference
      Functions Overview
        Function Arguments
        Function Categories
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Character Functions
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a Character String
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as a Binary Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to a Decimal Value
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a Character String
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
        LCWORD: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-justifying a Character String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing a Character String
        RJUST: Right-justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in an Indexed Field
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date and Date-Time Functions
        Overview
        Date and Time Components For Date and Date-Time Functions
        Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Obtaining the Financial Year and Quarter
        Date-Time Functions
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Timestamp Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date to a Timestamp
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time as a Timestamp
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Timestamp
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Timestamp to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Field and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Timestamp Date or Time Component as Alphanumeric Value
        HPART: Retrieving a Timestamp Date or Time Component as Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-time Value
        Legacy Date Functions
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months To or From a Date
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days To or From a Date
        CHGDAT: Changing the Format of a Date
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Value to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Number from Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising 'e' to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        NORMSDST: Calculating Standard Cumulative Normal Distribution
        NORMSINV: Calculating Inverse Cumulative Normal Distribution
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
      System Functions
        CLSDDREC: Close All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        PUTDDREC: Write a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
      SQL Character Functions
        CHAR_LENGTH: Finding the Length of a Character String
        CONCAT: Concatenating Two Character Strings
        DIGITS: Converting a Numeric Value to a Character String
        EDIT: Editing a Value According to a Format (SQL)
        LCASE: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        LTRIM: Removing Leading Spaces
        POSITION: Finding the Position of a Substring
        RTRIM: Removing Trailing Spaces
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring From a String Value (SQL)
        TRIM: Removing Leading or Trailing Characters (SQL)
        UCASE: Converting a Character String to Uppercase
        VARGRAPHIC: Converting to Double-byte Character Data
      SQL Date and Time Functions
        CURRENT_DATE: Obtaining the Date
        CURRENT_TIME: Obtaining the Time
        CURRENT_TIMESTAMP: Obtaining the Timestamp (Date/Time)
        DAY: Obtaining the Day of the Month From a Date/Timestamp
        DAYS: Obtaining the Number of Days Since January 1, 1900
        EXTRACT: Obtaining a Datetime Field From Date/Time/Timestamp
        HOUR: Obtaining the Hour From Time/Timestamp
        MICROSECOND: Obtaining Microseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MILLISECOND: Obtaining Milliseconds From Time/Timestamp
        MINUTE: Obtaining the Minute From Time/Timestamp
        MONTH: Obtaining the Month From Date/Timestamp
        SECOND: Obtaining the Second Field From Time/Timestamp
        YEAR: Obtaining the Year From Date/Timestamp
      SQL Data Type Conversion Functions
        CAST: Converting to a Specific Data Type
        CHAR: Converting to a Character String
        DATE: Converting to a Date
        DECIMAL: Converting to Decimal Format
        FLOAT: Converting to Floating Point Format
        INT: Converting to an Integer
        SMALLINT: Converting to a Small Integer
        TIME: Converting to a Time
        TIMESTAMP: Converting to a Timestamp
      SQL Numeric Functions
        ABS: Returning an Absolute Value (SQL)
        LOG: Returning a Logarithm (SQL)
        SQRT Returning a Square Root (SQL)
      SQL Miscellaneous Functions
        COUNTBY: Incrementing Column Values Row by Row
        HEX: Converting to Hexadecimal
        IF: Testing a Condition
        LENGTH: Obtaining the Physical Length of a Data Item
        VALUE: Coalescing Data Values
      SQL Operators
        CASE: SQL Case Operator
        COALESCE: Coalescing Data Values
        NULLIF: NULLIF Operator
      Launch PDF
  Resource Management
    Resource Analyzer Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Analyzer?
        Resource Analyzer Overview
        Resource Analyzer for Decision Support Analysis
        Uses for Resource Analyzer: Performance Analysis
        Introduction to Data Access and Performance Analysis With Resource Analyzer
        Sample Data Access Questions
        How Resource Analyzer Works
        Software Prerequisites
        Overview of the Web Console
        Overview of Reporting With Resource Analyzer
        Integrating Resource Analyzer With WebFOCUS, Managed Reporting, and ReportCaster
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Resource Analyzer Report Options
        Reports Overview
        Resource Analyzer Reporting
        Resource Analyzer Report Options
        General Reports
        Usage Analysis Reports
        Domain Analysis Report
        Impact Analysis Report
        Performance Analysis Reports
        Network Analysis Reports
        Graph Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables in Oracle, DB2, or MS SQL
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Resource Governor Administrator's and User's Manual
      What Is Resource Governor?
        Resource Governor Overview
        Resource Governor Features
        Resource Governor Operations
        How Resource Governor Works
        Resource Governor Usage Monitoring
      Configuring and Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Configuring Resource Management
        Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
        Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Configuring a Central Relational Repository Model
        Configuring Many-to-One Monitoring
        Overview of Enterprise Monitoring
        Configuring the Repository Server
        Configuring the Non-Repository Server
      Creating Custom Rules
        Creating Custom Rules
      Resource Governor Administration
        The Resource Governor Administrator on the Web Console
        Usage Monitoring
        Rule Parameters
        Building Rules
        Governing
      Resource Governor Reports
        Resource Governor Reporting
        Resource Governor Report Options
        General Reports
        Resource Governor Reports
      Getting Help
        Resource Management Administration Help
        Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
      Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
        Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
        Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
        Renamed or Moved Columns
      Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables in Oracle, DB2, or MS SQL
        Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
      Business Rule Language (BRL)
        Using Business Rule Language (BRL)
        BRL Factual Information
        BRL Keywords
        Pre-defined Variables
        Internal Functions
        Customized Rule Examples
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Stop Light
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Visual Discovery - Outlier Finder
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Working with Dashboards
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring a PMF Application
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing the Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Adding and Editing Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Functional Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With Access Roles
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations For Loading Dimensions
        Designing Dimension and Measure Loads
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Designing a Custom Time Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Directly Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Designing a Simple Measure Load
        Excluding a Measure Series From Row-Level Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Running a Measure Load
        Managing Content
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Turning a WebFOCUS Report Into a Gadget
        Exporting a Gadget
        Registering a Gadget
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Creating Measures With the New Measure Wizard
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Combining Security Modes
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration Guide
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        pmf/Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Snapshot and Restore
        Manually Creating a BID Portal View for PMF
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing Manage Reporting Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  References
    Stored Procedure Reference
      Introducing Stored Procedures
        Calling a Stored Procedure
        Stored Procedure Libraries
        Setting the Execution Order
      Calling a Program as a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Compiled Program
        Calling a Program With EDARPC
        Calling a Program With CALLPGM or EXEC
        Calling a Program With SQL EX
        Passing Parameters
        Program Communication
      Calling a JAVA Class as a Stored Procedure
        Execute Using CALLJAVA
        Execute Using EX
        Execute Using SQL EX and SQL CPJAVA EX
        Passing Parameters
        Writing a JAVA Class
        JAVA Class Communication
        Compiling and Running a JAVA Program
      Writing a 3GL Compiled Stored Procedure Program
        Program Requirements
        Setting Up the Control Block
        Storing Program Values
        Error Handling
        Issuing the CREATE TABLE Command
      Writing a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Commands Included in a Procedure
        Commands and Processing
        Commenting a Procedure
        Sending a Message to a Client Application
        Controlling Execution
        Using Variables
        Supplying Values for Variables
        Branching
        Looping
        Calling Another Procedure
        The -REMOTE Commands
        Reading From and Writing to an External File
        .EVAL Operator
        Creating Expressions
        Using Functions
        Using Commands Specific to an Operating System
        ON TABLE HOLD
        ON TABLE PCHOLD
      Platform-Specific Commands and Features
        DYNAM Command (MVS)
        Comparison of TSO Commands, JCL, and DYNAM
        DDNAME Translation in User-Written Subroutines: MSODDX
        FILEDEF Command Under VM
        FILEDEF Command Under UNIX, Windows, i5/OS, z/OS, and OpenVMS
      Dialogue Manager Quick Reference
        Dialogue Manager Commands
      GENCPGM Usage
        Using GENCPGM
        Subroutine Source Examples and Runtime Testing
      Launch PDF
      Purchase manual
    iWay API Reference V7.1
      Introducing the API
        Introduction to the API
        API Call-Level interface
        Overview of the Data Reference Model
        Introduction to Messaging and Queuing
      API Data Structures
        Data Type Summary
        Data Structures
        Column Information Block
      Interface Overview
        Administrative Method Calls
        Communications Method Calls
        Data Access Method Calls
        Control Flow
      Method Reference
        Using API Methods
        API Method Calls
      Environment Variables
        Assigning and Inspecting Variables
        Global and Local Variables
        Valid Setting Codes and Variables
      Usage Considerations
        SQL Translation
        Using Prepared Statements
        Large Object Support
        National Language Support
        Transaction Processing
        Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs)
        Security Considerations
      Advanced Usage Considerations
        Multithreading
        Multiplexing (Deprecated)
        Semiplexing (User Multiplexing)
        Result Set Management
        Passivating Connection Option
      Platform-Specific Considerations
        Using the API in the OS/400 Environment
        Using the API in the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Using the API in the OS/390 and z/OS Environment
        Using the API in the MVS Environment
        Using the API in the OpenVMS Environment
        Using the API in the UNIX Environment
        Using the API in the VM Environment
      Tracing
        Tracing Within the Microsoft Windows Environment
        Alternative Tracing Methods
        Tracing Within the MVS Environment
        Tracing Within the UNIX, OS/390, z/OS, OpenVMS and OS/400 Environments
        Configuring Tracing
        Activation of Tracing
      Messaging and Queuing
        Asynchronous Database Processing With the API
        API Messaging and Queuing Model
        Transaction Processing Considerations
        Method Calls
        Processing Answer Set Large Objects
      Sample Include, Copybook and Global Files
        C and C++ Header File: EDA.H
        Cobol Copybook: EDACPY
        Visual Basic Globals:EDAGLOB.BAS
      Programming Examples
        Sample Files
        API Programming in C
        API Programming in C++
        API Programming in Visual Basic
        API Programming in Cobol
        API Programming in RPG
      Status Codes
        API Status Codes
        API Status Code Descriptions
      Launch PDF
    iWay Messages and Codes Manual V7.1
      Application Agent Messages
        Messages 001 - 2000
      Supra Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2001 - 2200
      Infoman Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2201 - 2300
      NOMAD Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 2401 - 2500
      General SQL Messages
        Messages 2501 - 2700
      DSM Mumps Messages
        Messages 2701 - 2900
      Adabas Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 3001 - 3100
        Messages 4451 - 4600
      General Table Service Messages
        Messages 3201 - 4000
        Messages 36201 - 36600
      IMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4201 - 4300
        Messages 42001 - 42200
      CA/IDMS Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4301 - 4450
      TOTAL Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4601 - 4800
      MODEL 204 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 4801 - 5000
      System 2000 Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 11001 - 11400
        Messages 12001 - 12301
        Messages 13501 - 14001
        Messages 50001 - 50101
      XA Transaction Manager Messages
        Messages 11501 - 11600
      CA-DATACOM Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 12001 - 12300
        Messages 13001 - 13100
        Messages 14001 - 14902
        Messages 21101 - 21200
        Messages 50001 - 50100
      General Server Messages
        Messages 13001 - 13400
      SQL Translator Messages
        Messages 14001 - 14200
      DataMigrator (ETL Manager) Messages
        Messages 18001 - 18800
      Fusion Database Messages
        Messages 20001 - 20600
      Server Messages
        Messages 32001 - 32600
      Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 35801 - 36000
      Resource Analyzer/Resource Governor Messages
        Messages 36001 - 36200
      XML Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 42201 - 42456
      WebFOCUS Messages
        Messages 43001 - 43039
      Essbase Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43201 - 43280
      FOCUS Bull Data Adapter Messages
        Messages 43501 - 43583
      Application Adapter Server Messages
        Messages 43701 - 43905
      General Parser Messages
        Messages 44001 - 44619
      Connector Error Messages
        Messages 0 - 10 and -1 to -39
      Common User Abend Codes
        Codes 401 - 4091
      XMI/Datacom and Miscellaneous Error Messages
        XMI/Datacom Error Messages
        Messages 1714 - 1850
      COBOL FD Translator Messages
        COBOL FD Translator Messages
      The EDA198 Error Message
        EDA198 Error Message Overview
        Diagnosing EDA198 on VM
        Diagnosing EDA198 on OS/390 and z/OS
      Launch PDF
    iWay SQL Reference V7.1
      Introduction
        SQL Translation Services
        Language Dialect
      SQL Services
        SQL Passthru Services
        Using SQL Passthru
        Enabling SQL Passthru
        Catalog Requirements
        Valid Database Engine Settings
        SQL Translation Services
        SQL Translation Operations
        Dialect Translation
        Data Manipulation Language (DML) Generation
        Join Optimization in DML Generation
      Language Elements
        BNF Conventions
        Characters
        Tokens
        Qualifiers
      SQL Reference
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        SELECT Statement
        Scalar Functions
        Column Functions
        Predicates
        Data Manipulation Commands
        Commit and Rollback
      Tables and Views
        Creating Tables
        Creating Views
      Preparing and Executing SQL Requests
        Preparing SQL Requests
        Executing SQL Requests
      SQL Translate Keywords
        Keywords
      BNF Summary
        Condensed SQL Language Syntax Definition
      Launch PDF